bhikkhu bodhi’s pali course, freely available online, based on the

New Course In Reading Pali_James W Gair & W S Karunatillake.

http://bodhimonastery.org/a-course-in-the-pali-language.html

!i
 ANEW COURSE
IN READING PALl
Entering the Word. of the Buddha

jAMES w. GAJR
W.S. K-\RUNATILLAJ{E

II ,, .
"i!
..
'I

MOTILAL BANARSIDASS PUBLISHERS

PRIVATE LIMITED • DELHI
 5th Reprin~ Delh~ 2014 I
First Indian Edition: Delhi, 1998
Il DEDICATION

©JAMES W. GAIR ! . svakkhato bhagavata dhammo,

All Rights Reserved l sandittthiko, akaliko, ehipassiko, opanayiko,
I
i' · · paccatal'!l veditabbo villnuhi'ti
.ISBN: 978-81-208-1440-0 (Cloth) f
'ISBN: 978-81-208-1441-7 (Paper) I
I
\
I .
* * *
MOTILAL BANARSIDASS
41 U.A. Bungalow Road,Jawahar Nagar, Delhi IIO 007
8 Mahalaxmi Chamber, 22 BhuJabhai Desai Road, Mumbai 400 026
203 Royapettah High Road, Mylapore, Chennai 600.004 sabbe satta bhavantu sukhitatta!
I 236, 9th Main Ill Block,Jayanagar, Bengaluru 560 Oil
Sanas Plaza, 1302 Baji Rao Road, Pune 4ll 002
8 Camac Street, Kolkata 700 017
,Ashok Rajpath, Patoa 800 004
Chowk, Varanasi 221 001

'I
:[

Printed in India
by RP Jain at New Age Books Printing Unit,
A-44, ~araina Industrial Area, Phase I, New Delhi-110028
and published by JP Jain for Motilal Banarsidass Publishers (P) Ltd,
41 U.A. Bungalow ~oad, Jawahar Nagar, Delhi-110007
 PREFACE
This book had its beginnings in a set of graded readings and grammatical
notes that the authors- began to assemble and discuss a number of years ago,
when we found that .there was a lack of introductory material for Pall that
emphasized reading and a direct approach to texts that could be read by beginning
students and at the same time conveyed some of the fundamental Buddhist ideas
and concepts that were embodied in the Pall tradition. Professor Kc;~runaiillake
played the primary role in the original selection, which thus had a Sri Lankan
Buddhist perspective, At the same time, we believed that a text of this nature
should be graded in terms of grammar and as far as possible, vocabulary, since
we were aiming at a beginning student, and did not want to presume any priof
knowledge, as of Sanskrit Thus we resolved throughout to treat Pali as a language
in its own right In short, we attempted to apply the same approach that .we and
others had used in texts for modem spoken and written languages. Along the
way to the present work, there were numerous replacements, additions, and re-
ord~rings, along with many valuable and pleasant hours of analysis and discussion
of both grammar and content. These lessons have also been used in successive
forms in our Pali classes, and the· progress and the reactions of the students have
been encouraging indeed. We hope that the original perspectiVe and intent haS
! ,! been retained.
Too many colleagues ahd students have contributed comments and
encouragement for us to name them, but we would particularly like to single out
a few. Successive generations of students have pointed out mispririts and missing
'' items, along with unclarities or difficulties that they encountered. In particular,
Kim Atkins not only fulfilled those functions, but typed a great deal of the text in
an earlier form. Richard Carlson and Tamara Hudec were particularly active in the
editing function as they learned. Ratna Wijetunga and L. Sumangala contributed
suggestions, and colleagues and friends, such as john .Ross Carter, Charles
Hallisey, and John Paolillo encouraged us to bring this material to final form.
Charles Hallisey also made a special contribution, by using this text in his classes
at Harvard and making numerous suggestions that have found their way into this
version. We also thank ProfeSsor Lakshmi Narayan Tiwari for his valuable
suggestions, and Mr N.P. Jafu of Motilal Banarsidass for his help in bringing this
work to pUblication at last.
We will be happy for comrrients and suggestions, and hope that others will
find these materials useful as we have. If it offers, even in a si:nall way, entry for
more students, whether in formal classes or not, into 'the language and thought of
p-afi Buddhist texts, we will feel more than amply rewarded for what efforts we
have put into the task. · ·

James W. Gair W.S. Karunatifiake

i:
ltbaca; New York Kelaniya, Sri Lanka
,,
'1': July, 1994

!1,

·'
'1:'
 CONl'ENTS

DEDICATION v
PREFA.CE vii
INTRODUCTION xi
PART 1: THIS TEXT AND HOW TO USE IT xi
PART II: PALl ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION xiii
.\ PART Ill: THE LANGUAGE AND TEXTS xvii
'II PART IV: SOME USEFUL SOURCES xxi
LESSON I 1
LESSON II 14
LESSON Ill 29
LESSON IV 45
LESSON V 63
LESSON VI 77
LESSON VII 97
LESSON VIII 109
LESSON IX 121
LESSON X 133
LESSON XI 147
LESSON XII 163
GENERAL GLOSSARY 179
GRAMMATICAL INDEX 203
BY PAU ENTRIES 203
BY ENGLISH ENTRIES 206

!i
-:;

),!

:rl
r,
-~~~
I
,.,li
·.1
.!:, I
I
]l'.i
 INTRODUCTION

WHAT IS IN THl~ INTRODUCilON: This introduction is in four parts: The

first describes. the principl~s on which this text is organized, and suggests how it is
intended to be most efficiently used. Students, especially those Proceeding on
their own outside of a regular• class, are thus strongly urged tO read that section-
before beginning their study. The second part deals with the alphabet and
alphabetical order, with some information on. the pronUnciation (phonological
system)system of P~.m. Interested students may investigate the latter, but all should
at least become acquaint€d with the order of the alphabet in order to use the
glossaries iri this text. The third part gives some general background to Pali
language and literature, particularlY those works on which we have drawn for
our readings. Lastly, there is a brief list of basic sources that the student might
find useful in studying Pali, and continuing past this text.
Cumulative glossaries, and indices of grammatical forms and topics will be
found at the end of the voh.ime.

PART 1: THIS TEXT AND HOW TO USE IT

The readings and grammatical' notes included in this text are intended to
serve as a Primer to introduce students to the reading of authentic Buddhist texts
in Pcili (sometimes written as PaJi anQ in Eriglish usage commonly written simply as
PaiD. The ~Jllphasis throughout is thus on acquiring the.ability to read, and the
texts have !111 been selected and-Ordered with that goal in mind. At the same time,
however, we have operated under the principle that such reading should not be a
mere exercise, but should have significant and interesting content. We have thus
made every attempt to make every reading, even if a selection from a larger text,
self-contained and meaningful and in some sense complete in content. We have
also assumed .no knowledge of Sanskiit or any Other Indo-Aryan language; but
have approached Pali as a language in its own right. We have also assumed a
wide range of learners, ranging from the interested s'tudent of Buddhisril who may
be approachillg the texts on his/her own, throu·gh college freshmen and graduate
students. In the classes in which the successive versions of this teXt have been
used, we have found that it' can indeed be used successively by such a range of
learners. We have thus attempted throughout to make the grammatical
explanations as clear and non-technical as passible, though obviously a Student
with some .general grammatical knowledge, and especially one who has had
expOsure to some other language with case and verb agreement may find them,
and probably the readingS, easier at first. ·
F:or this book to be used effectively, however, the follo\ving points about
its organization and the selection of texts should be kept in mind:

l. Each lesson has three parts: (l)· a set of basic readings and an
accompanying glossary, (2) grammatical notes on the forms in the lesson, and (3)
a set of further readings with its own glossary. The further readings ·introduce no
new grammatical points, but reinforce those already presented. Thus the student
should work .out the basic readings carefully, con.•mlting the vocabulary and the

T
i 1_:

I ,,·'.
I·,''
iII
'

I~~'·'
~~Q~- . . .
· grammar: After _that he or she will have the equipment to read the. further
'readings for necessary practice and reinforcement, usually needing only to consult

2. The readings have been carefully graded, particularly for grammatical

features, -and the· vocabulary is·. cumulative. llm:S "they should be used in the
order given. Sometimes, particularly in the earlier lessons, it was impossible to
, . . range of meaniilgs of such terms. and
here. The student with an mterest m th~ to consult the many scholarly sources
their precise technical sense, IS ~ncoura - Nevertheless the meanings of these
on Buddhist concepts and philosophy. ountered in ~ range of actual contexts,
technical terms are best learned whe~ encwill enable the student to make a start
and it is our hope that the readingS ere
avoid including some forms that we introduce later, given our principle Of using toward that end. ·
:I.
only authentic texts. At the same time, we did not want to overload the earlier
PART !I: PALl ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION
lessons, when everything is new, with most of the grammar. Thus when a form
that is described in a later lesson occurs in an earlier one, we have simply glossed Alphabet and Alphabetical Ord:r; is written in several scripts, depending on
: 1;
the earlier occurrence as a unit, without an explanation, saving that for later. !'ali has no scnptof lts own. duth dience for which it is intended. In the
I,, 3. The student will note that many of the readings, particularly- in earlier the coun~ in which it IS :wntt~ an e R~~~ alphabet with some modific~tions
:I' lessons, contain pas~ages that are repeated with only a few changes ip vocabulary West, it lS commonly wntten. m ~ b . the Pall Text Society, and that lS the
in· each repetition. This was in fact one element in their selection: With such (diacritics), as in. the works Issue Y
I :1
readings, once the-student has·worked out the first part, the rest can be read by general pattern we follow here. h as in the major dictionaries, commonlY
i,l··
looking up only a restricted number of new items. Thus reading them need not be The alphabetical order, _owev~r, dear! necessQ for the students to
be
I. simply laborious exercises in decoding and looking up words, bvt they may be follows an Indic pattern. Smce It will e ~uch sources we have adopted it
I read· as text, with minimal· lookyp. At the same time, grammatical and rhetorical accustome.d to that order if they ared to;se nsonants as -~ set (Ill is considered
patterns will be reinforced, and will be more easily dealt with when encountered here. In that order, the vowels- prec~ e . e co ..
later. Thus these repetitions should not be skipped. On the contrary, they can be in between) .. The order that we use m this text Is.
enjoyable in that they allow the student to approach the text for content, and
what is more, they do represent one rhetorical. device commonly found in Pall a. a i I u u e o Ill k kh g gh (rp.) c ch i jh il t th <) <)h IJ
texts. . t th d dh n P ph b bh m Y r I v s h I
. . . theses after g h. The reason is that it
We may now mention one or two things that we have not taken as· goals Note thitt qt occurs agam ~ paren d bl use in Sinhala and some other
for this text. .th . gle character that has a ou e . . .
· equates W1 . a sm_. .. . F this book, the simple rule to follow m determmmg
Tills book is intended as an introduction to reading Pall, not as an scripts used m wntmg J'ai~: or tween the vowels and the consonants. It
independent scholarly contribution to the linguistic or literQ study of the the alphabetical order lS Ill lS placed~bethe alphabetical order, unless it occurs
language. Thus our grammar_sections are intended as aids to the learner, and we thus precedes all other c?n~onan~rd in which case it follows gh." ln pr~ctice,
have not attemptffl to cover in them all of the V3riants that aile might encounter . before· k, kh. g, or gh W!thm a w ' · · sitions are very close m the
in reading further in texts. However, the student should, after completing the this will give little. difflculty, smce tl the!:: e!:t of a word or before k, kh. g,
readings here, and acquainting himself or herself with the basic vocabu!Q and alphabet,.and llJ. occur~ ~os~ frequent y asome small variations in consulting other
grammatical patter:ns, have sufficient background to make use of other reference or gh. The student ~n· also encoun er . f the forms written with OJ here.
sources, such as those listed at the end of this introduction, to deal with the new b · s is the representation o . -:
sources. Most o VIOU . - . f Some of these may use IJ tOr our
fonns met with in future reading. Some other texts distinguiSh the two ~s~ o(F:. more detail .see the pronunciation
Similarly, a word needs to be Said concerning our treatment of vocabulary. D;l, and some represent Ill before tfsl!l ui I immediately after I rather than at the
One cannot read Piili Buddhist texts without encountering a number of technical
terms, such as dhamma, khaQ.Qa, kamma etc.etc. which haVe nOt only
section that follows.). Also, some .
very end of the alphabet as here m
t 'tins we have followed general Sinhala
, .
specialized, but manifold meanings within Buddhist thought. These have, served as practice).
the basis for extensive commentary, elucidation and disputation within both the
Pall an:d the w~stern scholarly traditions, and- many of them have been the subject
of more than ·one book-length treatment. While we ·are fully aware of the
importance of .such work, and the indispensability of a dear understanding of such
I ~
.Pronunciation: . . spoken language,-its pronunciation
Since Pali is a dasstcal and not a m00em d haVe the testimony of some
also varies frOm place to place .. However, :~c~ and we can gather much from
terms if one is to attain a really adequate understanding of the texts, we have not
attempted to make any original contributions in that direction. Thus we have
glossed forms in relation to their senses in specific texts in which they appear
xii
i indigenous grammars as to how lt was pro~
our general knowledge of Ind!c Ianguagesh I
student read p-an, but' some may fmd
some systematic fashion. Others may so
!
ri>ose of this text is to help the
ri,jto
be able to produce it aloud m
e!mt to listen to texts. What we give

xiii
 here is a general and essentially non-technical description ~f .. 1 · .. - . in etha 'come' is also long. The same rule holds for o. It is like the o in EngliSh
·" In generaI, this accords with the pronunciation cOrasstca 1 Pall 'rose' in koti 'end' but shorter in kotteti 'beats', and thus more bke the .o in
_ Pronur:cmuon. Sri
Buddhist monks (though they may at times fail to ,observe all
distinctions which have been los~ in Sinhala such as the or_
distinction, or alter them s6mewh8t) _ '
Lankan
;orne of_ the
asp Ira e non-aspirate
r 'hoping', though there is no real English count~rpart. One difference between
English and !'""ali and other South Asian languages is that the English counterparts
. of the long vowels are generally pronounced with an offglide at the end. so that
The traditional arrangement of the Pali alphabet, as given above;- is aCtuall 'say· and 'row' are not simple long e and o, but more like ey and ow. Pali vowels,
based on the sounds represented by the character Thi · · Y however. are pronounced "straight through". without the glide,
- - s. s appears clearly if we
arrange t hem as m the chart below· (the arrows will b I · d The labels in the chart of consonants are familiar to phoneticians, but ·we
· e exp rune later)
need not eXplain them all. here to thbse unfamiliar with hat specialty, since the
3 symbols themselves will give 3 sufficient clue in mOst cases. However, we do need
4 5 6 7
1 - + VOWELS: a a i j u ij e o to point out as we go several important distinctions that are not present in English

2 - + 'PURE" NASAL:
J J .,.
JJJ and the familiar European languages but which do exist, or operate differently, in
lndic languages such as Pa!i. For now, note that the .colUmns .in the cbnsonant

CONSONANTS:
IJl

VOICELESs NON-ASPIRATE (STOPS): k

~ ~
El
~§1.

c
r e:
~
!!!.
chart above are arranged by the place in which the sound is articulated in t)te
mouth. Thus the articulation goes from back to front as we proceed from left to
right horizontally along each i:ow of the main consonant bloc!< (try saYing k, t, p
in that order and see what is happening to your tongue and lips).·
l t p
VOICELESs ASPIRATES: Voiced soUnds ~e those produced _with a "buzzing" action in the J.arYnx;
kh ch th th ph and voiceless sounds without it (try stopping your ears and saying b, and'p and
VOICED (NON-ASPIRATE !STOPS); g j cj d b then k and g, etc). This distinction is. of course. important in English and the
VOICED ASPIRATES: European languages as well. Pa!i k, p, g and b · are essentially like th.eir Englisli
gh jh c;lh dh bh
NASALS: counterparts in 'making'. 'hoping', 'good' and 'bathe'. c and j are like English ch
(IJI) jj n
l) m in 'c boose'. and j in 'just'. '
8----i'" RESONANTS y r I v
In Pall. however, there is another distinction along this frontcback axis that
9___,. SPIRANTS s h is unknown in the familiar European languages: the dental vs. retroflex one. The
10 - + OTHER: ! !h
• ' dental consonants are produced with the tongue tip on ·the tooth ridge just back of
the upper teeth. The retroflex ones are produced further back and usually with
THE SOUNDS OF P!I:Ll AND THEIR ALPHABETICAL ORDER the tongue tip curled upward, Actually, English t and d are made in almost the
retroflex position. especially in words like .'to' and 'do', and -are' thus heard as
retroflex by many speakers of South Asian languages. English has no real
'!h ynlike in Etlglish. the letters have a "one symbol • one sound" charact counterparts for the dental sounds, though t and d are far more dental in French.
WI a 1ew exceptions to be noted. _ er,
Spanish. and many European languages.
symbol~e-v~w~~c~~g· ~~ ~ -~ ~ahve Ion~ and short variants, with the macron In l'ali and many other languagE:s of South Asia, however, there is an
Am . . g· ort a IS pronounced roughly like "th . important difference not found . in English; that between nonoaspirated and
s encan. w~at.' ?~. t~e. U- in Britis? 'but'. a is like the a ill 'father·. i .is l~ea th~ aspirated sounds (those written with -h). Aspirates are. produced with an
?tt,
.arne symbol~ I ~e the ee m seethe. u is roughly like oo in 'look' - additional puff of air, or a- breathy release. These aspirate consonants are, apart
!:n~uen~:~~~g:~~~ ·:ea~h~~s~~e~ee Ion~ vowhels, as the name suggest~~~
Ion d h . . an o, owever, do not have distinct
from the difference in aspiration, produced in the same pla~e and manner as their
nol)-aspirate counterparts, English p, t. and k at the beginning· of words' are
th g an s ort vanants, but are pronounced long before single consonants or at aetualil' quite strongly aspirated, as compared, for example, to French, and even
cl e ~nd of ahword and short before dOuble consonants like tt or 'tth or consonant more so to the non-aspirates of the North Indian languages. Note.--however;: t:Q.a,t,
'b~: ~~u~ as I_Id or Ql~. ~~s ~e (short) e, as in ettha 'here' is. like the e in the aspirate consonants in Pall count' as single consonants, hot- clusterS (as noted
, e . e e m etarp this ts like the a i in 'raid' or the a e . , , earlier in relation to the pronunciation of e and o). In the South Asian alphabets,
that the aspirate consonants (tho~e. written with h) count as ~~~e~ s:~~t ,t~~~ in fact, they would be written with single symbols. , · ·
* Where the length is a result of two·w d m is like its English counterpart in 'miss·. n and n are "n-li.ke" sounds that
. - . exhibit the same dental vs. retrOflex distinction as t and t or d ..;and Q, and are
the circumflex symbol'( "' ) t .d th or s co~ng tog~er (sandhi), however, we use
1 Grammar, Section 5.2.) , o ai e student m breaking down the forms. (See Lesson prOnounced accordingly. fl. is produced like the same symbol in- ~panish :s~or .
:1!
xiv XV

I'-~1,,,

The symbol m is more complicated in that h occurs in two places in the system
/1., we use here:. between the vowels and consonants, and also as the nasal_ in the
I : velar column. At the end of a word, it is pronounc~ },ike th_e ~g in. Englis? 'sing'
(to' th.e phonetician, this is one sound,. represented ·as IJ). Wtthin a word, tt does
riot occur alone between vowels, but always immediately preceding a consonant It
then takes on the position of that consonant,· and it is this "chameleon" character,
together with •he fact that it is the only nasal occuning at the end of a wo'?,
that accounts in part for its treatment as a "pure nasal" and thus. for its spectal
placement Note, though, that when 0.1 occurs before _a velar consonant, it will
thus be a velar nasal. Since there is ·no velar nasal in p-aJi occuning elsewhere,
except for ftl·· at the end of a word, two distinct symbols are unnecessary. In this
! I we have followed one Pali manuscript tradition. Other sources, though, use
i;
'1'·.':
; distinct symbols, such as using Ill or u for the "pure nasal" bui n for the velar
nasal before velar consonants. Once the student is used to one system, as here, he
or she should be able to adjust easily to the others. It will, .however, sometimes
affect the alphabetization of some items. In this text, as stated earlier, Ill will be
listed after the vowels uflless it precedes a velar .consonant, in which case it will
follow gh. In practice, only a very few items are affected.
y and v are much like their English counterparts. r is generally produced
as a "trilled" r as in Scots and some varieties of German, or the 'tapped' r of
British 'very', I is like its counterparts in 'Iii y·, and has a corresponding retroflex
sound I., with aspirate I. h. , . . kingdom in what is now Nepal). Mligadhl was an Indo-Aryan language. That IS, It Is
p-aJi consonants may occur in clusters, such as nd, iij, qtg, tv, etc., and
they also occur doubled, as ifl. appa 'little', maggo 'road, path, way' rajialll
'kingdom', ettha 'here' akkhilll 'eye· etc. Note that these !'ali are true doubled
consonants, and not like the doubling in English 'silly' which actually indicates
the nature of the preceding_ vowel,. while the consonant is pronounced singly.
English lacks true double consonants (except where prefixes are concerned, as in
'im-modest', 'un-natural' and· 'il-logical', in some people's speech). As the examples
·show, the aspirate consot;tants in Pali double as unaspirate+aspirate. Thus th and
dh double as tth and ddh, etc.
We can now explain the arrows that we have included in the chart. The
organization of the r-au alphabet and its order, which accords with that of most
South Asian alphabets and the Southeast Asian ones derived from them, is an
ancient and scientific one, based on phonetic principles and going back.at least to
the early Sanskrit grammarians. It operates on several principles, such as vowels
precede consonants ,as ·a set, voiceless · precedes voiced, non-aspirates precede
aspirates, non-nasals in a given pOsition precede nasals, and the overall order is
front to back of the mouth (vowels and resonants are a special case that we. need
not deal with here). The arrows follow these princ,iples, and by following them in
order, the overall order of the alphabet is derived. Some students lllay find this of
help in learning the alphabetical order, but in any case it is certainly not without
interest in its own right from a cultural-historical point of view.
xvi
I
PART Ill: THE LANGUAGE AND TEXTS
i
The Piili Language: A Bit of History: .
r Pall is fundamentally a language of Buddhism, in that virtually all texts m
I :it are Buddhist in nature. Foremost among these are the works of the Pali ·canon,
the Tipitaka or "Three Baskets'' which, particularly in the lands of Theraviida
Buddhism are taken to be the authentic pronouncements of Gotama Buddha
himself. Pali is thus the canonical and liturgical language of Buddhists in
I
r
countries such as Burma, Cambodia, Sri Lanka and Thailand (in so far as
The~ava:da BUddhism can be said to have a liturgy), and is thus that Therava:cta
Buddhism has sometimes been referred to as "Piili Buddhism... It has also, of
course been referred to .as Hinaya:na ("Lesser Vehicle") in contradistinction to
Mahayana ("Greater Vehicle") Buddhism, though that is an appellation not
generally favored by its adherents. . . .
The dates and place of origin of Piili have been the subJect of considerable
scholarly debate through the years, and the position that one takes on the ISsue
may naturally be colored by one's belief as to the auihentici~ of the. canonic~!
texts as the words of the Buddha as originally spoken. By tradition, par1Icularly m.
Sri Lanka, Pall .has been equated with Magadhi, the lndic language spoken at the
time of Gotama (Sanskrit Gautamal Buddha in Magadha, the northeastern lndmn
kingdom in which he primarily preached (though he himself came· from a 'mal'
a representative of the language family of which V ed1c Sanskrit 1s the earl!est
extant example, and which includes Classical Sanskrit and the ma)or later North
Indian languages such as Hindi, Bengali Panjabi, Gujarati and Marath1, (along wtth
Sinhala in Sri Lanka). Since the Indo Aryan languages form a subfamily of the
Indo-European family, !'ali is ultimately related to English, and in fact to most of
the major European languages, as well as, more closely, to· the Iraman languages
such as Avestan, Old Persian, and modern Farsi (the chief language of Iran). .
Indo-Aryan Languages .of the. Buddha'S time and for some cen~~~~s
thereafter are commonly referred to as Prakrits (Sanskrit Prii}lfta), and _!'iili 1~
thus an early Prakrit. Despite the traditional identification of Piili as a Magadh1
Prakrit some scholars have poipted out that it does not share· many of .the
distinctive characteristics that we_ find in Magadhan inscriptions, ·primarily from
the time of the Emperor Asoka (Sanskrit Asoka) in the third century B.C., and
that it does in fact show some features of the dialects of other regions. Thus tt
does appear to have, at the very least, incorporated some fea~ures qf other
languages in the course of its transmission of the texts from ~e time of. Gotama
Buddha. That date, traditionally placed in the seventh and sixth centunes B.C.,
has ci:Iso been a IDa:tter· of some dispute, but our purpose here ts to present the
language itself and the texts, and not to contribute to the scholarly work on those
issues. Thus, as regards Pali and its home within India, we may qu?te th: great
Pall Scholar· Wilhelm Geiger as representative of one scholar's cau~ous VI~W. of _
the tradition as balanced by observations of linguistic scholars, while remmdmg
the reader that others have disagreed Wi_!h the view expressed:
xvii

1 consider it wise not ·to hastily reject the tradition altogether hut
rather to under.$tand it to mean that Pali was indeed no pure Magadhi, but
was yet a fonn of. the popular speech which was- based on Magadhi .and
which was used by the Buddha himself.
· (?ali Literature and Language, pp. 5-6)
A similar measured view has beeri expressed by the well-respected modern
Buddhist scholar, Reverend Walpola Rahula:
It is reasonable to assume that the Buddha must have spoken one or
more of the dialects current in the 6th century B.C., in Magadha. In a way,
any one or" all of them may legitimately hrive been called Magadhi.
Although we know nothing definite about those_dialects today, we may
reasonably guess that they could not have been basically very different
from one another. But whether the dialect the Buddha usually spoke was
exactly the same as the language -of the Tipitaka as we have it today is
another matter.
What we call Pali today is nOt a· homogeneous but a composite
language, containing several dialectal forms and expressions. It is probably
based on the Miigadhi which the Buddha generally spoke, and out of it a
new artificial, _literary language later evolved.
"Pali as a Language for Transmitting an !'-uthentic R~igious Tradition"•
Those who -wish. to know more may consult the sources, including some of
those mentioned following this introduction; suffice· it tQ say here that for the
devout Buddhis( the Pali texts of the canoh do indeed represent the actual words
of Gotama Buddha himself, Whenever they_were delivered.
The Literature of Pilli:
· Pilli · texts fall into two major divisions: The canon and the non-Canonical
literature .. The texts in this volume are taken· for the most pa:rt from the c8non,
along with a few other .works to be mentioned later. But what do we refer to as
the canon? We can answer this by addressing two related questions: first, how
were the texts transmitted; and, second, how......_are the works in the texts organized.
One thing is clear: The text~ were transmitted orally for a number of
centuries, Along the way, there were 'three main councils -that contributed to
their codification. The first took place at Rajagaha (Sanskrit Rajagrha) shortly
after the death of the Buddha, placed by Sri Lankan tradition as 543 B.C., though
that too· has been· much disputed. At that council, the major ~ivisioils. known as
the Vinaya and Sutta (which we will characterize later) were settled, as recited
by the disciple Ananda. The Second council, at Vesall (Sanskrit Vaisii}i), was
,called about a hundred years later, largely because -of dissension, particularly
concerning .the Vinaya. The third council, at. Pataliputta (Sanskrit .l'iifaliputra),
took place under the Emperor Asoka (Sanskrit As'oka) (264-227 B.C.). Here the
* in Gatare Dham:mapala, Richard Gombrich, and K.R. Norman eds. Buddhist Studies in
Honour of Hammalava Saddhatissa, .University of Sri jayawardenepura and Lake House
Publishers, Sri Lanka, 1984
xviii
canon as we know it was -essentially completed _and formalized, and included a
third division, the Abhidhamma. This council also "refuted wrong views", and it
was there that the Theravada school was founded and the decision taken to send
missions abroad, including the mission of the monk Mahinda that. brought the
doCtrine to Sri Lanka The generally accepted view is that the canon was reduced
to writing only in the first century B.C. (At the Aluvihara in Sri Lanka). In fact,
its oral transmission ·helps to account for some of the characteristics of the texts,
particularly the degree _of repetition found in· them, making oral transinission
easier (and a feature which, as stated earlier, we have ·attempted to put to good
use as a teaching device here):
The most widely known .traditional diyision of the texts that are considered
to belong to the canon, as representative of the Buddha's actual teaching, is the
Tipitaka (''J:hree Baskets) one. According to this classification, there are three
main divisions or Pitakas, the Sutta, Vinaya, and Abhidhamma, which can be
Ii generally characterized as follows:
I. The Sutta Pitaka contains the Dhamma (General teachings of the Buddha)
proper, s~metimes referred to as such. It contains five Nikiiyas, or
I collections of suttantas (Dialogues of the Buddha) These are defmed and
arranged essentially by their form, as follows:
a. The Digha Nikiiya, ("Long" Collection) .contains the longest suttas
(-Sanskrit siitra)
b. The Majjhima Nikiiya("Middle" Collection) contains suttas of middle
length. ·
I c. The Safllyutta Nikiiya ("linked" or "Grouped" Collection) in which the
suttas are arranged by topic. It -is this collection that contains th~ Buddha's
i first sermon, the Dhammacakkapavattanasutta, with which we cOnclude
I the. readings in this book.
d. The Alpguttara Nikaya (or The "Gradual", or "by one li.mb more"
Collection) in which the ·sections are arranged in ascending order according
to numbers that figure in the texts themselves.
e. The Khuddaka Nikaya ("Shorr or "Small" Collection).The exact contents
of this collection varies somewhat between Sri Lanka, Burina, and Thailand,
·but it includes the Dhammapada and the, ]fitaka verses (Only the verses,
not the stories to which they relate are canonical; the stories are
considered commenuirial). It also' includes the hynms of the monks and
nunS (Theragatha and Therigiithii) along with a number of other works,
such as the Suttahipiita and some works that might be loosely categorized
as "prayer books".
ll. The Vinaya Pitaka dealing with Monastic Discipline.
lll. The Abhidhamma Pitaka. Scholastic and partially metaphysical in nature, it
contains much philosophical treaunent of th~ Buddha's teachings. 'It is
generally considered the most diffiCult of the texts, and a niastery bf it is
thus highly regarded by Buddhist .scholars.
xix
 IIi!
i .

I
I '
I, m' addition to the above, there is the Mahaparitta, a text recited -by monks
at paritta (Sinhala pirit) ceremonies invoking the auspiciousness and protection of
the Dhamma. · .
There is another traditional classification of. the canon is into five divisions,
(Nikiiyas). These are the five divisions of the Sutta Pitaka ~f_ the Tipitaka, with
the Abhidhamma and the Vinaya folded mto the Khuddaka Nikaya.
In addition to the canonical texts, there is a considerable body of non-
canonical literature in Pali, continuing up 'to the present time. A large part of it
would fall under the heads of commentarial litera,ture or chronicles. The
remainder includes various types of -works, including narrative and instructional
works and some grammars. In addition, there are a number of inscriptions, most of
them in Southeast Asia.
There is a large body of commentarial literature in Pall, continuing over
many centuries. The most famous commentari~s. or atthakathas, Were Written
by a monk named Buddhaghosa, who lived in the 5th century A.D. He was born in
. South India, but went to. Sri Lanka, where he· wrote· his commentaries, apparently
basing ·much of his work on earlier_ Sinhala commentaries subsequently lost He
!:,I was also the author of the famous Visuddhimagga 'Path of Punfication',. a
compendium of Buddhist doctline. The· well-known Jataka stones are actually
commentarial literature as well: that is, they form the commentaries on the ja:taka
verses that are inducted in the canon. and this ]iitakatthakatii has also been
attributed to Buddhaghosa. In addition to the commentaries, there are other forms
Or commentarialliterature, including tiklfs, subcommentarieS on the commentaries.
The Chronicles include the Dipaval!lsa (4th or early 5th Century A.D.) and
the Mahiival!lsa (probably the early 6th Century), and present the history of Sn
Lanka from a Buddhist-Monastic perspecti_ve. These <;.:hronicles were continued by
the Cillaval!lsa which continued until the arrtval of the 'Brttish in Sn Lanka. In
fact, they are being-continued even today. · history of the language and its structure, pnmarily from a histoncal perspective,
Among the remaining works, there are two of particular interest here,
since we have drawn somf readings from them. _One of them, the Milindapaiiha
(sometimes in the singular Milindapaiiho) 'Questions of King Milinda' dates from
before Buddhaghosa's commentaries. It may have been translated from Sanskrit,
and was also translated into Chinese. It consists of a _series of dialogues between
PART IV: SOME USEFUL SOURCES
The following is a .bnef list, with some annotations, of works that the student
might find it useful to cOnsult in looking for further information on grammatical or
lexical Poirits iii this text, or in approaching further reading.
Buddhadatta, Mahathera AP. Condse Pall-English Dictionary. Colombo
Apothecanes, 1957. (Replinted Motilat Banarsidass, Dellti 1989). A very handy
concise dictionary. Although it lacks the full scholarly apparatus, such as the
listing of valiants, etc. of the fuller dictionanes below, it is handy to use, and the
definition$, though bnef; capture well the essence of the terms. .
There is also an English-Pall Dictionary by the same reverend author. (Pali
Text Society 1955, replinted Motilal Banarsidass, Delhi 1989).
Geiger, Wilhelm. PiiJi Literawre and Language. Originally published by . the
University of Calcutta 1943, but reprtnted by Onental Books and Munshrram
Manoharlal New Dellti. A translation by Bataklishna Ghosh of the author's work
in Geiman'. A basic · scholarly Source on the language, it is technical and
concentrates on historical phonology and morphology. It includes an extensiVe
index of· forms that makes it very useful for finding· valiants. It also contains a
brief survey of the literature.
. Hazra Kanai Lal. PiiJi Language and Literawre: A Systematic Survey and Historical
SWd;. Vol 1: Language: History and StrucWre, Literawre: Canonical Piili Texts;
Vol2: Literawre: Non-Canonical Piili Texts. D.K. Prtntworld (P), New Delhi 1994. A
recently 3ppearing-- detailed and extensive survey. It include~ an. account of .the
but it is especially useful as a reference for the entire range of p-aJi textual
materiaL both <;.:anonical and_non-canonical,
. Miiller, Eduard. A Simplified Grammar of the Pall LangUage. Bharatiya Vidya
Prakashan, Varanasi, India. A shorter and simpl~r grammar than Geiger's, but also
gives many variants, along with paradigms of basic forms. L~~ Buddhada~a·s

l.
two people. One is King Milinda (Greek Menander), a ,second century king of the
Graeco-Bactlian kingdom remaining from Alexander the Great's incursions into Dictionary, its concise nature makes it a good source for the frrst look up of
what is now Mghanistan and the northwest Indian subcontinent. The other some unfamiliar form. (Replinted)
participant is Nagasena, a learhed monk, who expounds Buddhist doctrine in
:1, 'i answer to the King's questions. The penetrating nature of the King's questions and Nyanatiloka . .Buddhist Dictionary, Manual of Buddhist Terms and Doctrines. Third
ii' !
revised and elarged edition edited by Nyanaponika. Colombo: Frewm, 1972 (frrst
il the clarity and wit of Nagasena's answers and explanations, make this a lively as
,,:,:1;::, :,'I well as instructive introduction to Buddhist doctrine, and one 'that iS accessible to published 1952). A very useful compendium of the BuddhiSt termmology, mcluding
the studeilt at a fairly early stage. both terms and their: relationships.
•I
•I:. Th·e other text on which we have drawn is Rasavahini, · compiled in Sri
Lanka, probably in the 14th Century. It is a compilation of 103 legends and stones Rahula, Walpola Sn. What the Buddha Taught (revised edition). Grove Press, New
which, though purportedly instructional in nature, are couched in a flowing, lively York 1974 (first published 1959) A clear and well-wrttten mtroducuon to Buddh.st
·,1'
style. doctlines. Includes a glossary of terms. ·
'·
;!

!'I;• i: XX
xxi

1·' 1·, 1'1

',
.I"; ·''
 '
LESSON I

Rhys Davids. T.W. and W. Stede. Pali-English Dictionary. Pali Text Society, l Buddharp. saral)arp gacch8mi
1921-25., (reprmted Mu~shiram Manoharlal, New Delhi 1975). Generally referred to dhammam saral)arp. gacthami
as the PTS Dtctionary . Much fuller than Buddhadatta's with many va1iants and samgbarp. saral)aiJl gacch8mi
etymological Information. It also makes more distinctions concerning the technical
nature of terms. The fullest available QictionarY (except for those completed parts DutiYaiP- pi buddharp saraiJl)fJl gacch8mi·
of the CPO of Trenckner et al) dutiyarp. pi dhammam sara~;tarp_ gacchi'imi
dutiyam pi sarp.gham saraQarp. gaccharni
Trenckner. Andersen, Smith et al. A Critical PiiJi Dictionary (The CPO).
~openhagen 1924-. A full-scale dictionary, and a .major scholarly work, but still Tatiyarp. pi buddham saraiJ-arp. gacchami
mcomplete. In fact, only the very first part of the alphabet has appeared, so that tatiyam pi dhammaip. saral)arp. gacchami
It IS of hnnted use to the s~dent, despite the value of the completed parts to the tatiyarp pi samgharp. saral)aQl gacchami
scholar. ·
2. ...Cittam, bhikkhave, itdantaiil mahato anatthaya ·sarpvattatiti.
Warder, A. Introduction to Pali. Pali Text Society, 1963. An introductory text ... cittam, bhikkhave, dantarp_ mahato atthaya sarp.vattatiti.
differently ?rganize? than the present o1_1e. Less centered on reading'.and more on .. cittarit, bhikkhave. aguttarp. mahato anatthaya sarpvattatiti.
ji,i grammar.' It contams a number of very useful grammar sections, and its ...cittarp, bhikkhave, guttarp. mahato atthaya sarp.vattatiti.
!, grarrunatical Index makes it useful as a reference source. It also includes a very
I '
...cittam, bhikkhave, arakkhitam mahato anatthaya sarp.vattatiti.
useful chart of verb forms (pp. 375 ff.) · ...cittarit. bhikkhave, rakkhitarp_ mahato atthaya s~vattatiti.
I ...cittarp, bhikkhave, asaqlVutarp. mahato anatthaya sarp.vattatiti .
...cittaQl, bhikkhave, samvutarp_ mahato atthaya samva~tat:tti:.
I'
Nfiharp., ·bhikkhave, afiflarp. ekadharil.marp pi samanupassami yarp evarp. adantaiJl,
agu{tatp., arakkhitarp, asarp.vutaQl, mahato anatthilya sarpvattatiti yathayidarp,
li bhikkhave, cittarp.'. cittaQl, bhikkhave, adantaQl, aguttam, arakkhitarp. asarpvutaiiJ.
mahato anattha:ya sarp.vattatiti.
(-A.N.l
,I
3. ... Micchilditthikassa, bhikkhave, anuppanna c'eva akusala dhamma: uppajjanti,
,,
II
uppanna ca akusaia dhamma vepulliiya sarp.Vattantlti.
,''::·
,,'
ji: Naham, bhikkhave, aflfi.arp ekadhammarp_ pi samanupassami yena anuppanna
ii· va kusala . dhanuna n'uppajjanti, uppanna: va kusala dhanuna parihByanti
J!!
!II; I yathayidam, bhikkhave, micchadi))hi.
MicChaditthikassa .bhikkhave, anuppannii c'eva kusata dhamma n'uppajjanti,
!i
uppanna ca kus~a dha~a parihayantlti.
I 'I
i ! I
' N3ham bhikkhave aflfiam ekadhammam pi samanupassami yena anuppanna:
ll lr
, va akusala · dhamma n:uppajj~nti, uppanna· va akusala dhamma paiihayanti
1:1

I
' yathayidarp, bhikkhave, sammaditJhi. '.. .
lr Samma:dit.fuikassa, bhikkhave, antippanna c'eva akusala dhamma n'uppananti,
i, I uppanna ca akusala dhamma: patihayantiti.
(-A.N.)
;,I i,
'I
f
I
t
i Ill xxii 1

'I
l I! I
I
 LESSON I
~ON/

i chando desire, resolution, will

I , I:
4. <Bhikkhu .. )1 generates, causes to be born
I': janeti
... anuppannanaQl pi.ipaki.inaiJI akusatanaiJl dhammanarp anuppadaya ;hiti persistence,· continuity
I i'l I chandHQI janeti; ·vayamati; viriyaqi ltrabhati; cittaQ1 paggal)hBti;_ padahati; third time (accusative of tatiya, 'third',
I ', tady8f!l
1:: .·... uppannanam papaki.inaiP akusalanam dhammanarp. Pahanaya chandarp used adverbially)
I ianeti; vayamati; viriyarp Brabhati; cittarp paggal)hati; padahati ...
!. -ti a forffi of iti, the quotation marker
.... anuppannanalJl kusalanarp dhamrnanarp uppadaya chandmp. janeti; (see this grammar 3.3)
vayamati; viriyarp arabhati; cittarp. paggaoh.Bti; padahati ... tamed
danta
..... Uppannanaf!l kusalanaf!l dhammanaf!l ;hitiya asammosaya bhiyyobhavaya second tiine (accusative of dutiya,
dutiY"f!l
','1' vepulli.i)h! -bhavanaya paripi:iriya chandarp janeti, vayamati; viriyal}1 arabhati; cittaJp dhammo doctrine, physical or mental element
j paggal}hati; padahati... · not (see this grammar 6)
na
(-A.NJ -na + ahc.fip
'!·'·l GLOSSARY 2 n3haf!l
nuppajjati -na + uppajjati
paggal}hati uplifts, takes up, makes ready, holds out/up
1'1 akusala bad, inefficient, sinful
padahati exerts. strives, confronts
agutta unguarded
parthayati decreases, deteriorates
anna other
attho pahanarp. avoidance. destruCtion
advantage, meaning, aim. purpose
I,
II adanta untamed
plipaka sinful. evil, Wicked

·,I~ paripfiri fulfillment, completion

j, anattho disadvantage, pointlessness
1.•, pi emphatic particle (see this grammar 3)
anuppanna not having come into being
,·1.: anupp3do ... buddho a Bu9dha, one who has reached
not coming into existence, enlightenment
'I
I' li:: araklthita
hence non-existing bhavanaya Dative form of bhavana ·development'
' unprotected, unwatched bhikkhave· Oh, mo~ (vocative plural of bhikkhu)
!! • asaflivuta unrestrained (Buddhist) monk
II], I asammosO non-bewilderment, -non-confusion
bhikkhu
iI ' bhiyyobhavo -increase, growth .
I i ahaf!l I (from bhiyyo ·greater' + bhavo 'state')
Jr' arabhati begins
ir'r mahato great, big
(virtyalp... ) takes effort, strives (dative singular of mahanta, ·great, big')
uppanna having come into being,
nticchaditthi incorrect views
hence 'existing' he who has 'incorrect views
uppaijati micchadiWUko
arises, is born, comes into existence yathayidaf!l that is to say, namely, to wit
uppado arisuig, coming into ex1sten.ce · (from yatha 'thus· +idaf!l 'this')
eka one, single, only
I
yarp. which, that (see this grammar 4)
eva verily, indeed (emphatic panicle-see this
'
yena by which (instrumental of ya/ yaf!l)
granJmar 3) (see this grammar 4)
ev8f!J thus
kusala rakkhita protected, watched
virtuous, good, efficient, skilled or (see this grammar 3)
gacchati goes va
gutta vayamati strives, endeavors, struggles
guarded, protected effort. exertion, energy
ca and, also (see this grammar 3) viriyaf!l
ciltaf!l vepullarp. fullness, abundance
mind
ceva saf!JghO community, association, . .
-ca +eva esp. the community of Buddh1st monks
sarpvattati leads-to is conducive to
1 Take bhikkhu as subject of each of the following sentences in tum. , · (with dative of object)
2 For the alphabetic-al order in this and other glossaries, see the Introduction Section U·
AJphabet and Pronunciation.. ' · saiJIVUta restrained, controlled

2 3
1'1

1!'1

I
. • . . .1,1.

I
 ; I LESSON I

samanupassati sees, perceives correctly lfSSON I

sammadi).thiko he who -has right views -o -am and -i in the glossaries will hel<_mg to the masculine. -a stem, the neut~r- -a stem
sammoso bewilderment, confusion and thf feminine -i stem classes respecuvely_ ation in the· endings of spectflc ~ouns
saraQal}l refuge, protection The student shou~d also e~~~A;g~~f~~cfW.om one class to another m ~ ~st~Z
with r~gard to gendler 'ss~nmc~ ~~~ns given as masculine here maylinappfearmr. ~ whi~h it
of Pall For examp e. · n here in the mascu e o
GRAMMAR I 1
endingS in some ~ex~.so tr~t d=agtv~ay appeilr in some texts with the neutg~
I. NOUNS usually oc~urs With tl_:!_e: p~ra where there is no change in gender. there may
'
tJ Pall nouns occur in: plural ending: dhammaru. v:en n t 10ds and texts. 1
:I '
-alternate endings th'ilt appear m d! l~en ~~rs that follow, fonns separated by are
I lll. A Stem Form, which can be considered the base from which the other In the paradigm below, an m o forms which are less common. or

gin'i[allyv~o~1~~n:~t~a~'iicti'iigscz.,~;~g':;:,~ ~~~nl:tctuced, a'l,~~:v~0~tt~~e;{ 'i'o?~~t~~

forms are derived. . al emants. Forms in parentheses ( ) <:J.re alternate er than in canonical texts. Al¢-ough
I

~:t~~~ne'!:·~o~;oft~u~~t alf o¥k&~ aWe~~~.1~":~;~rg ~~n~f tl:i~utrit-~~~~:;;'i;,ui~i't,

i'J 1.12 Three Genders: Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. Althou'gh there is some
1
;1
correlatioll between the gender of Pali nouns and "natural" gender, i.e., nouns
!'i referring to masculine beings are commonly masculine and those referring to duri~g the the Jan~a'fi:, 0~w~y th.fs need to consult one of the rore
hist0'1'.
'
feminine beings commonly feminine, the correlation is far from absolute. In and is reading
complete textsailaboloe as stheern~ed arises. The same applies to the alternate onns
Pall av
grammars
particular, nouns referring to groups and to inanimate things and to concepts. are of verbs.
'jJ
' unpredictable with regard to gender. Thus sena 'army· is feminine, dhammo
'
'doctrine' is masculine, and rntti 'night' is feminine .. 1.21. Masculine -a Stems. These have a stem in -a.
i:l'
I 1.13. Two Numbers: Singular and Plural EXAMPIE: dhamma 'doctrine, quality (and many other sepses)'
1.14. Eight Cases: Nominative, Accusative, Instrumental, Genitive, Dative,
Ablative, Locative, and Vocative.
Singular Plural ·
,, Nom(inative): dhammo dhammii
l.14l. The most common use of the nominative is as the subject of a
ijjl
sentence: Acc(usati vel: dhamma'!'l dhamme
I,,' bhikkhu vayamati 'A bhikkhu sttives' Genlitive): dhammassn
: i' Dat(ive): dhnmmiinn'!'l
'
i! il dhnmmiiga/ -nssn
l.l42. The accusative is generally used as the object of a verb: lnst(rumental): dhammena
,: dhammehi(-ebhi)
I
': :
bhikkhu dtt8I[l pagga{lhati 'A bhikkhu uplifts tbe mind.' Abl(ative): dhammii(-asmll' .-amhii)
loc(ative): dhamme(-asmi'!'l;amhi) dhammesu
,, 1.143. The vocative is used in calling or addressing:
I·' \loc(ative): dhamma \ -ii) · dhammii
:I . bhikkhavel 'Oh, monks!
'

Neute_r -~ Stt:ms. Th~se alsoe ~:~ ~e~ter nounS of this class differ
h tern m -a In glossanes, they
I!· 1.144. The other cases are commonly the equivalent of English Prepositions. 1.22:
'' As a general guideline, we might note that the dative case often (but not always) will end in the Norrunative Smgularnl al}linNo~ few forms. The nominative and the
translates as English 'to' or 'for·, the Ablative as 'from·, the locative as 'fu.', the from the masculine ones above o Y
I
genitive as 'of' (or the possessive 's), and the instrumental as 'with' (as· in "with a accusative are the same for all neuter nouns.
''

I hammer") or 'by' (as in "by that means"). However, these represent only some of EXAMPIE: rupa 'form, image"
i d 'Ute most general senses and uses of the cases, and others will appear as we
proceed. t Singular Plural

I Nom:
!'.:
riiportt ruponi
,l,':ii ·l.2. Four common types of nouns appear in this reading: Masculine -a stems, Rcc:
Neqter ~a stems, and Feminine -i or I stems:
I' riiposso

I
Gen:
riiponartt
'II' NOTE: Nouns used as examples in paradigms in the grammars, like the ones that follow, Oat: riipoyo I DSSD
will generally be cited according to their stem form. In the glossaries in this book, the
gender of nouns will be given separately only for a few nouns with special lost: riipeno
characteristics. Instead, the gender of a. noun will generally be indicated by the way in rupel!i ( ebhi)
which it ends, and there will be a stari.dard way of indicating each class. Usually, this will Rbl: riipa (-osmo. omha)
be the nominative, singular unless otherwise noted. Thus, for example, nouns ·ending in
toe: rope ( osmirtt.~tlmhO rupesu \\
uoc: rupa (-ortt) rupiinl
4
['
I
5
I
il
!:
,,
·.
'
!
 LFSSON I

LESSON I Root
' Present Stem
Thus:
pat 'fall" pata-
1.23. Feminine
they are-almost -i and I Stems·· These actually represent two classes, but
the same j1va-
jlv 'live'
1.231 -i stems haVe a stem and nomin~n·ve
Gl smgu
. .1ar m
. .-1.. nl 'lead' naya-
But: gaccha-
EXAMPLE: ratti 'night' gaiJl 'go'
t~ta 'be, stand' ti)tha-
ratti ·night' <feminine - i stemnoun:) ·
Singular Plural More will be said concerning these relationships later.
Nom: rattl
ratt I!Jo I -i 2.2 The Present Tense: The present tense is formed by adding t'he following endings
Rcc: l"llttl'!l ..

Gen: . to the present tense stem:

rattinll'!l Singular Plural
Oat:
lost: rattlyii -:mi (-Ql) -:rna
Rbl:
rattihll-ibhl First Person n.
we").
-si -t'ha
Second Person ("you") -nti
-ti
Loc: (rattlya'!l) rattisu Third Person ("he.she, !'hey")
lloc: rattl rattlyo I i NOTE: VerbS will be entered in the glossaries under the third perSon singUlar form; hence

- labhati, nayati,
Here'" etc.
and throughOut, a colon(:) begffinlng an ending means that the last vowel of the
1.232 -I stems are the same -as the -•. stems except for the nominative
singular, which has -i: form to which the ending is added is lengthened. Thus -a-becomes -a-, etc.

EXAMPLE· ·nadl 'liver' Thus for t'he verb labh- 'obtain receive' rresent stem labha-·
Singular Plural Plural
. Singular
Nom: nad1 labhiima
nadiyo 1 -i 1 Pers: lobhiimi
Rcc: nadl'!l labhatha
2 Pers: l&bhiiSI
Gen: lllbhati lobhanti
Oat:
nadinam
. ·. . 3 Pers:
nadlyii
lost: Iabh- is of a tYPe referred to as an "-a stem" verb, since its present tense stem
nadilil!-ibhl
Rbl: ends in that vowel. We will-meet other types later.
Loc: (nadly&IJI) nadisu
3. POSTPOSED PARTICLES (CUTICS)
lloc: nadl nadlyo 1 1 3.1. Plill has many particles !'hat occur following a word and often attached to it.
,,, The technical term for these -is "clitic". Five such clitics occur in this lesson:
,'I'
2. VERBS 'again, also' (often wit'h emphasis)
Verband
forms will be introduced pi
2.1. Root Present Stem· Amon grt'hadufally here. as !'hey appear in readings 'quotation marker'
stem · The root Is
· the form · generall
g e orms of a verb are a root and a present
· (i)ti
·very, certainly'
0 -, eva
ot'her forms, and from which they ~ ~Sidere;; to be the form !'hat underlies all 'and'
resemblance between those f
distant:
enve . However, t'he degree of formal
arms and the root may range from close to quite
I
r
I
ca
va ·or'

7
6

l
 LESSON I
LESSON I

. 3.2. ca· generally, and va commonly, are repeated with each I .. 5. SANDHI
e ement CDnJomed: When two words or parts of words Come together, one or both may change
bhasati vii karoti Vii '(whether) says or does· in shape at the juncture. The technical tenn for this is "sandhi." Within a word, it
is internal sandhi, between words external sandhi.
saccafica dhammafica 'doctrine and truth' In , p-ali, external sandhi is not thoroughgoing, (unlike Sanskrit), but
generally affects only closely connected forms, often .specific frequently used
(IJI<c --> fie, see 5.3 below) 1
combinations. Three sandhi effe"cts are relevant to this lesson: .
~rah1Il3J)assa ca putto gahapatikassa ca
a brahman's son and a householder's' 5. L When two vowels come together, the first may be lost. In this tex~ the loss
will be marked with an apostrophe:
Note that, as the last example de · _ · ca + eva---> c'eva
after the first word in a constituent th t thmonstrat~~· these forms generally occur na + atthi---> n'atthi
a ey conrom. ·
3.3. The quotation marker (i)ti follo . . . 5.2 When two similar vowels come together, the result may be a long' vowel
occur following the object of verbs o;'%a somethmg. satd or thought. While it may rather than the loss of the first. Similarly, when the quotation marker (i)ti is.~dded,
may also serve by itself to indicat th ymg, thinking, or sometimes, perceiving, it a preceding vowel lengthens, and the i in parentheses is lost. Such vowel
examples in ttus reading, where the ~ud~~ w~a~ ~recedes has been said, as .in the lengthenings resulting .from sandhi will be marked in this. text by- rather than - .
. Wh~n (i)ti follows a word endin ina ~s emg quoted. . "ibis represents no.· pronunciation difference; tJ:l,ey are read the same, but it will
the (t) of (t)ti is lost (see 5.2 below) g vowel, that vowel IS lengthened, and make them easier to identify, and help in looking up forms. (When the student
progresses to texts as usually printed, this aicl will not be available, but hopefully
4. RELATIVE PRONOUN . s/he will be by then accustomed to the types of sandhi found.)
4.1. The relative pronoun has the stem --: . na + ahaJTL --->nfihaxp.
neuter relevant to this lesson are 3s f ll ya-.<The case forms_ of the masCuline and sarp.vattati + (i)ti ---> saiPvattatiti
. o ows other fonns will be given later):
Masculine 5.3. When a nasal precedes another consonant, it may assimilate to it and become
Nominative. Neuter the nasal pr~uced in that position (See the Introduction, Section ll: Alphabet and
yo
Instrumental. Y3IJl Pronunciation.}:
yena yena
~.2. The relative pronoun may be used lik th . . saccaiJL + ca ---> saccafica
etc.) to introduce a relative clause modir"- e English relatives (i&,"who, that, 6. NEGATIVES ,
necessarily IDnnediately) as in th ymg. a noun that It follows (but not 6.1. na may negate sentences. If- the following word begins With a vowel, the a of
• e exam_ples ~ this reading:
na is commonly dropped, though it may lengthen if that vowel is a-":
afifiarp ekad?ammarp ...ymp. evarp... sarpvattattti
another single thing that thus leads (to) ... na + atthi ---> n'atthi 'is not'
but:
afifiaiJI ekadhammaiJI yen dha _ .. . · na + ahatp ---> rnih3II). 'not I"
another single thing by whi h.d a._.. mma upaJJantl .
c octrines (or elements) are born.
Note that even though na negates an entire sentence, it does not necessarily
. . Note that the relative Pronoun general! occur near the verb, unlike English "not":
m Its own clause as in the examples above Y takes the case proper to its _function t
More commonly however p-ali I. .
different.correlative co~structioil,us· reativ~ clauses are formed by a somewhat t rUiharp ............ samanupassami 'I do not perceive.·
-in a later lesson. · mg_a relative Pronoun. These will be described
6.2. a- negates wOrds (like English un- orin-). Before, a vowel, it occurs as an~.
I: a + sukho 'happiness' ---> asukho 'uilhappiness' ·
t an+ attho 'meaning, objective---> anattho 'pointlessness, ·
!

8
9
I'

t
I
 LF.'i.SON I
LESSON I
NOTE: In this book negatives in a- or an- are henceforth not listed se -
the lesson glossaries, unless their ·meaning is not clirectly deriv bl f par~tely m NOlE: In this text, compounds will be given as such only if their meaning is
Thus , as t udent encountenng
· asu khom . a reading -and. not fi d'a e · rom
· their· parts · not directly deducible from their parts and the conteXt in which they occur.
should look under sukho. 0 mg It m the glossary, Thus itthisaddarp and itthiriiparp are given, since they also have the special
senses 'the word "woman"' and 'the beauty (i.e., 'good form') of ·a woman',
7. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVFS b,ut itthigandho is not. Thus the student must learn to recognize compounds
AdJ-ectives .agree m· gender d by looking up their parts. lbis is an important skiD, since compounding is
modify: . , case, an number with the nouns th•t " ·they very frequent in Piiii and in some kinds of texts very long and complex
kllsalo dhammo compounds are found.
:good doctrine' (masculine noniinative singular)
akusalli dhamma , bad factors' (or 'doctrines')
. <masculine nominative ·plural) RJRTIIER READINGS l
cittam adantaJp subdued · d' ( ·
mm _neuter nominative/sccusative singular)
Note that although adjectives often r ed . L Niiharp,bhikkhave, ailliarp ekadhammarp· pi samanupassatnl yo evam
?PPOSite order is possible, as in the last e~m~ ebthe n~un that they modify, the saddhammassa sammosaya antaradharniya sarpvattati yathayidarp, bhikkave,
IS often derived from a verb, and there g
e a ov~. that ~ase, the adjective pamado. pam3do, bhikkhave, saddhammassa sammosaya ._antaradh3niiya
"a/the mind which is subdued" or a/the mayd eha special sense like that in English sarpvattatiti.
Th . . . mm w en (It Is) subdued"
e agr eemg endmgs for adjectives will b · · ·
simply note the agreement. e grven later. For the present, we Nliham, bhikkhave, annam ekadhammlliJl pi samanupassalDI yo evam
saddhimunassa ):hitiya asammosaya anantaradhanaya samvattati yathayidam,
8. ACCUSATIVE OF DESTINATION bhikkhave, appamado. appamado, bhikkhave, saddhammassa #lltiyH asammosaya
With a verb of motion, the destination is regulafly in the accusative: anantaradhanaya sarp.vattatiti.

buddhal[l Sar81Jal!l gacchanti 'I go to the Buddha-refuge. Niiharp., bhikkhave, affiiarp ekadhammarp pi samanupassami yo evarp
saddhammassa sammosaya antar3.dhanaya sarpvattati yathayidam. btu)d<have,
9. CONJOlNING IN SERIES kosajjarp.. kosajjarp., bhikkhave, saddhammassa sammosaya antaradhanaya
Items in a sentence or eve h 1 sarpvattatiti.
giving them in sequence ~thoUt ~ :. ~e se:;:ences,. may be conjoined simply by
I''' ku 1- _
Y o . er eqmvalent of English "and":
sa anaip. ~hammanarp :thittya asammosaya Nfiharp, bhikkhave, annarp ekadha~maq~ pi samanupassanu yo evarp
. bhiyyobhavaya vepullaya saddhammassa Wtiya asammosaya anantaradhanaya ~arpvattati yathayidarp.,
for the persistence, non-confusion increase bbikkhave, viriyarambho. viriyarambho, bhikkhave, saddhammassa Ptitiya
(and) fulfilment of good elements (or,'doctrine;')' asammosaya anantaradhanaya samvattattti.

. chandarp janeti: vayamati; viriyaQJ. arabhati. Naharp., bhikkhave, aiifiarp. ekadhammarp pi samanupaSsami yo evarp.
generates resolution, strives, (and) takes effort.' saddhammassa Wtiya asammosa:ya anantaradhariaya sarpvattati yathayidarp,
bhikkhave, anuyogo kusal3narp dbammiinarp, 3 ananuyogo akusalanarp. dbainmanarp..
10. COMPOUNDS anuyogo, bhikkhave, kusaliinarp. dhamma:narp, saddhammassa Jhitiya asammosaya
In r-.u, as in English, compounds may be formed by J·o;n;nn two nouns: anantaradhanaya samvattatiti.
....... "6
(A.NJ
1, !tthi.
\vo?lan' + sa(jdO 'sound'---> itthisactdo 'the so
punso man+ liipaiQ (physical) form·--- . _ ~.nd of -a woman
.
I >punsaruparp the form of a man· 2 NllhaQl,. bhikkhave, aiili.arp ekaliipatp. pi samanupassami yarp. evarp. purisassa
cittai!I pariyadaya4 ti))haii yathayidal]l, bhikkhave, itthi!iipal]l.
,,j Note that the first member of a com d. . ltthirlipaQl, bhikkhave, purisassa Cittam pariyadaya ti;):hatiti.
masculine and neuter nouns this will :oun Js re~lariy m the stem fonn. For
:! 'j' . . , usua Y be the same as the vocative singular.
3 GenitiVe PlUral: here it has the sense 'in, with reference to'
il 4 Read pariyadaya titthati as 'having overCome. remains' or 'overcomes and remains.' Forms lik
I· pariy»:ctaya will be discussed in a later lesson.
I
I 10
11
II
.,jl
,1,
F
::

I
 Lf5SON I

LESSON I
diligence, earnestness
NahaQl, bhikkhave, annam ekas8ddarp pi samanupassami y~ evaQl appamado
woman - ·
purisassa cittarp pariyadaya titthati y~thayidarp, bhikkhave, itthisaddo. itthi woman as an object of visual perception,
Itthisaddo, bhikkhave, purisassa cittatp pariy3daya ti:t.thatiti. itthirUPalJl female beautY
the sound of a woman,
Naham, bhikkhave, afill.arp. ekagandharp pi _samanupassami yarp evarp. itthisaddo the word "woman"
purisassa cittalJl pariyadaya t(t_thati yathayidaljl, bhikkhave, itthijlandho. idleness, indolence,
Itthigandho, bhikkhave, purisassa cittalJl Pariyadaya t(tthatiti. kosajjarp odor, scent, smell .
gandho stands, exists, is; remams
· Miharp, bhikkhave, afriiarp ekaras'arp.· pi samanupassainl yai:Jl' eVaJP purisassa ti.tthati indolence, sloth ·
cittalJl pariyadaya ti~thati yathayidai\1, bhil<kave, itthii-aso. pamado having overpowered, taking up
Itthiraso, bhikkhave, purisassa cittatp pariyadaya t(t)hatiti. pariyadaya
man, male
puriso touch, contact
Nahaljl, bhikkhave, a1ll\aljl ekapho)!habbaljl pi samanupassami yatp pho)lhabbalJl
taste, savor .
evalJl purisassa ciitalJl pariyadaya t(t,ihati yathayidalJl, bhikkhave, itthipho)!habbalJl. raso form, object of visual perception
Itthipho)!habbalJl, bhikkhave, purisassa cittalJl pariyadaya ti)!hatiti · Iiiparp taking effort
viriyanimbho
sOund, word
· NahalJl, bhikkhave, a1ll\alJl ekarilpalJl pi satnanupassarni yarp evarp itthiya saddo - true doctrine
cittalJl pariyadaya ti)!hati yathayidalJl, bhikkhave, purisarilpatp. saddhilmroo
PurisarupalJl, bhikkhave, itthiya cittalJl pariylidaya ti)!hatiti.

Naharp., bhikkhave, afifuup. ekasaddarp pi samanu passami yarp evarp. itthiya

cittalJl pariyadaya ti~thati yathayidarp, bhikkhave, purisasaddo.
Purisasaddo; bhikkhave, itthiya cittalJl pariyadaya ti)lhatiti.

Naham .. bhikkhave, ailllarp ekagandharn pi samanupassami yarp evarp itthiya

cittaQl pariyactaya ti)lhati yathayidatp, bhikkhave, purisagandho.
Purisagandho, bhikkhave, itthiya cittatp pariyadaya ti)lhatiti.

Naharp., bhikkha:ve, afiflarp_ ekarasarp_ pi samanu passami yrup. evarp itthiya

cittaljl pariyadaya tlt!hati yathayidalJl, bhikkhave, purisaraso.
Purisaraso, bhikkhave, itthiya cittaljl pariyadaya ti~thatiti.

Naham, bhikkhave, ai'Jfuup ekaphot.thabbmp pi samanupassami Yam evarp

itthiya cittalJl pariyl!daya t(t_thati yathayidatp, bhikkhave, purisapho)_thabbalJl.
Purisapho)lhabbarp, bhikkhave, itthiya cittarp pariyadaya ti_t)hatiti.
CANJ

GLOSSARY

anuyogo application, .practice,· employment

antaradhanarp disappearance

5 Note that thollgh the relative pronoun generally takes the case proper to its function in its
own clause, as stated in this Grammar 4.2, it is sometimes "'attracted" to the case of"the noun
to which H refers in the mcpn clause. Thus here YB:IP is accusative, agreeing with the
_accusative_ (masculine) ·noun -saddam although Jt is subject of its own clause, and therefore
should be nominative. ·
!
12 I 13

I
 LESSON U

LESSON II phiitiQl k~tuQl. katamehi dhi? ldha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pubbal)hasamayaQl

sakkaccam samadhinimittaQl adhit!hati, majjhai)hikasamayaQl,.. pe
l Kiccho manussapatiJBbho sayal)has~mayaQl sakkaccaQl samadhinlmittaQl adhi!lhati. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, dhi
kiccharp maccanarp jivitarp dhammehi samannagato bbikkhu bhabbo anadhigataJp. va kusalmp. dharnmaJp.
kicchaQI saddhammasavaQ.am adhigantuQl, adhigataQl va kusalaQl dhammaQl phatiQl katuQl'ti.
kicclio buddhilnaQl ilppado. · (-A.N.)

Sabbapa:passa akaraiJ.cup 3.... Evameva kho, bhikkhave, appaka te satta_ ye manussesu paccajayanti; atha
.kusalassa upasampada kho ete'va satta bahutara ye aMatra manussehi ·paccajayanti. Evameva kho,
sacittapariyodapanarp. bhikkhave, appaka te satta ye majjhimesu janapadesu paccajayanti; atha kho
etatp. buddhlina(rp_) sasanam. ete'va satta bahutara ye paccantimesu janapadesu paccajayanti ...

. .. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, appaka te satta· Y<'! paflflavanto, ajala, anelamUga,

Na hi verena verani patibala subhasitadubbha:sitassa atthamafina:ttiiP; atha kho ete'va satta bahlltara ye
,I sanunantldha kudacanam. duppaiii':tii jaJa e!amiigii na pa(ibalii subhasitadubbhasitassa atthamai\i\atuQl.
' averena ca sammanti.
esa dhammo sanantano. . . . Evameva kho, bhikkhave, appakfi te sattli ye ariyena p3ruiacakkhuna:
!I'· (Dhp.) samannagata; atha kho ete'va_ satta: bahutara ye. avi~jBgata sammu]ha.
'i'

2 Tlhi, bhikkhave, aQlgehf samanniigato piipal)iko abhabbol anadhigataQl vii
bhogaQl adhtgantuQl, adhigataQl vii bhogaQl phiitiQl kiituQl. katamehi dhi? Idha,
bhikkhave, piipal)iko pubbal)hasamayaQl na sakkaccaQl kanunantam adhitthiiti
maiihaiJ.hikasamayarp na sakkaccarp .kammantarp adhitthliti, sayauha~amaya~ ~
s~kka~cazp. kammantrup. adhitthBti. lmehi kho, bhiJ:ckhave, tihi arpgehi samannagato
papal)iko abhabbo anadhigataQl vii bhogaQJ adhigantuQl, adhigataQl vii bhogaQl
phatiQl kiituQl. ' .
. . . Evameva kho, bhikkhave;-appaka te sattii Ye Iabhanti tathagatarp diissanaya;
atha kho ·ete'va satta bahutarii ye na labhanti tathagatarp. dassanaya.
. . . Evameva kho, bhikkhave, appilkii te satta ye labhanti tathagata-ppaveditrup
dhammavinayarp_ savm)a:ya; ath3- kho ete'va satta bahutara ye na Iabhanti
tath3gatapp~veditarp_ dhammavinayarp savat)aya.
(-A.N.)

Evameva kho, bhikkhave, tihi dhanunehi .samanniigato bhikkhu abhabbo GLOSSARY

anadhigataQl vi! kusalaQl dhammaQl adhigantuQl, adhigataQl Vii ku'salam dhammam ilkaraJ)l!Ql non-doing
phatiQl katuQl. katamehi tihi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pubbal)hasamayaQl n~ arv,gaqi component, constituent part, limb, member
sakkaccarp samBdhinimittaQI adhitthati, majjhat)hik:asamayrup. na sakkaccam aiii':tatra outside ·
samadhinimittrup adhi!!hati, sayal)hasamayal!l na sakkaccam samadhinimitta~ aiiiiliti comprehends, discriminates
adhi!lhiiti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, tihi dhanunehi samannagat~ bhikkhu abhabbo ' atth3maflilati = attham+afrl'lati

anadhigataQl va kusali'lJl dhamm8Ql adhigantuQl, adhig;ltaQl va kusa!aQJ dhanunam altho (-aQl) mearnng, usage, use, welfare, gain, purpose
phatiQl katulJl. · atha now, then
atha·kho now, but, however
Tthi, bhikkhave, aQJgehi samannagato papal)iko bhabbo anadhigatam vii adhigacchati finds, acquires, attains,
bhogaQl adhigantuQl, adhigatrup vii bhogaQl phatiQl katuQl. katamehi dhi? idha, comes into possession of
bhikkhave, piipal)iko pubbal)hasamayaQl sakkaccaQl kammantaQl . adhi!lhati, adhigata obtained, acquired
manhai)hikasamayaQl... pe... sayal)hasamayaQl sakkaccaQl kammantrup adhit!hiiti. adhigantuQl infinitive of adhigacchati
Imehi kho, bhikkhave, tihi aQJgehi samannagato papal)iko bhabbo anadhigataQl va (see this grammar 4)
bhogaQl adhigantuQl, adhigataQl va bhogaQl phatiQl kiituQl. adhit!hiiti attends to
appilka little, few
. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, tihi dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu bhabbo ariya noble, distinguished
anadhigatrup va kusalaQJ dhanunaQl adhigantuQl, adhigataQl va kusalaQl dhanunaQl avib1igata ~ignorant

idha here, in this world

by these: lnstr- Abl Pl. of ayaQlilma

I
1 Read this as ~n ·equational sentence. See this grammar 5. Imehi
15

I
LESSON D

(see this grammar 2)

upasarnpada acquisition, attainment, higher ordination of patfiabho attainment
a monk manussa- being born as a human, attaining human
uppado arising, birth status
etal]l this, this thing (see this grammar 2) partyodapana!Jl/-a purification
ete these,those (ones) (see this grammar 2) pavedita pointed out, expounded, declared, made
eva verily, indeed known
evameva even so, thus, similarly, in like manner papa!Jl
sin evil, bad· deed, wrong action
esa that (see this grammar 2) papa!)iko m~rchant, shopkeeper ·
eJamUga not receptive to that doctrine, stupid pubbai)hasamaya!Jl in the forenoon, in the morning
katama which, what (see this grammar 3) pe signal. of repetition (see this grammar 8)
kammantam bu.siness, activity phati increase, development
karoti does, bahutara .many, more
katu!Jl ·infinitive of karoti (see this grammar 4) bhabba competent, able
kiccha difficult, rare, painful bhogo wealth, possession, item for enjoyment
kuda:caflaiJl any day, ever maceo mortal, human being
kusalarp virtue, good (action); merit majjhaQhikasamayaqi during midday
kho · emphatic particle majjhima central, middle
CakkhUQl eye mafii'iati thinks, deems, conceives
janapado province, locality, the co,untryside . manusso man, human being
ia!a slow, stupid · ye which ones (nominative plural masculine
ia!o a stupid person relative pronoun ·(see this grammar 2) ·
jivitar}l life !abhati gets, receives; gets a chance to
tathagato "_Tathagata'', a term of reference for a enmity, ill-will
Ver8!Jl
Buddha, literally, " The thus gone one" sa- ones own (see this grammar 9)
tathagatappavedita sakkaccarp properly, well, carefully, thoroughlY
expounded by the Tathagata
tihi instrumental plural of ti, three sacittarp_ sa- plus cittaiJl
te they (see this grammar 2)
(Compounding stem sacitta-)
dassanarp sight, seeing, insight satto being, living being
duppaftiia not wise, foolish, stupid sanantana eternal, old, ancient
duppai\iio foolish one, an ignorant person sabba all, every
dubbhasita ill-spoken samanniigata endowed with, possessed of
dhammavinayo teachings of the Buddha: Dhamma and (with instrumental)
Vinaya sama:dhinimittaQl object of meditation, object of·concentrati.on
dhammo factor, quality (see also Lesson I) samrrtati is pacified, ceases
paccantima bordering, adjoining (near), countryside sammUlha confused, confounded, stupid
paccajayati is (re)born savaQ.8IP hearing, listening
paflfJ.avanto wis~ ones, insightful persons sayai)hasamayal(l in the evenihg
(nominative plural of paflfiavant) sa:sanaJTl teaching, message, doctrine
pafifta wisdom, knowledge, irisight subhasita well spoken
paflfia:cakkhurp things well and badly spoken, things proper
eye ·of wisdom; eye of insight su bhasitadubbhasita!Jl
palibala competent, capable
I
f,
hi
to say and not proper to say
indeed, verily (emphatic partide)

!!'
16 lr 17
I

l
 LESSON li

LESSON U . . . .stic of this pan:ic~Im: stem, and is

NOTE: The vocative plural !D -atie IS aJih':f;cstg~~n. The usual vocative plural for
GRAMMARll very frequent, as th~ readi~gs ave a ea
l. NOUN FORMS nouns of this class wdl be -u. . . inative
u. Feminine -a stems wiD be entered in the glossaries in the nominative singular s will. be entered in the glossaries in the~ alternate nom
1.3. Neuter .-u Stem
(which is also the stem) in -a. (The Dative form bhlivanliya that occurred in s~arin .:.urn.
Reading 1 was an examPle of this class).
EXAMPIE : c~kkhu ·eye Plurol
I EXAMPLE: slilli "hall" Singular
I Sin ulor .Piurol cakkhU I cokkhu ni
Nom: cokkhu I cokkhul'r}
I' siilii
Nom: Rcc:
siiliiyo (siilii)
Rcc: siilorp Gen: cokkhiinoll)
cokkhuno (-usso)
Gen: Oat: r
sii Iii norp
Dot: lnst: cllkkhuno( usmii". cokkhiihi ( -u bhil
. umhii)
lnst: siiliiyo Rbl:
siiliihl (-bhl) cokkhiisu
Loc: cokkhumhl ( usmill))
II' Rbl:
Loc: siiliiyorp sii liisu 11oc: cokkhu
cokkhu 1. cokkhuni
the
e masculine -u stems, except for
lloc: siiJe siiliiyo (siilii) Note that thes~ are t~e same a~ t~e alternate plural ending -um.
alternate nominative smgular m -UIJl an
Note the sintilarity of these. endings to those of the -i and -l stems (1, 1.23) 2 Note, 2.PRONOUNS
however, that the Singular D~nive-Locative has -ya rather than ya, and that the 2.1. Third Person Prono~n Fo~s: th f Uo\ving gender forms in the Nominative
vocative singular is -e. Note also the shortening of tile final -a- of the stem in the 2.11 sa/tarp 'he, she, It has e o
Accusative singular. Singular: "he
Masculine ""
1.2. Masculine -u Stems will be entered in the glossaries in the nominative singular Feminine sa 'she'
(which is also the stem) in -u. NCuter talJl "if
EXAMPLE: bhikkhu "(Buddhist) monk' , The case and Number forms are as follows:
Singular Plural SINiiULRR
Nom: bhlkkhU ·.
Neuter
. Feminine
bhlkkhii I bhlkkhovo Masculine
Rcc: bhikkhurp so
lien: Norn: so I so torp I tod
i'
bhikkhuno (-usso) bhikkhiinorp tarp
Oat: Rcc: torp
tosso( yo) :
1. lns.t: bhi kkhunii ( -usmii, lien: tosso tiSSII (-yo)_:
umhii) bhlkkhiihi (-iibhi)
ilbl: oat:
teno to yo
loc: bhikkhumhi c~usmirp) bhlkkhiisu lnst:
Rbl: tomho (tosmii)
lloc: bhlkkhu bhlkkhii I bhlkkhovel-o tosom/tiiyorp/
Loc: tomhi (tosmill)) t1 ssorp ltossorp

2 References to grammars of other readings will be made in this fonn. The Roman numeral will
give the reading, and the Arabi(,) numeral the appropriate section.
19
18
 I LESSON IT
1 LESSON II
1 1

I,il I PLURRL
PLURIIL .

'I Masculine Neuter Feminine

I Masculine Neuter Femin'ine
I,, I ',
• •• 1

11
Nom: Nom: yiini yii I yiiyo
te tiini tii I tiiyo ye
Ace: Ace: .
I II'",
Gen: Gen: yii S8Jtlfyii siinBJtl
ill·i tesoJtl l tesiino~t~ tii SiiJtlllii siinoJtl
Da.t:
.
yesam I yesiinam
' .
I 'i Dot:
I lnst: lnst: yiihi (yiibhi)
tehi (tebhi) tiihi (tiibhi) yehi (yebhi)
Rbl: Rbl:
yesu yasu
Loc: tesu tiisu Loc:
2.14. The instrumental-ablative form of the demonstrative pronoun
I'
2.12. E:taiJI 'this' has much the same· sense as salta b . . . ayarpfuna 'thL<>' (imehi) occurs in this •reading. ayarpfuna has nominative and
The -forms are the same as for _sa/tarp, but withe- prefixe:J:· ut IS more deflillte. accusative forms as follows. The remaining forms will be given later, but in
general. they are rriuch like those for the other pronouns and are thus easily
SINGULAR recognizable:
Masculine Neuter ' Feminine SINGULAR
Nom: esolesa esii Neuter Feminine
etom I etod Masculine
Ace: etBJtl eto~t~
ii!J8Jtl BYI!'tl
imBJtl I idBJtl
·.
Nom:
etc. imBJtl
nee: imam' .. .

2.13. The relative pronoun ya/yarp, has vii1ually th PLURAL

except for the initial y-. Hence: . e same forms as tarp,
Neuter Feminine
Masculine
SINGULAR imii /imiiyo
Nom: imiini
ime
Masculine Neuter Feminine nee:
Nom: yo yii 2.2. All of the pronouns given in 2.11-2.14 can be used either. alone (i.e., as
yoJtl I yod pronouns), or modifying following nouns (i.e., as demonstrative adjectives):
Ace:
eso gacchati That one comes·
Gen: eso dhammo 'that doctrine
yoss 0 yassii(-ya):
Dot:
lnst: yeno 3. TilE INTERROGA1lVE katama 'which, what' takes the same endings as the
yiiyo
Abl: yamhii (yasmii) pronouns in 2 above. Thus (next page):

Loc: yomhi (yosmiJtl)

20 21
 LESSON II
LESSON H
42. Use of the infinitive: The infinitive has several uses, two of which are given
SINGULRR here:
.4.21. Dependent on a main verb as an expression of purpose:
Masculine Neuter Feminine
kotomii Buddh81Jl dalthu!Jl gacchilnti
Nom: kotomo 'I am going to see the Buddha.'
kotomoftl
kotomorv
4.22. Dependent on an adjective like bhabba in the appropriate meaning,
etc. generally like that of an English infntitive ("to go", etc.> in similar usage:

4. VERB FORMS: TilE lNFINITlVE IN _tum papa!)iko abhabbo anadhigata!Jl bhoga!Jl adhigantu!Jl.
4.1. Form. of the infinitive · 'The merchant is incompetent to·acquire wealth
4.ll. For verbs with a present tense stem in -a · add -·fu (that he has) not (yet) acquired.'
3rd Slngu] I m, rep Iacmg
. the final
. -a:
. . ar Present Stem Infinitive
bhavau be, become' bhava- bh . 4.23. Note that the infinitive may take. the same objects, etc. with which
gacchati · ..come ·
. .go gaccha- aVItum 3
gacchituffi that verb can occur in an independent sentence, and that their cases remain the
labhati get labha- 1 bhi ·3 same. The subject. however, is almost always the same as that of the main verb,
passati 'see' passa- a tuiJl 3 4:12.
passitum and if so, is unexpressed.

For verbs in ·-a, -e, -o, ·add -tum: 5. EQUATIONAL SENTENCES

3rd Singular · Equational sentences are those in which a noun or adjective expression is
Present Stem infinitive
ailll8ti 'comprehend' aiifia ailiilitu!Jl predicated of the subject. i.e., English sentences like "Harry is a carpenter " or "
deseti 'teach' . dese- desetum' lltis book is excellent". In English, these have a form of "to be", .as copula, but in
neti 'lead' ne- neturp equatiooal sentences in Pall do not require a copula to be expressed with either a
yati ·go· ya ylitu!Jl noun or adjective. Thus:
hoti 'be' ho- ho!u!Jl
51 With Adjective as Predicate:
4.13. Irregular: Some irregular formatio~s are: eso dhammo sanantano This doctrine is eternal.·
karoti 'does' ay81Jl plipal)iko abhabbo (bhogall! adhigantu!Jl)
kiltu!Jl
This merchant is incompetent <to acquire wealth)'.
gacchati 'goes' gantu!Jl
;anati 'knows· kjccha!Jl jivilall! 'life is difficult (to obtain)',
fi3tuiP
tittllati 'is, rerilains', thiltu!Jl (or) 'difficult (indeed) is life.'
dahati (or dhiyati) 'puts' dahitum
deti (or dadati) 'gives' d8tutp. .. Note that the adjective agrees with the subject; in this case nominative
pcissati 'sees' dalthu!Jl sirtgular. masculine for the first two examples, neu·ter in the last.
As with other kinds of sentences, the order of elements may be varied for
papuJ)8ti 'attains' papm)itu!Jl
pivati 'drinks' emphasis. Thus the predicate may come first. as ·in the last example ab_ove, or in:
p8tuJp
miyati 'dies' maritu!Jl
Iabhati ·gets, obtains' appaka te satta 'few are those beings'
Iaddhu!Jl
As the examples show, the a:greement .will be the same regardless of the order.
vikkil)ati'sells' vikkiJ)itulJl
SUI)Oti (<r suJ)3ti) 'hears, listens' SO!ulll I sm)itu!Jl
5.2 With Noun as Predicate:
NOTE: The stem of passati alte~ates with a stem dis- in other tenses and forms, as here. 'lltis is the teaching:'
etarp sa:sanarp

3 But see alternate form below.

23
22
 LES..<;ON II
LFSSON n

6. TilE CORRELATIVE CONSlRUCTION: 9 TilE REFLEXIVE PREFIX sa- .

· · prefixed to a noun adds the sense 'one's. own' Thus sa+cittaQl gl.Ves
sa-
Relative clauses were. diScussed in I, 4. Most commonly, however, PBH
forms such expressions by using a correlative (sometimes called "co-relative") sacittaiJl 'one's own mind'.
construction. Titis has the following characteristics: In this construction, the
relative clauSe is introduced by a relative pronoun or other relative form, as in 10 TilE ACCUSATNE OF TIME: · f ti makes it
the constmction met earlier. However, the relative clause is not placed within the · The Accusative case of a word referring to. so~e element o me
,,
I
a time adverb. Thus pubbaiJ.samayarp_ 'in the forenoon.
main clause, but. the two claUses. are kept intact and placed in sequence. The
I relative clause still modifies a noun or pronoun in the main clause. This modified
!jl fofm is commonly placed at the beginning of its clause also, and if a noun, is ll COMPOUNDS· '
generally modified by a demonstrative form, commonly one of the pronominal u:t. Co-ordiriat~ Compounds: Two or m~re . Items ~~ be co-ordinated .in a
· - r fer to their cornbmauon Pall, these are technically
(In
·i~~~~~n!
1

!~::~~a c~mpounds dva~dva). compoun~s

1

fonns given in Section 2 above which links it to the relative. That is, it is as if in
1
English; one said 'Which book I read, that book is.good' instead of 'The book that (Sanskrit· Co-ordinate are
· I read is good ... in
generally inflected the neuter singular. The frrst element(s), as usual, are m the
11'1
stem fonn.
II j,I Thus:
' Yaill janann taJp bha0 ami 'I say what I know.' dhammmavinayal!l 'the Dhamma and Vin~ya' .
:I subhasitadubbhasital!l 'Things well spoken ~nd things badly spoken·
l!i yo dhammo saddhammo so dhammo sanantano.
j:l 'That doctrine which is the tri.J.e doctrine is eternal.· n2 Compound s WI·th - gata·· When gata · the perfect participle form· of gacchati
'h 'go·
·
-~~sed as the last member of"a compound, it may have the spectal senses . avmg
'i The relative clause is usually first, as in these examples. However, the ~eacheQ, being endowed with' or 'following'.:
other order is possible, as in some Sentences in this reading 4
avijj.a 'ignorance' + gata ---> avijjagata 'ignorant'
ete'v~ satta bahutara ye na labhanti tathagatarp dassanaya
'Many are those beings who do not get to see the Tatha:gata. ·
12. SANDHI f . n>iJi that begm· with a consonant double that
Some arms m ra d ·
cons~nant when
·th refixes or
7. PREPOSITIONS AND POSTPOSITIONS a fonn ending with a vowel precedes it in a single wor (I.e., WI P
In addition to prepositions, which precede the noun (as in English "outside in compounds). Thus
the garden") Pali also has postpositions,. which follow the noun but have the same
function. Some forms call occur as either. One of these is aiili.atra With a tathagata +pavedita---> tathligatappavedita
dependent noun in the Instrumental, it means 'outside', but with a dependent noun a+pama:do---> appamado
in the Locative it means 'among':
afiilatra manussesu or manussesu aiiiiatra Note that this doubling occurs only witb certain words. Thus putto 'son'
·among men Hnankind)' · does not have this property:

afiiiatra manussehi or manussehi afiiiatra sa+putto------->saputto in this way as they occur.5

'outside men (mankind)' One must thus learn which words behave

8. TilE DISCOURSE SUBSTITUlE pe(yyillal!l)

The form peyyalam., or .its shortened form .pe, is used to shorten a written
text by substituting for. a stretch of it that is identical with some pan of the ·
preceding. section. When the text is read aloud, the sectiorl is replaced and re'ad
out in full.

-------------:- .
ents, w hich will begin with consonant clusters, as in
. a! ·
5 Unless one knows the Sanskrit eqUIV
4

II
Note that such examples could be seen as instances of a relative 'clause placed at the end of a pramada, pravedita.
sentence, but the effect is tbe same.
24 25

j
 WSONII LESSON U

YaQ'l, bhikkhave, adosapakataiJl -kammarp, adosajarp, adosanidanaQ'l,

· adosasamudayam, tarp ·kamma.Ql kusalarp, tam kammaQl ana~ajjarp, tarp k.ammarp
FURTHER READINGS ll
1', OAO•t•• tam
su khaVt'p"''"m • kammam • kamrnanirodhaya
_ sarpvattati; na taiJl kammaQ1
I kammasamudaya:ya sarp.vattati. ·
·' t TII)i'maffi,6 bhikkhave, nictanani kammanaQI samudayaya.
Yam, bhikkhave, amohapakatarp. kammarp., ambhaja~, amoh~nidanarp,
Katamani tlp.i? amohasam~dayal}l, tarp. kammam kusalarp, tarp. kammam ana."anaQl .. tarp kammarp
sukhavipakmp, tarp kammatp kammanirodhaya satpvattati; na tarp. kammatp_
Lobho nlctanarp kamma:narp. samudayaya, doso nidanarp kammanarp kammasamudayaya sarp.vattati.
samudayaya, moho nida:narp kammanarp samudayaya.
Jmani kho, bhikkhave, 1iiJi nidan~ni kamm~arp. samudayayEiti.
Yarp, bhikkhave, lobhapakatarp kammarp lobhajarp lobhanidanarp · · (-A.N.l
lobllasamudayarp_7, tarp kammaJp. akusalarp, tarp kammarp savajjaQl; tarp kammal!l
dukkhavipakarp., tarp kammarp kammasamudayaya s sarnvattati; na tarp kammarp
kammanirodhaya sarpvattati. 2 , Paficahi, bhikkbave, dhammehi samannaga-to bhikkbu cavati, nappatitthati
saddhamme.
YaQ1, bhikkhave, dosapakataQl kamm8Ql dosajarp dosanid3.nalJl Katamehi paficabi?
dosasamudayarp, tarp kammaqt akusalarp, trup_ kammarp savajjarp, taQl. kammarp
dukkhavipakaQl, tarp · kammarp kammasamudayaya smp.vattati; na taQ1 kammarp Assaddho, bhikkbave, bhikkbu cavati, nappatitthiiti saddhamme.
kammanirodhiiya sarpvattati.
Ahirtko, bhikkhave, bhikkbu tavati, nappatitthati saddhamme.
YaiJI, bhikkhave, mohapakatarp kammaiJl mohajrup mohanida:narp,
mohasamudayarp, tarp. kammaiJI akusalarp, tarp kammarp. savajjarp, tarp kammarp Anottappl, bhikkbave, bhikkbu cavati, nappatitthati saddhamme.
dukkhavipakarp., taiJl · kammarp karrumisamudaya:ya smpvattati; na tam kammarp
'kammanirodhaya samvattati.
Kuslto, bhikkbave, bhikkbu cavati, nappatitthati saddhamme.
Imam kho, bhikkhave, tiQ.i nictanaru kammanarp samuday§ya. Duppafifio, bhikkbave, bhikkhu cavati, nappatitthati saddhamme.
TUJi'mani, bhikkhave, nidanani kammanarp samudayaya. Imehi kho, ,bhikkhave, paiicahi dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu. cavati,
Katamaru til)i? nappatitthati saddhilmme.
Paiicahl, bhikkhave, dhammehi sammannagato bhikkhu na cavati, patitth3ti
Alobho ,nidanarp kammanam samudayaya, adoso nidaruup kamllliinam
samudayaya, amoho nidanam kammanaiJl samudayaya. saddhamme.

1 il'
Yarp, bhikkbave, alobhapakatarp kammarp alobhajaljl, alobhanidanam,
alobhasamudayarp, tarp kalll01aip_ kusalarp, tarp. kammarp anavajjarjt, tam kammaip
sukhavipakam.tam kammam kamrnanirodhaya sarjivattati; na talll kamrnalll
.kammasamudayaya saQlVattati. ·
Katamehi pal\cahi?
Saddho, bhikkbave, bhikkbu na cavati, patitthati ~addhamme. hirimii,
bhikkbave bhikkhu na cavati, patitthiiti saddhamme. Ottappt, bhikkave, bhikkl[u
na cavati, 'patitthati saddhamme. alruslto, bhikkhave, · bhikkhu na cavati, patttthati
saddhamme. pafifiava, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na cavan, pallt\hllti saddhamme.

6 tiiJi'mani .. tiQi imani/ imani tlp.i. Imehi kho. bhikkhave, paiicahi dha1_11mehi samaruiagato bhikkhu na c~vati,
patil\hiiti saddhamme.
7
~ ~tated in ~.7. adjectives may precede or follow the noun they modify. Where several (AN)
adJectives modify the same noun, it is not uncommon for one to precede and the rest to
follow.
8
Here, kammarp implies 'further or-subsequent action.
26 27
LESSON D

LESSON III
GLOSSARY t. "Bhante Nagasena, atthi koci satto, -- yo ima~a kaya aflflarp kB)rarp
akuslta diligent, non-lazy sarpkamati?" ti.
adoso non-ill-will, etc. (a+dOso) "Na hi, maharaja . ti.
anavajja not blameable, not at fault "Yadi, bhante NBgasena, imamha kaya aftii.arp ki.iyarp sarpkamanto natthi, na
anottappi ' reckless, not afraid of sin, remorseless nu ·mu tto bhavissati p8pakehi kammehi?" ti.
(nominative singular masculine of . "Aina, mahillilja; yadi na patisandaheyya, mutto bhavissati plipakehi
anotappin (also occurs as apottapl; ) kammehi; yasma: ca kho,· maharaja, patiSandahati, tasma na parimutto ·papakehi
amoho non-confusion, etc. ( a+moho) kammehl"ti.
alobho non-avarice, etc (a+lobho) -- ·:ahante Nagasena. na ca· sarpk3mati, patiSandahati caT ti.
assaddha non-determined, etc (a+saddha) "Ama, maharaja; na ca sarpkamati pat]sandahati cH" ti.
ahirika shameless, without modesty "Katharp, bhante Nagasena, na ca sarpkamati patisandah8ti ca?
irilani nominative plural neuter of ima 'this' Opammam karohl" ti ..
ottappl not reckless. afraid of sin, scrupulous "Yatha, maharaja, kocideva puriso·padipato padipam padlpeyya, kinnu kho
(nominative singular masculine of so, maharaja, padipo padip~mha srupkamanto'?" ti.
ottappifi (also occurs as ott3pi)) "Na hi bhante" ti.
kamm!lljl action. deed, action as related to rebirth "EVameva kho, maharaja, na ca sarpkamati patisandahati cH" ti.
kuslta indolent, lazy (-M.P.>
cavati falls (away) · 2. "Tam kim mai\liatha, Sa!hil, atthi lobho" ti?
-ja born of, be born: "Evam, bhante." ·
X-ja be born of X "Abhljjhli ti kho aham, Siljha, etamatthamf vadanti, Luddho kho ayam,
tlJ)i three (neuter nominative plural) Sli!ha, abhijjhlilu pliQam pi hanati; adlnnam pi adiyati, paradaraQi pi gacchati, musa
dukkho sorrow. suffering pi bhanati ... yam'sahoti 2 dlgharattam ahitaya dukkhaya" ti.
doso anger, ill will, malice, hatred "Evarp, bhante." ·
nidBnarp source, cause, origin: 'Tam kim mai\liatha, Sa!ha, atthi doso" ti?
X-nidllna having X as source. or origip "Evam, bhante."
nlrodho cessation, emancipation, calming down "Byapado ti kho ah!IIJl, etamattham vadanti. Du!lho kho ayam, Sa!ha,
pakata done, made: byapannacitto p8Q.am pi han3ti, adinna.rp. pi adiyati, paradi.irarp pi gacchati, musa pi
X-pakata done out of X bhaQati ... yam' sa hoti dlgharattam ahitliya dukkhliya" ti.
pafu:ahi five(instrumental masculine plural of "Evam, bhante."
. paflca) · "Tam kim mai\liatha, Sa!hli, atthi moho" ti?
pafliiava wise (masculfue nominativ~ singular of "Evarp, bhante."
paflflavant> "Avijja ti kho ah!IIJl, Sii!ha, etamattham vadanti. Mii!ho kho ayam, Sii!hli,
patit!hliti stands firmly, is established avijjBgato p8Q.Bill pi hanati, ·adinnarp pi 8diyati, paradBram pi gacchati, musa pi
moho delUsion, ignorance, confusion bhaQati ... Y!IIJl'sa hoti digharattam ahitaya dukkhaya" ti.
lobho avarice, greed, covetousness 'Evam, bhante."
vipllko result, fruition: "Tarp kirp maiifiatha, S8Jh8, ime dhamma kusata va akusata va" ti?
X-vipllka having X as fruit or result "Akusala, bhante."
saddha determined, faithful ."Savajja va anavajja va " ti?
samudayo rise, origin: "Sayajja, bhante."
X-samudaya having X as origin, arising from X, "Viflflugarahita va viflfiuppasattha va" ti?
or the origin of X "Viliiiugarahita, bhante.'' (-AN.)
savajja blameable, faulty
sukhaJp. happiness; comfort, well-being, ease
hirimil modest(masculine nominative singular
of hirimant) 1 etam + attham See this grammar 13 and 17.
2 yarp'sa ~ y<UJi + assa (Dative of ayaiiJ./idaml It thus means 'whi:h to him.·
28
 !ESSON m

dlgha long
IESSONm for a long time, for long
digharattam
3. 'Yasma ca kho, bhikkhave, sakka akusala!!l pajahitum tasmllham evai!l dUkkha!!l suffering, sorrow. ill
vadami - "akusalam, bhikkhe.ve, pajahatM' ti. Akusalam ca hl'daij!, bhikkhave, dutlho he who is wicked
pahlna!!l altitaya, dukkhaya samvatteyya, n§ham evam vadeyyam -"akusala!!l doso anger, ill will
bhikkhave, pajahath§' ti. Yasma ca kho, bhikkhave, akusalam pahlnaij! hitaya nanu isn't it (the case that) (na + nu see this
sukhaya sarp.vattati tasm§harp. eVaQl vad3mi - "akusalarp, bhikkhave, pajahatha· ti. grammar 10)
Kusalam, bhikkhave, bhavetha. Sakka, bhikkhave, kusalam bhavetum... Nligaseno proper name; vocative singular, Nagasena
Yasma ca kho, bhikkhave, sakka: kusalarp bhaveturp. tasmB.haip evarp vadami - nu interrogative particle (see this grammar 10)
"kusalam. bhikkhave, bhavetha' ti. Kusala!!l ca hi'dam, bhikkhave, bhavitam .pajahati gives up, abandons
ahitaya, dukkhaya samvatteyya, niiham evam vadeyya!!l - "kusalam, bhikkhave pajahatha 2nd pl. optative or imperative of pajahati
bhavetha" ti. Yasma ca kho, bhikkhave, kusalal!l bhavital!l hit;&a, sukhaya -(see this grammar 5)
smpvattati tasmaharp evarp vadami - "kusalaiJl, bhikkhave, bha:Veth1l" ti. pajahitul!l infinitive of pajahati
(-A.N.l papsandahati is connected, is reuriited, is reborn
GLOSSARY padipato -to ablative of padipp (see this grammar 15)
aiifio another (one) padipeyya optative of padipeti (see this grammar 4)
littha!!l vadati characterizes, gives the meaning to padipeti lights, kindies
(see this grammar 13) padipp lamp
atthi (there) is (see this grammar 2) paradaro someone elses wife
adinnaQl ungiven thing parhnutto one who is completely freed;
abhiiiha covetousness · a fully freed one
'I abhijjhiilu covetous one pasattha/pasatlha praised, extolled, commended
ayaiJI this one (also anaphoric: ie., may refer back paltina given up, abandoned, calmed down
to something that has been ·said) breath, life, living being
avijja ignorance puriso individual, person
avijjilgata he who iS ignorant (as well as 'male' - cf. Lesson I glossary)
ahita!!l harm . byaparmacitto he whose mind is malevolent
adiyati takes up, takes uppn byapiido ill will, malevolence,_revengefulness
ama yes bhaJ).ati says, speaks
hnamha ablative singular of ida!!l 'this' bhante reverend sir, sire, sir, venerable one
eYal!l thus · bhavati. is, becomes (see this grammar 2)
evameva even so, just so, in similar manner, of bhavati be)
in the same manner, similarly bhavita begotten, increased, developed,
opammarp. simile, example practiced, cultured
katham how , bhaveti begets, prodUces, increases, cultivates,
karohi do, make (2nd person hnperative singular develops (see this grammar 7)
form of karoti, do) maharaja great king (vocative maharaja)
I kayo body • mutto one who is released, one who is freed,
kinnu is it (that), how is it that , (but) why released one, freed one
(kilp. +nu) musa falsely
I kiip. what , ( or 'how· - see this grammar B) mUUto fool, confused one, ignorant Person
ko who whichever person (see this grammar I) yatha just as, like
I koci any (one), some (one) (ko + ci) yadi' if (see this grammar 9)
kocideva sOme (one) or other yasma because, since, just ·as (ablative -singular of
(ko + ci +eva with -<1- inserted) yam- see this grammar 12)
garaltita despised, condemned, not approved yo who ( relative pronoun, nominative singular
ct indefinite particle (see this grammar 10) masculine (see IT, 2. 13J
tasma: therefore, hence, from that
(ablative singular of soltaQl) 31
'

30
 IESS<N ill

luddho 1£5SON m
greedy person, covetous person
vadati says, speaks
vffifiU wise man
vi1i1iugaraluta GRAMMARID
despised by the wise ones
vifliiupa,sattha 1. IN1ERROGATIVE PRONOUN ka (ko/ kiql/ ka)
sakka '1'_!olled, praised by the wise ones
It IS possible (see this grammar 11) The interrogative pronoun has the stem ka-. Its forms are like those of
sa!llkanta the relative pronoun (2, 3.3) except for the neuter k::iip and some alternate forms
crossed over, passed over
saiJI]<amati in ki-·
crosses over, transmigrates
sa.Qlkamanto
one Who crosses over, one who SINGULAR
transmigrates (present pardciple, see this .
grammar 6) MtJsculine Neuter Feminine
Sii)ho
hanati, hanti
a. prope: name, S8Jha Nom: ko kii
kills, sUikes kirtl
hitruil
benefit. welfare, good
Ace: kart~ kart~
hoti
is, beCOl,ll€5 Gen:
lcassa (kissa) kossii .
Oat:
lost: kena ka ya
Rbl: kamha (I<Dsma)
.

Loc: kamhi kasso19 /ko ya111/

(kasmi 19. kl mhi. ki smi 19) kassii/ kiiya
.
PLURAL
MtJsculine Neuter Feminine
Nom:
ke kii ni kii /kiiyo
nee: .

lien: kiiSOI!I/ _ _
lcesalp 1 kesiinol!l .
D11t: k8!i8D81!1
lost: kiihi(kiibhi)
kehi(kebhi)
Rbl:
Loc: kesu kosu
.
I

2. VERBS 'to be' and 'become'

2.1. atthi · is, exists' has the following present tense form::;:

SingultJr Plural
1 Pen: osmi/ omhi osmatamha
2 Pers: asi attho
3 Pers: atthi sonti

32
33
 LESSON ID
LESSON ill
AB a main verb, atthi generally asserts the existence of something, i.e., Optative of Iabhati.. get'
s
'there is, there are': 1

Singular Plural
atthi satto 'there is a being' 1 Pers: lllbheyyiimi /1 abheyy11rp Jabheyyama
2.2. hoti 'is, becomes" lias the following present tense forms: 2 Pers: lllbheyyasi (111bheyy11) . labheyyiithll
3 Pers: Jabheyya (labheyya t I) labheyyurp
Singular Plural
1 Pers: homi hom a The optative of hoti, like its other non_:-present...,tense forffis, is f?rmed from
2 Pers: hosi the bhava- stein (2.3 above) . The forms are as follows: ·
hotha
3 Pers: hoti honti Singular Plur111
_:_
1 Pers: bhiiYB!J!JII mi /bhiiYB!J!JIIIll bhoveyyiim11
ho~ may assert existence, but it may also have the sense 'become", and
unlike atthi, may be used in equational; sentences (i.e:, "X is Y'): 2 Pers: bhaveyyiisi(bhaveyya) bhaveyyatha
3 Pers: bhaveyya (bhaveyyati) bhaveyyurtt
idha bhikkhu silava hoti. 'herein a monk is virtuous'
(sllava 'virtuous')
The optative of atthi is also ifregular, and will be given later, as will ~ther
2.3. bhavati: There is another .'be/ become' verb bhavati, which has the usual irregular forms as they occur.
regular present tense forms (!, 2.2). ln the present tense, bhavati is commonly
used in the 'become' sense, . but in other tenses and moods, it usually replaces 4 2 Uses of the Optative: The optative generally indicates that .the situatio?
hoti. d~~cribed is hypothetical, i.e., 'might be true or mi~ht come about. ~he sense IS
often future, and there may be an implication that It would be good If such-and
3.natthi such were the case:
natthi is the negative of atthi and thus means 'is not', 'does not exist':
yada tumhe... attanii'va jaoeyyatha ,
natthi satto yo eval!l srupkamati When you know this really by yourself
There is no being who thus transmigrates.·
The optative by itself, that is, without any speciill form meaning 'if' may also have
4. THE OPTATIVE MOOD a simple 'if' sense: · · ·
4.1. Form of the Optative: The optative form of the verb in p-aJi has several sets of
endings .. One set , with some alternate endings in the singular is as follows (the kusalarp. dukkha:ya ·S3If1Vatteyya.: flaham evarp. vade~arp.
1
others will be given later). These endings are added to the present stell/. and the 'If merit led to sorrow, I would not speak thus.
final vowel of the stem is lost:
Note that the second optative in the example is not '"if" ~ut si.gnifi~s
Singular something contingent on hypothetical situation de~ribed by the frrst m this
Plural casegiving a "contrary to fact" reading. (see also section 9 below)
-eyyiimll
2 Pers: -eyyii si (eyya) The optative can also be used as a polite hnperative (i.e., 'It would be good
-eyyiithll if you .... "):
3 Pers: .,-eyya (-eyyiiti)
atha tumhe ... vihareyyatha Then you <should) abide'
Thus, for labhati 'gets·, stem Jabha-:

34 35
 =~ m LESSON ill
5. TilE IMPERATIVE EXAMPLE: gacchati 'go··
'il
The second person Imperative endings are:
I Singular Plural
li Nom: gacchanto/ gacch&'tl gacchantii
· Singular Plural
Rcc: . gacchontart~ gacch8nte
2 Pers: -:hi -tha
1'
6.2. Use of the Participle: One use of the present participle is as. an actor verbal
These endings are added to the rfse . .
vo~el in the singular if not alread: lon:t stem. Wlth lengthenmg of the. final
1

stem noun denoting the doer of the. action. In this use it takes the masculine endings
1

given above, if the doer is masculir:le. or if gender is unspecified:

/I
PRFSENT TENSE IMPERATIVE
STEM IMPERATIVE evam desento (bhabbo) ·
SINGULAR PLURAL 'One who thus preaches (~s competent).'
labha7 labhahi
. gaCcha- labhatha get!'
gacchiihi gacchatha 'go!' aiiiiam kaya!!l saQJkamanto (natthi)
j3na-
iiini!hi ianatha 'know!· ·(There is no) one who trans_migrates _to another body.·
pajaha pajahahi pajahatha 'give up!'
I Another use of the present paniciple is to modify a noun, like the English
Note that the plural imperative is th . . . ..
present tense form. e same as the ordmary ~I.e., mdicative) -ing participle in "The running man'", or "The man .(who is) running away." In this
'.! us8ge, 'it takes endings that agree with the noun ln person, Dumber and gender:
If the Present stem ends in -a- th ·
person singular imperative: . . e stem alone may be used. as a second
buddhaiJl gacchantaljl passami
'(I see )the Buddha going (masc.sg. ace.).'
labha '(ypu) get!'
dhammarp. desento Tathagato eva.Ql eva vadati
6. PRFSENT PARTIOPLE
'The Tathagata who is preaching the Doctrine says thus ·
6.1. Form of the Present Participle: .
. 6.ll. The Present Participle Stem is f d. . Note that the participle may take the objects, adverbs, etc- with which it
tense stem of the verb: orme by adding -nt- to the present can occur in a full sentence and that the modifying expression with the participle
may precede or follow the noun modified.
PRFSENT TENSE PRFSENT TENSE PRFSENT PARTIOPLE 7. -e- and -o-· STEM VERBS:
STEM STEM . 7.l -e- Stems: There are numerous -verbs in Piill with a present stem ending in -e-
gacchati 'goes' gaccha-
labhati 'gets' gacchant- . They take the same endings as the verbs above with -a, but do not lengthen the
labha- labhant- vowel in any of the forms (since the long vs. short distinction dOes not apply to
e). Thus, for bhaveti- · in~reases, develops':
bt
6.12. The full paniciple is formed b dd'
the stem. One such set of endings re a h mg ca_se-number-gender affixes to
(J, .1.21), for which the nominative an:m est. ose of an -a- stem masculine noun
.
'
be given later): accusative forms are as follows (others will Singular Plural
1 Pers: bhavemi bhiivema
Singular 2 Pers: bhavesi bhiivetha
Plural
Nom: -anto/art~ 3 Pers: bhiivet i bhaventi
-antii
Rcc: .:ante Verbs in -e- commonly have a transitive or causative sense. they often
have related verbs which are intransitive (if the -e- verb is transitive) or
transitive (if the -e-- verb is causative). The vowels within the -e- stem will
.I usually be longer or otherwise different from those within the related verb, which
'I will also have a stem ending in some other vowel. Compare, for example, bhavati
I

36 37
 LESSONW
USSONm
--~e<;omes, exjsts' with bhHveti 'causes to exist, develops, m·creases', and other ·
similar sets will appear as we proceed.

7.2. Verbs with -o-

· Stems; There are also a few "erbs · p-u
a wn· h. stems ending
· m · 10. PARTICLES
Lik h • m As noted in Lesson I, 3, P~Hi has a number qf particles or "clitics" Some
-o-. - ~ t ose m -e-, they do not lengthen the final vowel when affixes are
?dded (smce. o also does not show a long vs. short distinction)). T · . others are:
does, makes , the present tense is: hus With kamti
10.1. Indefinite ci may. be added to interrogative pronouns to form indefinite \
pronouns:
Singular Plural ' kiiici (<ki!p.•d) 'anything'
1 Pers: karomi koci 'anyone'
karoma kassaci 'to/ of anyone'
2 Pers: karosi lcarotha
:I Pers: 10.2. Emphatics hi, kho, eva and nu all ijdd emphijsis, but they have somewhat
knroti karonti different but sometimes overlapping senses which are difficult to render into
English. '
10.21. kho adds a sense like 'precisely, indeed, just' or 'as for...':
evameva kho, maharaja, na ca sarpkamati
'It is just thus, Great King, that (it) does not transmigrate.'
PRFSENT TENSE PRFSENT TENSE PRFSENT PARTICIPLE (i.e., 'there is no transmigratidn')
S1EM SlEM sometimes
10.22. hi adds a sense like 'verily, forsooth, this very', or
karoti 'does,makes' karo- karont-' 'because':
deseti 'preaches' dese- kusiJialjl ca hi'daJII... bhavitam abitliya dukkhiiya saljlvatteya ...
desent-
'And if this very merit (when) increased led to non well being and sorrow.. .'
8. ACCUSATIVE OF MANNER: I
10.23. eva adds a sense like 'only, just, surely, in fact':
'thus' o;~:o~c~a-~~~forlll of pronouns may be used as· adverbs of manner: taQl
evameva 'just so, just this'
laiJl kiiJl mailliatha 'So what/how do you (pi) think?'
10.24. nu is an interrogative emphatic, which may be added to an
interrogative form to strengthen it, with a sense somewhat like English " then·,
. . evarp. in a:ctdition to meaning 'thus'. has a special .use as a polit • .. ·
It 1s (Just) so:" . ' yes , !&. or to a non-interrogative form making it .interrogative, often with the implication
eYaljl, bhante that the an.sWer is expected to be "yes·: ·
Yes, sir (!tis so).' kinnu (< kim+nu) kho so padlpo sa!llklimanto?
9. yadi 'IF' 'Is it then ttuit this lamp is transmigrating?
yadi 'if' may occur with the optati if th · · ' .
hypothetical, i.e., no(to be in fact th~ca~e: e situation descnbed is assumed to be nanu (< na+nu) 'Is it not (that... )'
. yadi na J)ajisandaheyya
If there were no connection (but there is). 11 sakkli
sakka means 'it is possible that. ..' or 'one can.. .'. It may be. used with a
Compare the following, without the optative: dependent infinitive:
. yadi... saljlkamanto natthi sakkiL.gamum. 'One can go, Qr it Is possible to go.'
If there is no transmigration (but there might be
(I.e., accepting it at least as a premise)'

3Th'Is verb also has the alternate form karant-.

38
39
 l.ESSON m
!ESSON ill
FURlllER READINGS ill
12. yasma
yasma, the ablative form of yam <ll 2.13) b itse .
.1 "Tam kiip mai'Ii\atha, Sa!ha, atthi alobho' ti?
therefore'. It can also be linked with tasffia in a ·carrel~ If can .r:nean _hence, "Evam. bhante."
/sense 'since ..... therefore''. a ve construction With the 'Anabhijjha'ti kho aham. Sii)ha, etamatthalJl vadami. Aluddho kho ayalJl,
Salhii, anabhiiil1-8lu,·n·eva paoarp. hanati, .na adinnarp adiyati, na p~radararp. gacchati,,.
13. etamattham lvadami) na musa bhai).ati, paraq:t pi na tathattaya sama:dapeti, yarp.'sa hoti digharattarp.
etamattham is from etam•attho 'th t . . . hitaya sukhaya' ti.
construction X (i)ti etamattham vadami h ah meanm~ m the accusative .The "Evam bhante."
of) X'. as t e sense I call II!) (of the manner 'Tam kim mai'Ii\atha, Sa!ha. atthi adoso" ti?
"Evam. bhante."
14. COMPOUNDS "abyapado'ti kho aham. Sa!ha, etamattham vadami. Aduttho kho ayalJl,
· The first member of a compound thou h . · Siijhii, abyapannacitto n'eva p8(J.aQl hanati, na adinnaqt adiyati,na paradararp. \
various case relations to the second: ' g m the stem form, can stand in gacchati, na musa bhaoati, parmp. pi na tathatta:ya sama:dapeti, yarp.'sa hoti (
digharattalJl hitaya sukhaya" ti.
"Evam, bhante."
~ugarahita 'despised by the wise ones' "TalJl kiip mai'Ii\atha, Sa!ha. atthi amoho" ti?
a~ra&ato 'ignorant one, one -who "goes" 'with ignorance'
"Evam. bhante.'
VIJananalakkhlll)am 'of the nature of vijananan) "Vijja'ti kho ahalJl, Sii)ha, etamattham vadami. Amu!ho kho ayam,SaJha,
15. AQ!ative case -to vijjagato n'eva p8l)arp. hanati, na adinnaqt adiyati, na paradataiP gacchati, ·na mu~a
The affix -to added to bhal)ati, pararp pi na tathatta:ya samadapeti, yam'sa hoti digharattarp hitaya
singular in the sense '(away) froma. noTuhin saltetm forms an alternate to the ablative sukhaya· ti.
·· · s ernant IS very common: "Evam. bhante." ,
Tarp_ kirp. maflflatha, 5alhil, ime dharnmi.i kusala va akusal8 vl:i' ti?
dukkhato 'from sorrow·
padiputo 'from the lamp' 'Kusa!a. bhante."
"Savajja va anavajja vir ti?
16. FlJJURE 1ENSE 'Anavaiiil. bhante."
"Viflflugarahita v8__.viflfiuppasatthi.i va" ti?
Pali has a future tense, and one form, bhavissati 'will b
occurs m this lesson. The formation of the future will be .given lat:~. will become·, 'Vififiuppasattha. bhante.'
·samatta sam8dinn8 hit8ya sukhaya satpvattaJ).ti, no va?"
17. SANDHI 'Samatta:. bhante, samadinna hitay8 sukhaya saqwattantr ti.
When a form end' ·
beginning in a different ::/,g m a .nasal (usually ml is followed closely by one "Yada:· tumhe Salha attafta·va janeyyatha 'ime dhamma: kusala, ime dhamrna:
so as to be produced in nsonant. the nasaliS often changed (i.e., "assimilated") anavajja:, ime dhamma: viflfiuppasattha. ime dhamma samatta, samad.inna:
Part ll. Alphabet and Pro!~~!~~:.;'sttion as that consonant !See the Introduction, digharattarp hitaya, sukhaya saqlVattanti'ti. · atha tumhe, 5alh8 upasampajja
vibareyyathil' ti.
IAN.)
vifiiiaz.:taiP+ti - - > ~ti
YBQl+ea -·-> yai':tca · 2 "N3harp, bhikkhave. af:tfi.arp. ekadhammarp. pi samanupassarni yarp_ evai(l
m.never appears between vowels Th . h
one beginnffig in a vowel. .and th~ tw~st:m~o~!~:; :~ ~ .Q1 is ~allowed
by abhiivitam. akammaniyam hoti yathayidalJl, bhikkhave. cittam.
appear as m. Thus etam•attham 13 abo ) .
<' dhi, m will generally Cittarp., bhikkhave, abhavitarp_, akamm~y.arp. hotr ti.
ve giVes etamatthatQ.
"NahaiP.. bhikkhave, af:tfi.arp. ekadhammarp_ pi sa manu passami yarp_ evaq1
bhiivitarp kamrnaniyarp. hoti Yathayidarp, bhikkhave; cittarp..
Cittam. bhikkhave, bhavitalJl kammaniyaljl hotr ti.

41
40
 USSON m
:I, I LESSON ill
. 'Nilharp_, bhikkhave, ·armarp. ekadhammarp. pi samanupassami yal\1 evaq~_
jivhaya rasam sayati tarp. vififl8I)ena _vijfulati, yaiica kayena photthabbarp_ phusati
i:l
abh8vitarp mahato anattha:ya saQivattati yathayidaQl, bhikkhave, cittarp.. tarp viiili8r)ena vijanati, yaflca manasa dhammarp_ viiBnBti tarp. vifu18r)ena vij8n8ti.
Cittarn.. bhikkhave, abh8vitam mahato anatth8ya BaQlvattati" ti. "Evarp. kho, malJ.araja, vij8nanalakkh81J-aiP vifuiiir).a11" ti.
IJ "Kallo'si4 bhante Nagasena' ti. · (M.PJ
ill,
"Nilharp., bhikkhave, afifiarp. ekadhammam pi~ samanupassami yarp. evam
I
bhavitafll mahato atthaya samvattati yath3yidam, bhikkhave, cittam. GLOSSARY
· Cittarp., bhikkhave, bh8vitarp. mahato atthaya:. sarp.vattati' ti.·
akanunaniya inactive, sluggish, slothful, lazy
Nilharp., bhikkhave, aflilam ekadhammarp pi samanupassami yarp. evarp. attana by oneself (instrumental singular of
abhavital!l apatubhilta!]l maha1D anatthaya saljlvattati yathayidal!l, bhikkhave, attan, 'self')
cittaQl. c
adul!ha free from malice or ill-will, not wicked
Cittarp., bhikkhave, abhavitarp apatubhUtam mahato anatthaya sarp.vattati" ti. adul!ho One who is characterized by aduttha
adhivaha bringing, entailing
''Nfiharp, bhikkhave . aiifiarp_ ekadhammarp. pi samanupa:ssami yarp eYa!\1 X-adhivaha entailing X
bhavitaljl patubhiltal!l mahato atthaya saljlvattati yathayidaljl, bhikkhave, cittaljl. anabhiiiha absence of covetousness or desire
. Cittaljl, bhikkhave, bhavitaljl patubhiltaljl mahato atthaya saljlvattatl'ti. anabhijjhlilil one characterized by anabhijjha
appiyo that which i~ disagreeable or unpleasant
"Nilharp., bhikkhave, afiflarp_ ekadhammarp. pi samanupassami yarn evam (person or thing)
.. abhavitaljl abahulikataljl mahato anatthaya saljlvattati yathayidaljl bhikkhave, abyapannacitto one whose mind is free from malice or
cittarp. ill-will
Cittaljl, bhikkhave, abhaVitaljl abahulikataljl mahato anatthaya saljlvattatr ti. aby'apado non-ill-will, benevolence, non-anger
· amtilho one who is not Gonfused
"Nfiharp., bhikkhave, aiiliarp. ekadhammarp. pi samanupassami yarp evarp. aluddho non-covetous person
. bhavital!l bahulikataljl mahato atthaya sa!]lvattati yathayidaljl bhikkhave ,cittaljl. · agacchanta coming
Cittaljl, bhikkhave, bhavital!l bahulikataljl mahato atthaya saljlvattatl'ti. iccha desire
uttara northern
"Nftharp., bhikkhave, aiifiarp_ ekadhammarp. pi samanupassa:mi yarp evarp. upasampajja having stepped onto,
abhavital!l abahulikata!]l dukkhiidhivahaljl hoti yathayidaljl, bhikkhave, cittaljl. having arrived at,
Cittaljl, bhikkhave, abhavitaljl, abahulikataljl dukkhadhivah"l!l hotl"ti. having taken upon oneself
(A.N.) kanunaniya ready, active, functional
kalla dextrous, smart, clever
3. "Idarp. kho pana bhikkhave dukkharp. ariyasaccarp.: kiljllakkhlll)aljl of what nature, of what characteristic
(from kim 'what' +lakkhaiJarp
. Jati pi dukkha, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha, marlll)aljl pi dukkhaljl, (see below))
appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo dukkho, yaljl p'iccham na labhati ghilnaljl nose
taljl pi dukkhaljl. Saljlkhittena paiic'upadilnakkhandhil pi dukkhil... ghayati smells
(D.N.) jara old age, decrepitude, decay
-1 "Bhante Nagasena, kiljllakkhal}ai!l viiifllii).an' ti? jllti birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth ·
"Vijilnanalakkhal).aqt, maharaja, viflfliDJan~ ti. janati knows, realizes, comprehends, understands
'Opammalll karohl' ti. ~vha tongue
'Yatha, maharaja, nagaraguttiko majjhe nagare si!]lgha(ake nisinno passeyya tathattal!l that state
puratthimadisato purisaqt agacchantarp_, passeyya daltkhii)adisato purisarp. tumhe you (nominative plural of tvarp, 'you')
8gacchantarp., passeyya pacchimadisato purisarp. agacchantarp., passeyya dakkhil}a southern
uttaradisato purisaQl agacchantarp., evameva kho, maharaja, yaiica puriso <lisa direction
cakkhuna rUparp. passati tarp. vififiaQ.ena vijful8ti, yailca .sotena saddaQl sul).8ti tam dukkha painful, of suffering
vififl8IJ.ena vijanati, yaflca ghanena gandham ghayati tam viftiiaiJ.ena vijanati, yaf'lca
4 kallo, Nominative Singular Ma.~. of kana plus asi (see this grammar 2.1).
42 43
 U'SSON m
nagaraguttiko superintendent of a city LESSON IV
nagaraJll city, town
nisirma seated 1 Evameva kho, bhikkhave, cattaro'mel samaoabrlihmai)HnaiJl upakkilesa,
no not verily (na + u; negative ·emphatic) yehi upakkilesehi upakkili!lhli eke samaoabrahmaoa na tapanti. na bhasanti, na
pacchima western virocanti.
pafica five
paficupadanakkhandha the factors of the! 'fivefold dinging to Katame cattaro?
existence," the five aggregates, the
elements or substrata of sensory Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaoabr8hlllaiJ.8 surarp Pivanti meraya111,
existence suramerayapBnll appativirQta. AyaQl, bhikkhave, pathamo samaiJ.Bbr8hm81)3nam.
pana verily, but upakkileso, yena upakkilesena upakkilit!hli eke samaoabrahmaoa na tapanti, na
paro another (person) bhasanti, na virocanti.
'i· sees, realizes
q passati
patubhiita manifested, become manifest, Santi, bhikkhave, eke sam81)abrahmao.a methunatp. dhammarp pa.P,sevanti,
appeared methunasmli dhamma appativiratli. Ayal!l, bhikkhave, dutiyo
piyo pleasant one, agreeable one, dear one samal)abrlihmal)linal!l upakkileso, yena upakkilesena upakkilit!hli eke
puratthima eastern samao.abrahm8IJ3 na tapanti, na bhasanti, na virocanti.
phusati touches, feels
bahulikata practiced frequently, exercised,. expanded Santi, bhikkhave, eke sama!)llbrlihmai)O jatariiparajataljl sadiyanti,
majjha(al!l) middle, midst jatariiparajatapatiggahaoa appapvirata. AyaiJl, bhikkbave, tatiyo
manasa by /with the mind (instrumental singular of samaoabrlihmal)linaiJl upakkileso, yena upakkilesena Upakkilit!ha eke
mana(s) 'mind') sama!)llbrlihmai)O na tapaoti, na bhlisanti, na virocanti.
maraQaljl death
yadli when 1 Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaoabrlihmaJ;tli micchajlvena jjvanti, micchajivli
lakkhai)Ol!l feature; mark, characteristic, appapvirata. Ayaljl, bhikkhave, catuttho samal)abranmaolinaiJl 'upakkileso, yena
discriminating mark upakkilesena upakkilitlha eke saman;tbrlihmaoa na tapanti, na bhasanti, na
X lakkhal)aJll characterized or mark'ed by X virocanti.
vijlinanal!l act of cognizing, discriminating
vijlinliti perceives, understands. with discrimination, !me kho, bhikk.'1ave, cattliro samaoabrlihmaJ;tanaljl· upakkilesa, yehi
discriminates upakkilesehi upakkilitthli eke sama!)llbrlihmal)a na tapanti, na bhlisanti, na
vijjli discriminative knowledge, wisdom, insight virocantiti.
viiiagato one who has attained wisdom
viiiiilir)Ol!l consciousness Sufal!l pivanti merayaiJl
vippayogo separation, dissociation papsevanti methunarp.
viharati lives, resides,. abides, leads a life rajataljl jlitariiP"l!l ca
vyadhi sickness, malady, illness, disease l. slidiyanti aviddasii .
saijlkhittena in short micchaj1vena jlvanti
saccarp truth eke sama!)llbrahmaoa.
samatta completed, grasped, accomplished (-A.N.)
samlidapeti encourages, incites, rouses
samadinna taken upon oneself, accepted 2 Bhoianal!l. Suppavlise, dentl ariyaslivika papggahaklinal!l cattari !hlinlini deti.
sampayogo union, association Katamani cattari?
sliyati tastes AYlllll deti, vawal!l deti, sukhal}l deti, balaiJl deti.
sirpghlitako cross, cross-roads (or sitpgh8takarp_)
sur:_mti hears, listens
SO!aljl ear
1 canaro + ime

44
 LESSON IV·
. lESSON IV

.A.yurp kho paha datva, Byussa bhBgini hoti dibbassa va manusassa va.
Vannam datva, var:u;tassa bhagini hoti dibbassa va manusassa va. Sukhmp. datva, GLOSSARY
sukh~s;a bhBgini hoti dibbassa va manusassa va. Balarp datva, balassa bhBgini hoti
dibbassa va manusassa va.
attaoal]1 self, soul (accusative singular of attan)
adhama !Ow, base, wicked
Bhojanmp., Suppavase, · dentl ariyasa:vika papggahakBnatp. imllni cattiir.i
-puriso base, wicked person
thrutani detiti.
anudhammacan nominative singular of anudhammacarin
(-AN.)
'one who acts in accordance With the
Dhamma'
3. Na bhaje papake mitte - na bhaje purisacthame.
anupadiyano freed from clinging
Bhajetba mitte kalyiil)e - bhajetba purisuttame.
(preseilt participle of anupadiyati
·'does not cling (to earthly things)'
Sabbe tasanti dru:u;J.assa - sabbe bhByanti maccuno.
appa1]1 (a) little, not much
Att3narp upamarp katva- na haneyya na ghat.~Ye
ariyasavika a noble female devotee, a female disciple or
devotee of the noble ones
Sabbe tasanti dan\lassa - sabhesal]1 jlvital]1 piyal]1.
aviddasu ignorant, foolish (one)
Attanarn upamrup. ·katva - na haneyya na ghiitaye
ajlva life, living, livelihood
long life, vitality, longevity
Bahmp. pi ce sahitarp bhasamano -na takkaro hoti naro pamatto
ime these (masculine plural of ima/ayarp.
gopo'va2 gavo gaiJ.aymp paresmp·-na bhBgava sBrnaflf:tassa hoti. (see this granunar 0
iva like, as (see this granunar 10)
Appam pi ce sa:hitarp bhasamano -dhammassa hoti anudhammacart noble, best, highest
uttama
ragaii. ca ·dosaii. ca pahaya mohmp. -sainmappajano suvimuttacitto purisa- noble, best person
anupadiyfulo idha vii hurarp va-sa bhBgava samaftiiassa hoti. defiled (with instrumental of the defilement)
upakkilil!ha
upakkileso defilement, taint, mental impurity
Piyato jayatJ3 soko- piyato jayatl bhayalj1. upama analOgy, simile, eXample
Piyato vippamuttassa - n'attbi soko. kuto bhaya1]1? Some, a few(* this grarruriar 7 under eka)
eke
kalyiil)a sincere, noble, good
Pemato jayati soko - pemato j3yati· bhayam. kamo (-a1]1) (sense) desire
Pemato vippamuttassa- n'atthi soko. kuto bhayarp.? 'kuto whence, from Where
ganayalj1 counting (Nominative singular present
Ratiya jayatl soko c ratiya jayatl bhaY3Q1. parliciple of ganeti 'counts, reekons')
Ratiya vippamuttassa - n'atthi soko. kuto bhaY3Q1? gBvo accusative pl. (irreg.) of go
Kamato jayatl soko - kamato jayatl bhayam. go cow
Kamato vippamuttassa - n'atthi soko. kuto bhayaqt? gopo cowherd
' ghatayati Causes to kill
Tal)haya jayatl soko - tal)haya jayatl bhayam. catta:ri (see tlns grammar 7 under catu)
Tal)haya vippamuttassa - n'attbi soko. kuto bhayal]1? cattaro (see this grammar 7 under catu)
(-Dhp.) catu four
catuttha fourth
ce if (see this granunar ll)
j3tarilparp. gold
jayati ari~s. is born
jjvati lives
2 gopo+ iva see Glossary and this grammar 10.
jlvo life
3 Rhythmic length (i.e., lengthened to suit the poetic meter).
47
46
 USSON IV
LESSON IV maccu death, the god of death
JhBnarp. place, locality, condition, cause manusa human
takkara doing thus, acting accordingly miccha wrong, incorrect
takkaro a doer therof ntitto · friend
tal)ha craving, thirst methuna sexual
tatiya third -dhammo sexual intercourse
· tapati shines, is bright, lustrous merayaljl fermented liquor
tasati fears (with Genitive: see this grammar 9) rajalaljl silvef, any non-gold coin ·
da(!Qa staff, rod, punishment rati Jove, attaciunent
datvli having given (see this grammar 3) Iiigo attachment, lust
dibba divine loko world, people in general
dutiya second VW)I)O color, compleXion
deti gives, donates vippamutto one ·who is freed
denti one who gives virocati shines forth, is brilliant
(feminine -see this grammar 5) santi 3rd Pers. PI of atthi 'is' (see ill. 2.1)
naro man, individual
1
sabbesarp Dative-Genitive of sabbe 'all'
patiggahaQaljl acceptance, receiving (see this grammar 8)
pa(iggafiako recipient, he who receives samaoo recluse, mendicant
papvirata restrained from, abstained from sammaJ)pajano fully comprehending one
(with ablative) sahilaljl texts, scriptures takeil as a whole
pa(isevati follows, pursues, indulges in, experien~es sadiyati appropriates, takeS on ~neself, enjoys .
pathama first samaiii\arp. state of an ascetic or monk, the holy life
pamatto one who is lazy, not diligent Suppavasa prQper name (feminine)
para other Suppavase Vocative fonn
pareS3Ij1 (of) others(genitive/dative plural of sura liquor
para 'other' -see this grammar 8) suvimuttacitto one with a well-freed mind
pahaya having given up, forsaking soko sorrow, grief
pBnarp drink, drinking huraiJl in the other world, in another existence
piyaljl pleasant thing, dear thing, pleasure
pivati drinks
puriso man, person
pemarp love, affection
balaljl strength, power, force
bahuljl much, a lot
brahmaQo Brahmin; in Buddhist texts, sometimes one
.who lives a noble life, irrespective of caste
bhajati associates with (with accusatiVe>
bhayaljl fear, apprehension
bhagava sharer, participant in (nominative singular of
bhagavant).
bhagini participant, sharer (feminine, with genitive
of the thing shared)
bhayati fears
bhasati ahines forth, isbright
bhasamann (one who is) reciting. (Present participle of
bhasati 'says, recites', see this grammar 4)
bhojallaljl meal, nourishment
49
48
 LESSON IV
LESSON IV

I
GRAMMARN
.
I I , o 'cow'
. i :. I. FORMS OF ima 'TillS, THAT Singular Plurol
! ! Some forms of ima (aYlll!l) were given in ll, 2.14. The entire set is as
Nom: go giiyo I govo
fo~ows:
ace: govorp/ govarpl govurp
SINGULAR .
Gen: .
· govorp I gunnorp
Masculine Neuter Feminine giivosso/gDVOSSII gonll'l,l ~
oot:
Nom: O!JOf!l imorp O!JOf!l .

giiveno I goveno
lost:
·ace: imorp idorp imorp . gohi I gcbhi .
giivii I giivomho I (-smii)
6en: imisso(yo) Rbl:
imassa I ossa imiiyo 1 assii(ya) gavii I govamhal 1.-smii)
Oat:
gave I govomhi I (- smi 'l,l) ,govesu I govesu I
lnst: imina I oneno .
Loc:
imiiyo gave I govomhi I (.,-smil'l)) gosu
Rbl: imumha I imasma 1 osma
imissarp limissn IJoc: go giivo I gavo
Loc: i!'losmirp I lmaml!l
osmirp i rnii!JIIf!l I IISSIIf!l
3. THE GERUND
3.1. Form of the Gerund:
PLURAL 3.ll. tv3{na) Gerunds: The most common affiX for the gerund is tva or
Masculine Neuter tvana. For verbs with a present stem ending in -11, that --a- is usually replaced by
Feminine -i- when tva(na> is added, so the stem is the same as for the infinitive (II, 4).
Nom: Thus:
.ime lmiini imii(yo) GERUND
lice: PRES 3RD SINGULAR
Gen: imesam I imesiinom imiisam I bhavitmp bhaviMHna)
bhavati 'is, becomes'
Out: esa,P I esii narp · imii"siinarp labhati 'gets, obtains' Iabhitul!l IabhitviHna) ·
garahitmp garahitva (na)
lnst: imebhil imehi imabhi I garahati 'despises'
Rbl: ebhi I ehi lmiihi For verbs with a present stem in -e, -tv8(na) is added directly, like the
Loc: imesulesu lmiisu infinitive ending:
neturp netva<na)
neti 'leads'
deseturp. desetva(na)
2. TilE NOUN go ·cow· deseti 'preaches'
Th~ ~ou_n go 'cow'. is masculine, and unlike Eriglish 'cow' does not imply For other verbs, the affix -tv3(na) is added directly to the verb root rather
female, b~t mdtc~tes the smgular of "cattle". This noun is irregular in Pali and has than to the present or infinitive stem, but the root may undergo changes in shape,
a number?~ ~ant forms. Most of them, however, resemble-the forms of other and there are many irregularities. Some forms are given below. Others will be
nouns sufficiently to be easily recognizable. they are given here for reference:
given as theY appear in readings.
Pres 3rd Singular Gerund
(Paradigm of forms on following page)
karoti 'does' katva(na)
gacchati 'goes' gantva(na)
SUIJ.?ti I sUI).3ti 'hears' sutvli(na)

I'
I 51
• ! I 50
! I

;,',,.,:
 LF.'iSON lV LESSON IV

pivati 'drinks' pitva(na) 4.2. Some verbs also' have present participles or. this tYpe m~a~a rather than
passati sees disva(na) -mana. The form anupa.diyano in thi~ reading, ts such a parttctple from
deli I dadati 'gives datva(na) anupadiyati 'does not cling (to earthly things).'. . .
janliti 'knows' iiatva(na) /janitva(na) The form sammappajano, -which occurs m thts .lesson, ts also actually an
Iabhati 'gets laddha(na) irregular middle present par1iciple of sammappajanati 'fUlly understands,
comprehends.·
3.12. -ya Gerunds: There are also gerunds formed by adding -ya. These are
particularly common with verbs which have .a prefix or prefixes added to the 4.3. Note that these participles, like others, can ~ccur either adj~tiva~y or ~~
root. The forill pariyadaya 'having taken over (completely)' which occurred in nouns. Thus sammappajano can either be used by t~el~ as a noun, t:e., o~e w .
Further Reading I is an example, since it is the gerund of pariya:diUi 'takes, gra~ps' fully comprehends'. or be used adjectivally, modtfymg a (masc~line smgulai)
(<pari+ a+ the verb root da). noun, as in samrriappajano puriso · a person who 'fully compr~hends.

3.2. Use of the Gerund: The gerund usually expresses action prior to that of the 5 FEMININE PRESENT PARTICIPLE IN -I and a .
main verb: and the two actions may be more or less closely linked. The sense is · The present participle in -ant- may fonn a feminine verba~ .~oun by taking the
often like that of English .. go and see... Thus: affixes of an -I stem feminine noun (1, 1.23). The usual sense ts she who does the
action of the verb' Thus:
gantva deseti 'having gone, preaches' or 'goes and preaches' denti 'she who gives'
karonti 'she -who does', etc.
cittmp paliyadaya tit!hati
'having taken over the mind, remains' The -mana pr~sent participle, however, takes the eildings of a f~minine -a st~m
or 'takes over the Inin.d and remains.' (II, 1.0 when it is used as a noun; thus gacchama:na 'she who goes, etc.

Note that as in the last example, the. gerund may have its own objects, etc., but 6. MORE OPTATIVES . .
the subject is generally the sa.mC as that of the main verb. In a ddt.ti. n to the optative endings given in connection With Lesson lli, there
o . rns·
are alterna end mgs
te . ID some o f the person- number categones'
as o ow .
4. PRESENT PARTICIPLE IN -mana
Singular Plural
4.1 In addition to the -ante present participle (ill, 6.1), there is a form in -mana.
The affiX -mana is· usually ·added directly' to the present stem: ema ( eyyomhe)
PRESENT 3RD SINGULAR PRESENT PARTICIPLE
I Pen:
-e (-ethO) -etho (-eyyavho)
2 Pers:
gacchati 'goes' gaccham3na . (-etho) ( erorp)
3 Pers:
uppajjati 'is born' uppajjamana

Verbs with a present stem in -e change -e- to ·-aya- before -mana: The endings in parentheses ·are sometimes referred to as .tJ:e
"middle:~ ones on the
basis of their Sanskrit origin. However, as with the participles (Sectron 4 above),
deseti 'preaches' desayama:na this distinction is largely lost in Piili. ·

The -mana participle is commonly c::alled the "middle" present participle, on 7. NUMERAlS
the basis of its origin in Sanskrit. in which it generally occurred on verbs with a 7.!. Stem Forms · ·
;; ll:li passive or reflexive sense. While there are echoes of this in-Pall, so that this affiX
is often encountered on verb roots having stich a sense, the distinction has been
-. The stem forms of the first five numerals· are:
eka ·one'
, ' ! I
largely lost. Thus for the most part the mana affiX is si.inply an alternative for dvi 'two'
i II . . -ant-, and many verbs appear in both forms: gacchanta or gacchamana; desenta 1i 'three'
or desayamana. t 'four'
ca u
paflca 'fJ·ve·
.I'· ·, ;: .
'
..

,,
,,I, I;'
52 53

I 1·1
 LESSON IV

~sJ.d astha pronou~. Th~

7 2. eka 'One· has both singular and plural f
plural is used both a~~~fonou~ ~cf:.~ar,
. [n th ·
} as e sense some . Jn both numbers eka fuflects like
It :J con~orilx
· ·
sa/~n a(liec2 llv)e, Thanu
catu 'four'
Masculine Neuter Feminine
arms are as follow;s: ' Ill II, . . e·
eka 'one' cottoro cottiiri catosso
Nom-lice: coturo
SINGULBR .catassonnorp
Oat-Gen: catunnorp
'

Masculine Neuter Feminine '

cotuhi I cotubhi I cotubbhi

lnst-Bbl:
Nom: eko e.ko Loc: catusu
r-:- elcarp
Bee:: eka'!l ekarp
. 7.4 !h:i Two' does not distinguish gender. It has the following case forms:
Gen: eki ssii(ya)
ekassa ekissarp dvi 'two'
Oat: (ekiiya) Bll Genders
lnst: ekena
ekiiya Nom-Bee: dve I duve
Bbl: ekamhii (elcasmii). ~ Dot-Gen: dvi nnorp l duvi nnarp
Loc:: ekamhi (ekasmirp) ekissorp(ekoyorp) lnst-Bbl: dvihi I dvibhi (dihU
toe: · dYl su (duvesu)
'

PLURBL 75. Other Numerais: The remaining numerals, like dvi, do not have different
M,asculine Neuter ' Feminine gender forms. They take case endings like pafica 'five', given below: .

Nom: pafica 'five'

eke ekiinl ekii(yo)
Bee: Bll Genders
Gen: ekasorp poll'ca
ekesarp (ekesiinorp) ' • Nom-Bee:
i 'il' Oat: (ekiisiinorp) paifcannnrp
1'-::1 Dat-Gen:
1-! ,,, :,' lnst: ekiihi lnst-Rbl: poi! eli hi
i. I ..I.' ekehi (ekebhi)
1 :' :1 Bbl: (ekiibhi) Loc: paiicasu
·! 'i i' ,''
I· Loc: ekesu ekiis'u
II i I

,,,r
i' 1

7.3. ti 'Three' and catu

ti 'three' _ 'Four' are like eka in that they'disnn·gu·rsh :gender.
8. sabba 'ALL'and para 'OTIIER'
When sabba 'all' is used by itself as a pronoun (rather than modifying a
noun) it takes the plural endings of a pronoun like sa/tam (ll, 2.lll. Thus
NominatiVe Singular Masculine sabbe, Neuter sabbani, Feminine sabba, Masculine-
Mosc'uune Neuter Feminine .Neuter Genitive-Dative sabbesaiJl, etc. '
para ·other' takes the pronominal endings in the same way; thus genitive
Nom-Bee: toyo ti!li tlsso (oi dative) plural paresarp. of others' in this lesson's reading.
Oat Gen: ti!IIJ&'ll I ti!1!1Dnnarp ttssannorp
lnst-Bbl: tihi I ttbhi
Loc: . tJSU

55
54
j'l 1

,,
',!,I
.,I,
 LESSON IV L£SSON IV

9· GENITIVE OF FEAR
' Verbs of fearing, such as tasati and bh- . . K.atama ca, bhikkhave·, ,vagga: parisH?
.eared: . ayatt take the genitive of the thing
Idha, bhikkhave. yassaQl partsayaQl bhikkhii bhal)<)anajiitii kalahajiitii
tasanti dandassa
• · '(They) ,1 ear th e rod'.
vivadapanna:... viharanti.
Ayarp. wccati, bhikkhave, vagg§ parisH.
10. iva 'LIKE, AS
. The fonn iva 'like, as' most comm . . .
used m forming similes ·or com . onl~ appears m sandhi as a clitic -va It . Katama ca, bhikkhave, samaggH parisH?
something is being compared. f~:S· and IS a~ded ~o
the form with which. IS
e example m this reading: . .
ldha, bhikkhave. yassarp. parisayarp. bhikkhli samagga sammodamana
avivadamiinii khirodalo'bhiitii ...viharanti.
Ayarp. wccati, bhikkhave, samagga parisH.
lik gow'va
·.. · ga-vo ga~ayaQl paresam !rna kbo, bhikkhave, dve parisii.
e_a cowherd counting the cattle of Others'
ll. ce 'IF' Dve'ma:·, bhikkh3ve, parisa.
ce is another form. with th . . . Katamii dve?
and thus cannot begin a se e sense If . It IS a ctitic, (see Lesson IG Visama: ca parisH sama ca parisa.
ntence, but must follow some other form
first word in its own ('if) sentence: · , .usually
rammarthe
3)
Katama ca. bhikkhave, visama parisH?
Idba, bhikkhave, yassaQl parisayarp adhammakammiini pavattanti
. ahaiice eva kho pana musavadi a dhammakammiini nappavattanti, avinayakammiini pavattanti vinayakammiini
If I were to tie (Literally 'be a liar (musavadin=
_ssaQl ... liar')) nappavattanti, adhammakammiini dippanti dhammakammlini na dippanti,
avinayakammani dippanti vinayakammani na dippanti.
In the example just given assam . optative of atthi 'be', and thus the Ayarp wcc3ti. bhikkhave, visama parisH .
sense here is hypothetical . IS the
Grammar 4 2 • contrary to fact as m the examples in Lesson ill,
. and 9. •
Katama ca. bhikkbave, sama parisli?
Idha, bhikkhave, yassaQl pansayBQl dhammakammiini pavattanti
adhammakammani nappavattanti, vinayakammi!ni pavattanti avinayakammiini-
' FURTIIER READING IV nappavattanti, dhammakammiini dippanti, adhammakainmiini na dippanti,
vinayakammiini dippanti avinayakammiini na dippanti.
I. Dve·m~, hhikkhav~. parisH. ·
Katama dve? AyBQl vuccati, bhikkhave, sama partsa.
!rna kbo, bhikkbave, dve parisa.
Uttan~ ca parisa garnbhlliica parisli. (-A.N.)

Katama ca bhikkh .
Idha bhikkh, ave, uttana parisa? . Appama:do amatapadaiil - pamHdo maccuno padarp
' ave yassam ·- · 2
mukbara •n'-"nn. - - ' · ~ansayBQl bhikkhii ddh - .
A v.an..n.u,wvaca ... asampajana asamahita 'bbh. u . ata honti unnala capala
appamattii na mlyanti ·- ye pamattii yathii mata
YBQl vuccati, bhikkhave, uttana paris!J.VI antacllta piikat'indriya.
EtaQl visesato i\atvii - appamadamhi pa~<)itii
Katama ca, bhikkha __ · . appamade pamodanti - ariy8narp. gc;x:are rata
Idha bhikkh ve, gambhira pansa?
_ • ave, yassam paris-y b . Yathii pi rahado gambhiro - vippasanno anavilo
acapala amukbara avikil)l)ava - · a aQl hikkhii anuddhata ho ti · _
A . ca ... sampaJffiiH samarut-3 k - n anunnala evBQl dhammani sutvana - vippasldanti p~Qitli
Yam vuccati, bhikkhav:e gambJ..;......- . _ e aggacitta: samvut'indn'y-a.
lmii kb b · • •wa pansa . · .
0 • hikkhave, dve patisa. · , Selo yathii ekaghano - vatena na samirati
evaQl nind3pasarpsHsu :- na sa~janti paiJ.c;lit3.
Dve'ni~, bhikkhave, parisH.
Katama dve? Andhabhiito ayarploko- tanuk'ettba vipassati
Vagga ca partsa samagga ca pan·sa.
- sakunto jiilamutto'va - appo saggiiya gacchati,

56 57
 l£SSON IV
LESSON IV
Idha, bhikkhave, raja cakkavatti atthaiiiiii ca hoti, dh~il ca mattafli'til .ca,
U~akam
hi nayan.ti nettika- usukara namayanti tejanam kalaffilil ca, parisaiiDii ca.
darurp namayanti tacchaka - attanarp damayanti paoQit~
(-Dhp.l Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pancahi mpgehi samannagato raja cakkavatll dharumen·eva
3. Dve'mani, bhikkhave, sukhani. cakkaill- pavatteti, tarp hoti cakkarp appapvattiyaiJl kenaci manussabhutena
Katama:ni dve? paccatthikena p3J)in3.
Gihisu~arp ca pabbajitasukham ca.
Imam kho, bhikkave, dve sukbimi. Evameva kbo, bhikkhave, paiicahi dhammehi samann3gato tath3gato araharp_
Etadaggaru, bhikkhave, imesarp dvinnarp sukhanarp. yadidaiU pabbajitasukham ti . sarumliSaiflbuddho dbammen'eva anuttaraiJl dhammacakkarp pavatteti, taiJl hoti
cakkaiP appativattiYaQl samanena va brahmai)ena va devena va marena va
Dve'mani, bhikkhave, sukharu. brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmiqt.
Katamani dve?
Ka_:n~sukharp. ca nekkhammasukham. ca. Katamehi pai!cahi?
Imam kho, bhikkhave, dve sukharu.
_ , bhikkhave, Inlesarp.
Etadaggarp · ·
dvmnarp. sukha:narp. yadidarp. nekk.hammasukharp. ti. Idha, bhikkhave, tathagato araharp G.i'mmasambuddbo atthafli\U; dhammani\ii,
mattaiillii, kaJ.aiiinJ, parisaffiiii .
Dve'mani, bhikkhave: sukbani.
Katamaru ctve? Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pai\cahi dharumehi samannligato tathagato araharp
Upadhisukharp ca nirupadhisukham ca. sanunasambuddho dhammen'eva anuttararp. dhammacakkarp. pavatteti, ·tarp_ hoti
lmani kho, bhikkhave, dve sukhani. cakkarp appa(ivattiymp. samaJ)ena va bta:hmanena va devena vii marena va
Etadaggam, bhikkhave, imesaru dvinnarp. sukhanarp yadidarp nirupadhisukham ti. brahmunli va kenaci va Iokasmil]l" ti.
(cA.N.l
Dve·mani, bhikkhave, sukhani.
Katamani dve? GLOSSARY
S3mi~arp ca sukbarp. nir3misarp. ca sukham.
atthaiii'lii one who knows what is useful. one who
Imam kho, bhikkhave, dve sukharu. · knows the correct meaning or proper
Etadaggarp., bhikkhave, imesciQl dvinnarp. sukhanam yadi~am niramismp sukharp ti.
goal
altho (-aiJl) interest, advantage, gain
Dve·mani, bhikkhave, sukbani.
anuttara incomparable, excellent
Katamaru dve?
andhabhuta blinded, (mentally) blind, ignorant
· Ariyasukharp ca anariyasukliam ca.
appamatto ,one who is diligent
Imam kho, bhikkhave, dve sukbani. not to be turned back, irresistable
appa(ivattiya
Etadaggarp .. b~~a;e. imesarp dvinnarp sukhanarp yadidarp ariyasukham ti. (a+papvattiya)
Dve maru, bhikkhave, sukhani. · · appo a few
Katamaru ctve? ainatarp ambrosia or the deathless state
Ka!'~arp ca sukhmp ceta.SikaiJl ca sukh3m. a~natapadarp
the region or place of ambrosia, the sphere
Imam kho, bhikkhave, dve sukhani. · of Immortality, or the path to Immortality
EtadaggaQl,.bhikkhave, imesarp dvinnarp sukhanarp yadictarP_ ceta.Sikarp sukham ti. (see padarp below)
(-AN.) .
araharp. deserving one, one whd ,has attained
absolute emancipation (nominative
4. Paiic~hi, bh~ave, arpgehi samannagato. raja cakkavatti dhammen'eva cakkam singular of arahant l
~:;:~~tl, tarp hot! cakkarp. appativattiyarp. kenaci4 manussabhiitena paCcatthiken~ noble one
material substance, food, flesh greed,
Kataruehi pancahi? sensual desire,tu·st
stirred up, agitated, stained, disturbed
avila
that which flows (out or onto), clinging,
lisaVO
4 Instrumental of ko (Grammar ill,!) plus m·de·riiD··te -ci·. Thus 'by any( one at ail)'.

58 59
 LEssoN IV LESSON IV
desire. In Buddhist philosophy, a dhammakamrnarp righteous deed or activity, activity
technical term for certain pertaining to the doctrine
ideas which intoxicate the mind. namayati bends, fashions
indriyal!l faculty, sense . nayati leads, takes
uttana plain, open; evident, superficial, shallow ninda blame
udakalp water niramisa not characterized by or not comprising
uddhata unbalanced, disturbed, agitated amisaiJI .
unnala arrogant, proud, showing off · nirupadhi free Jrom passions, or attachment, desireless
upadhi substratum (of rebirth), attachment, basis nekkhammarv reimiiciation of worldliness, freedom from
for rebirth, clinging to rebirth lust, craving and,desires.
usukaro arrow-maker, fletcher irrigator
nettiko
ekaggacitta of concentrated mind, of tranquil mind opponent, opposing
paccatthika(o)
ekaghana compact, solid, hard to be turned back, resistible
pa~vattiya
etadaggaQl ... yadidaQl ... this (or this one) is best...namely .... wise one
paQQito
II! ettha here padal]l place, foot, footstep, path
;:i kalaho quarrel, dispute one Who has renounced household life, a
pabbajito
kalahajata quarrelsome, disputing
Ill '
' !! kiiyika pertaining to the body, physical
recluse
i' pamodati rejoices, enjoys, finds pleasure in
kiilo proper time · one who is lazy, not diligent
pamatto
! kalaiiiifi one who knows the proper time pari."ianflfi knowing or knower Of the as.~embly
(for something) parisa asserilbly, group, gathering, retinue
kiiicana worldly attachment, a trifle proceeds, goes on
pavattati
khirarp milk set in motion, keeps going (transitive)
pavatteti
khlrodalobhiita like milk and water i.e.,at harmony as milk praise
pasa~p.sa
and water blend pakata common, vulgar, uncontrolled
gambhlra deep of uncontrolled mind ·
gihi. piikatindriya
compounding stem of gihin p3Qin a living being
gihin a householder, a layman (instrumental singular - piil)ina)
gocara sphere, range buddha ·enlightened, awakened
cakkaQl wheel, wheel as a symbQ! of efficacy in brahma Brahma, Supreme God
conquering ' (instrumental singular "' brahmuna)
Nominative singular of cakkavattin, bhaJ.tr.Janatp. quarrel, -quarreling, strife
'universal monarch' bhaJ)<)anajata quarrelsome
capala unsteady, fickle, vain dead
mata
'cetasika belonging to the mind, mental measure, quantity, right measure
jiilaQl matta
net mattaiifiU knOwirig the right measure, moderate
flatva having known, having understood manussabhUta human (being), (one) in human .form
tacchako carpenter death, god of death, tempter
tanuko ma:ro
a few miyati die~
tejanaQl point or shaft of an arrow, arrow gaiTUlous, noisy, scurrilous·
damayati
mukhara
restrains,controls mutta freed
daruQJ. wood in which one (feminine) - (locative singular
dippati
yassatp.
shines, shines forth of ya 'which (feminine)' (See n. 2.13)
dhammaiiiiu one who knows that which is proper, one rata delighting in, intent on, devoted to,
who knows the doctrine attached to
that which is proper, just, rightemis,true rahado lake

60 61
LESSON IV

Ioko world, universe LESSONV

vagga dissociated, dissentious
vato wind 1. "Janeyya nu kho, bho Gotama, asappuriso asappurisaQl - 'asappuri~o aya111
vikkiiJl.lavaca of loose talk bhaval!l'" ti? . .
vinayakammarp ethical activity, activities pertaining to "Attharnup. kho eta!p., brahm.aJ)B, anavakaso yarp asappunso asappunsarp.
monastic discipline - jHneyya- 'asappuriso ayaq1 bhavarp'" ti. . . . , .
vipassati sees clearly, insightfully, have spiritual · "janeyya pana, bho Gotama, asappuriso sappunsalll - Sappunso ayafll
insight. bhavafll'" ti? .
vippasanna clear "Etal!l pi kho, brlihmar)a, althan31!1, anavakaso yal!l asappunso sappuris3fll
vippasldati is serene, tranquil, becomes calm janeyya - 'sappuriso ayafll bhaval!l"' ti.
vibbhantacitta with wandering or confused mind "]Wleyya nu kho, bho Gotama, sappuriso sappurisatp.. - "Sappuriso ayarp.
vivadati disputes, quan·els - bhavaq1'" ti? . ._
yivadamana disputing, quarreling(-mana partiCiple of "ThanaQl kho etaQl, brHhmaiJ.a, vijjati yaQl sappuiiso. sappunsaQl Janeyya -
vivadati) 'sappun.;o ayafll bhaval!l'" ti. . · .· , .
viv3do dispute, quarTel, contention "janeyya pana, bho Gotama, sappuriso asappurisafll - asappunso aY31!1
-apanna disputing, quarreling bhavam'" ti?
visama unequal, disharmonious ''Etam pi kho, brahmaJ)a, tJi8n31!1 vijjati yafll sappuriso asappurisafll
visesato specially, particularly janeyya- ·a~ppuriso ayarp. bhavaqt"' ti.
· vuccati is called (-AN.)
sakunto bird
saggo heaven, celestial world, happy place ·Yo hi koci manussesu - gorakkharp upajivati
2.
sama• even, equal, harmonious, level eva'IJl vasettha, ;ana:hi- 'kassako' so, na brahmaiJ.o.
samagga being in unity
samahita collected, composed, settlt~d, attentive Yo hi koci manussesu - puthusippella jivati
samiiljati is moved, shaken ev31!1, Vl!settha, janahi - 'sippiko' so, na brahmal)o.
sarri1rati is moved, blown Yo hi koci manussesu - vohararp upajivati
sampajana thoughtful, mindful, attentive, deliberate eval!l, vaselJha, jiiniihi - 'VaQijo' so; na brahmal)o.
sam mod amana in agreement, on friendly terms, rejoicing
together (-miina participle of · Yo hi koci manUssesu - parapessena jivati
sammodati, 'rejoices') evarp, vasettha. jHnHhi- 'Pessiko' so, na brahm.aiJ.o.
s§misa with, characterized .bY or having amisarp
53."\ava with, having, or characterized by, asavo Yo hi koci manussesu - adinmup upajivati
sutvana having heard, having listened to evarp, Va:settha, j8nahi- 'coro' eso, na briihmal).o.
selo rock Yo hi koci manussesu - issatthatp. upajivati
eval!l, Vl!settJia, janahi- 'Yodhajlvo·, na brahmauo.
Yo hi koci manussesu - porohiccena jivati
evarp, Yasettha, jfuliihi- 'Yajakcf so, na brahmaiJO.
Yo hi koci mamissesu - gamaQl ratthai'lca bhuiljati
evarp, Yasettha, jfuliihi - ·raja' eso, ~a briihmaiJ.o.
Na cahal!l 'brahmal)3fll' btiimi - yoniialll mattisambhaVlll!l.
'Bhovadi' nama so hoti - sa ve hoti sakificano.

62
l..ESSON V ' LESSON V

akilicanarp, anadanmp. - tamahaJnl biiimi ' Br3hmaQrup..' upajivati lives on, depends on
kataiifiuta gratitude
Sabbasarpyojanarp chetva - yo ve na paritassati kassako a husbandman, fanner, cultivator
sarpgfitigarp, visarpyuttarp - tarp aharp brilmi · br3hmaQalft.' k3lena in time, at the proper time
(-S.N.) kubbanta practitioner, doer, one who practices
(dative kubbato -See this grammar 3)
3. ·appama:dena maghava - devanarp setthatarp gato khanti patience~ forbearance
appiunadarp pasarpsanti - pamildo garahito sada. · gilmo village
g3ravo reverence, respect, esteem
yatli3pi rucira!Jl pupphaljl - vaJ)I)avantaiJl agandhakaljl Gotama one of the Gotama family, the family name
evarp subhHsita vaca- aphala hoti akubbato. of the Buddha (Sanskrit Gau tama)
gorakkha cow-keeping, tending the cattle
yathfipi rucirarp_ puppharp- Val)I)avantarp sagandhakarp cora thief, robber
·evam subhasitil vaca - saphala hoti sakubbato. chetva having cut off, having destroyed, having
removed (tva (na) gerund of
digha j3garato ratti - dighrup. santassa yojanarp chindati, 'cuts, severs')
dlgho biillina!Jl saljlsaro - saddhannnaljl avijanata!Jl. j3garati is awake, is watchful
(-Dhp.) jBgaranto one who is wakeful (present participle
masculine-See this grammar 3)
4. asevana ca ba:IBnarp - paQQitanaf:lca sevana fi3tifkO . relatiVe, kinsman
pllji.i ca pfijaniy8118IJ1 - etarp_ marpgalamuttamarp. t hanall} ... (vijjati) it is possible, it is conceivable'
bahusaccaQl ca sippafica - vinayo ca susikkhito (see this grammar 7)
subh8sit3 ca ya vaca: - etaQl marpgalamuttamam: d8nal1) giving, charity
danaiica dhammacariya: ca - na:taka:narp ca sarpgaho devo god
anavajj3ni kamm8ni - etarp marpgalamuttafficuu. dhammacariy8 righteous living
arati virati papa - majjapa:na ca sarpyamo nama just, indeed, for ·sure
appamado ca dhammesu - etarp_ marpgal.imuttamam. nivato modesty, gentleness
g3ravo ca nivato ca - santutthi ca kattailiiuta: · parapessa serving others
kalena dhammasavanarp - etaql marpgalamu ttamarp. paritassati is excited, is worried, is torment~d
khanti ca sovacassata - samananaf:lca dassanam pasam sati praises
kaJ.ena dhammasakaccha - et~rp marpgalamutt~marp. panall) dtink, drinking
(-S.N.) puthu many, various, individual, diverse,
separate(ly)
GLOSSARY pupphaiiJ flower
akiiicano · one who has nothing, one who is free from piijaniyo respect-worthy. person
worldly attachment pili a worship,· offering
not possible, no place (for it) .(a + thanaiV- pessiko a messenger, a servant
- see this grammar 7) porohiccaiD- office of a family priest
anadano one who is free from attachment bHhusaccaD) teaming,. knowledge
a pi even brii ti says, tells, calls, shows, explains
avakaso possibility, space, (there is a) possibility bhavarn individual, person
arati abstention, leaving off bhufijati enjoys, eats, partakes of
issatthaii) bow, archery bho friend, sir(polite form of address)
uttama highest, best, noble · bhoviidi nominative singular of bhovadin, a brahmin
(according to the way he addresses others)
1 tam + aham

64 65
 LESSON V
LESSON V

sippiko artisan, craftsman

maghava nominative singular of maghavant lndra, susikkhita well-trained, well-practiced
king of the gods (see this grammar 2) setthata excellence, foremost place
maiQ galaDJ blessing, good omen, auspices, celebration, sevana: association
festival sovacassata gentleness; obedience
-uttamarp highest, best blessing
majjaiQ intoxicating drink, liquor GRAMMAR V
mattisambhava born of a mother
yajako one who sacrifices, a priest 1. FIRST AND SECOND PERSON PRONOUNS:
'
'i yojanarp a measure of space, a distance of about 4 to
8 miles l.l First Peison: The first person pronouns aharp T and mayarp 'we·
yodhajlvo a warrior, a soldier have forms as follows:
' yonija born of a womb
'' I
ral(halll reign, kingdom, empire, country Singular 'I'
l·.,I
·.!r 1

ratti night
Nom: II hill!' ..
·:·~ I rucira agreeable, attractive
vaQI'}avanta colorful Rcc: mal!' (mamlll!l)
vaca word, speech Gen: mama/mayhill!' (mamal!l /amhlll!l)
v3Q.ijo a merchant
Vase\(ho a proper name oat:
vijananta knowing clearly (pres participle.of vijanati) lnst:
(see this grammar 3) mayii
vinayo discipline
Rbl:
virati complete abstention Loc: moyi
visaQ.l yu tto he who is detached
ve verilY." indeed, truly Plural 'we'
volHfro trade, business, merchandise
saQ.l yamo control, restraint Nom: ma!JIII!I (amhe)
saQ.l yojanaQ.l bond, fetter (that binds one to the wheel Rcc: omhe (asme/omhiiklll!l /osma kill!')
of transmigration)
·SaQ.l sara life cycle lien: omhiikOI!I {osmiikal!llomhlll!l)
sakiiicano one who has something, one who is full of Oat:
worldly attachment (sa + kificano)
sakubbanto doer, one who practices lnst: omhehi (omhebhi)
sagandhaka fragrant, having fragrance Rbl:
(sa+gandhaka see this grammar 8) Loc: amhesu
saQ.l gaho assistance, protection, kind disposition
saQ.l g3 tigo he who has gone beyond (overcome)
attachment
sad a always, fofever
santu((hi contentment ·
santo fatigued one, he who is tired.
sappuriso a virtuous man, a worthy man, a good man
sa ph ala fruitful
sakaccha conversation, discussion
siPPaQ.l craft, technical knowledge, art

66 67
 ',j LFSSON V
.I lESSON V
1.2 Second Person:The second person pronouns tvam 'thou, you (Singular)'
and tumhe 'you (plur::~l) · have forms as follows: .· Second Person
Form Cases Represented
Singular 'thou, you'
'
i'! Nom: Sg.'Thou' te Inst.,Oat.,llen.
'! t VOifl (tuvalfl)
Rcc: llllfl (tvalflltuvn'!'lltovalfl) ' Pl. 'You' ¥0 Rcc.,Oat.,lnst.,llen.
llen:
Oat: tavoltuyhalfl (tavalflltumhalfl)
lnst: 2. NOUNS AND ADjECTIVES IN -vant AND -mant
Rbl: tayii (tvoyii) There afe nouns and adjectives with a stem in -mant or -vant.They have
' the same endings, except for the presence of the -m- or the -v-. Their case and
Loc: : tnyi (tvnyl) gender forms are· shown below, using silavant- 'virtuous (one)' as an· example.

2 I Masculine
Plural 'gou' Singular Plural
Nom: Nom: silava I van to vontii .·
Rcc: tum he silavanto I
(tumhiiklilfl) Rcc: silnvantlllfl (sil ovarp) 1-vante
llen: llen:
Oat: tumhiiknlfl silavato I -vnntossn silavntnlfl/-vnntiinnlfl
Oat:
lnst: lnst:
Rbl: tumhehi ( tumhebhi) silnvnti I -vontena silavantehi ( -ebhi)
Rbl:
Loc: .tumhesu silnvnti I vnnte
Loc: silnvnntesu
.
( -vnntomhi 1-vantnsmi 1!'1)
l.3 Enclitic Forms of the Pronouns: The first and second Person uoc: sTiavn.-vn 1-vanta silavnntol-vanta .
p~onouns also have short, or "enclitic" forms, They do not have forms fof the
different cases, and thus one must tell from context wh· h . . .
particular u H IC .case IS mtended m a
. h ~age. owever. they are also not used in all cases. The forms and the · The alternants following the slash ( !) are analogical ones formed from the
cases m w Ich they are used, are shown· in the following charts: ' full -vant- stem by adding the endings of -a-. stem nouns <I, I. 2D. Although
later formations, they are found in all stages of the langUage. Note that the other
First Person forms have three stems: one in -va- (or -rna-. for the -mant- stems), in the
Nominative-Vocative singular; one in -vant-(-mant-) in the Accusative Singular
Form Coses Represented · and all of the plural except for the Dative-Genitive; ·and one in -mat- (-vat-) for
Sg.'l' me Inst.,Oat.,llen. the rest of the forms. ·
2.2 Neuter: The neuter fonns are just like the masculine, except -for ·the
Pl. 'We' no Nominative , Accusative, and the plural Vocative. These forms are as follows:
Rcc.,Oelt., lnst.,llen.
Singular .
Plural
Nom:
silavalfl
Rcc: sTJovanti/-vnntiini
Uoc: sTinva

68 69
 LESSON V LESSON V

2.3 Feminine: The feminine is formed by adding -I- to either the

-~ant-~-man~-) or !he -~at- (~mat-:) stem. The Nominative Singular is thus 5. PAST PARTICIPLE
either szlavanti or silavati. This then takes the same endings as a regular 5.1 Formation of the Past Participle: Tiie past participle (sometimes
feminine noun in + <I, I. 232) · called the perfect or the passive patticiple) is most commonly formed with one of
the two· affixes -ta or-na. Of these two, -ta is the most co:rrullon ..
3. PRESENT PARTICIPLE CASE AND NUMBER ENDINGS
· Some forms of the present participle in· -ant- were given in m, 6.12. The 5.11 -ta Participles: The -ta ending is added directly to the verb root.
others _are, for the most part, like those of a -vant- ( ..:mant-) noun. Soffie, but not all, roots that end in a consonant add -i- before the-ta. Thus:

~.1.
Masculine; The full set of masculine forms is as follows, using gacchanta Root Past Participle
Verb
gomg, the goer as example: . SUQ-Oti/SUI}3ti 'hears' su- suta
( bhavati 'is, becomes' bhil bhil ta
·Singular Plural gacchati 'goes' ga(m)- gat a
·labhati ·gets, obtains" labh- laddha (<labh•ta)
Nom: gocchonto/gocchnrp gocchnnto lgncchanto dis- 2 diqha ( <dis+ta)
passati 'sees·
nee: gocchantorp lgacchonte garahati 'despises' garah- garahita
lien: patati "falls' pat- patita
gncchoto gocchatnrp
Dot: I gacchnntiina'l) As the exantples show, shape changes, which may be complex, often take
lnst: place between the root and the present tense, and there may be others when .-ta
gacchntii gacchnntehi(-ebhi) is added, ·commonly involving assimilation of consonants and such changes as a
, I: Abl:
(regular) shift of aspiration to the end of a cluster. as in
Loc: gocchatl gocchantesu
Uoe: gnccholi,llgncchonto gecchantol gocchontii Iabh +ta -->labhta-->labtha-->laddha.

Although some regularities afe discernible, there are numerouS irregular

3.2 Neuter: The neuter forms are like the masculine, except fot the Nominative- forms, and detailed rules for the formation of the past patticiple will not. be given
accusative which are as follows· · here. For the present, it is simplest to learn the forms as they occur.
Sinoulor Plural
5.12 -na Participles: For some verbs, the past participle affix is -na. As
Nom: gocchantani with -til, there are various changes in the root and stem which
gacchantnrp will not be ·given
Hte: I gacchanti here. Examples· are:
'

Verb Root Past Participle

' 3:3 Feminine: As mentioned in N, 5, the present patticiple can take the feminine
I '
-I ending. The case for~ ar~ like those ~f Other -I stems, but -nt- may become
deti/dadliti "gives' dli- . dinna
-t- before the non-nommattve-accusative endings. uppanna
uppajjati 'is born, arises' uppad-
.. Thus Singular Genitive-Dative-Instrumental-Ablative detiya, Plural
chindati 'cuts' chid- c-hinna
Gemuve-Dative detinam. etc.
5.2 Use of the Participle:
'1 4. arahant 5.. 21 The past participle, like the present participle, may be used as an
, I
adjective modifying nouns. As the name suggests,. the sense will generallY be past
. The nc_run afahant 'Arahant: deserving one·, which Occurred in Further
Readmg N m the nominative singular arahalll, was originally the present ot completed action. This use .is already familiar, since many of the forms that
h'ave been introduced as adjectives so far are actually past participles. Thus, for
parti~tpl~ of _the verb arahati :is worthy, deserves'. However, it also has a
exatnple, danta ,'tamed, subdued' from dameti 'tames, controls'; pahina 'given
Nommative Smgular araha, like a -vant- -(-mant-) noun, and the nominative
plu~al appears. as araha as well as arahanto. Otherwise, it takes the same
endmgs as vant- ( -mant-) nouns or the present participle. 2 As noted earlier, the root dis- replaces the root of passati in non-present forms.

70 71
 LESSON V
,,
1:
up, _abandoned' from pajah_ati. 'giv~s up, renounces, abandons', etc. As stated
earlier, these forms agree wtth the noun in number, gender, and case:
II ,, cittalll dantaljl 'the mind (when) tamed. the tamed mind'
.I
i
i
(Neuter Singular Nominative/Accusative)
Bkusala:m Pahina:m bad action, (when) given up
!
·,
<Neuter Singular- Nominative/Accusative)
I
. They may ei~er pr~ede or follow the noun they modify.- Thus we could
also fm~ danta:m Cittarp the tamed mind' or pahinar:o. akusalam 'abandoned
bad action, bad action refrained from·. · 8. PREFIX sa- 'with'
As we have also seen, past participles {although they were not identified
as such) may occur as predicates in equational sentences and. again there ,-,
agreement: . ' ' '
ime dhamma (viftfiu)garahit3·.
These actions are despised (by the wise)'
· 5.2 Past participles may also, like the present participle, take gender-
number endings to form nouns. In the case of the past participle, the noun will
generally refer to the perfomer of the action (i.e., the subject of the verb)if the
ve~b fr?m whict. ~t IS formed IS· intransitive, or the one who has undergone the
action, I.e., the obJect of the verb). if·the verb is transitive.
!fle gender number endings, arid their case forms, are those of -a stem
masc~lme and neuter.(], 1.21-2) and -a stem feminine (ll, ].!) nouns The form
Tathagato 'the thus~gone <me·, ,used for the ]luddha is an example, being formed
from gata, the Participle of- gacchati. Similarly,the form mutto 'freed one' is
formed fro~ ~e past ~artictple of muiitati 'to release' and can have a feminine
f~rm ~utta she wh~ IS released'. Similarly, the form adinnar:o.· that which is not
giVen IS the a- negative of the past participle of deti (or dadati) 'gives, with a
neuter s~lar endmg. These fonnations are very common in Pali, and many more
examples will occur as we proceed.
6. yohi koci
yohi koci (yo 'reiative'+ hi 'emphatic' plus ko 'who' + ci 'indefinite')
has lli.e sense 'who (so) ever' The locative case on a plural dependent noun
followmg such an expression has the sense "among'. Thus:
yohi koci manussesu 'Whoever among men'.
7. thanaljl AND atthanam
7 .I thanaljl ' place, space·. often followed by vijjati 'be found exist' has the
sense that whatever follows is possible',(literally 'there is a place f~r X'):
t~a~arp ..._vijjati yarp . sappuriso sappurisarp janeyya ...
It IS posSible that a good man mig)lt recognize a good man·
72
LESSON V
7.2 atthanalJ)., as the opposite of thanarp means 'impossible, cannot be.' ·
Note that avakaso 'space, possibility' and ttie negative anavakaso are
also used with the same general· import as thanai{I. and atthanalJ).. Note also
the following construction, in which both atth3narp and anavakaso are used,
as equational predicates of eta D). introducing an impossibility:
etarp ... atthanarp, anavakaso yarp ..
'That is impossible, it cannot be that. .. ·
In addition to the prefix sa- 'ones own' m, 9), there is a homonymous
prefix sa- meaning 'with, accompanied by' or 'having'. ·Thus sakificano '(one)
having worldly attachment' from sa- + kiftcano 'worldly attachmerit. · Compare
akificano '(one) without worldly attachmeht'. other examples of this prefix have
occurred in earlier readings, though they were not noted as such. Thus siisava
'with, having or characterized by asavo ('clinging, desire') and sfimisa 'with,
characterized by or having amisarp (' material substance, food, .flesh, sensu~
desire, lust') in Further Reading N.
9 'THIS, NOT THAT
'This, not that', i&, 'X not Y' can be expressed in Pali by X na Y:
raja eso,. na brahmaoo
'That one (is a) "king", not a brahmin.'
10. 'LIVE BY'
'Live by (means of)' can be expressed in two ways:
upajivati lives on, depehds on' plus the accusative, 9r
· jivati 'lives' plus the instrumental..
FURTHER READINGS V
I. "Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu ahuneyyo hoti
pahuneyyo dakkhi!)eyyo ai\jalikarai)iyo, anuttaraljl pui\iiakkhettallllokassa.
Katamehi chahi?
ldha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhun.a Iiipam disva n'eva sumano hoti na
dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajano.
Sotena saddam sutva ... pe ...
ghanena gandhaQl ghayitva ...pe ...
jivhaya rasam sayitva ...pe.. .
kayena photthabbaljl phusitva ... pe ...
ptanasa dhammam viiUJ.aya n' eva sumano hoti na dummano,, upekkhako
viharati sato sampajano.
73
 LESSON V
L£5SON V
lmehi kho, bhikkhav'e, chahi dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu ahuneyyo 4. "Tam kim maf:thaiha, bhikkhave, 'rilparp niccarp va: aniccarn va'?" ti.
hoti pahuJJeyyo dakkhil)eyyo ailjalikaraJ)lyo anuttaral!l puililakkhettal!llokassii" ti. "Anicca~ bhante."
(-A.N.) "Yarp. pan3n.iccam. dukkhatp: va tam sukhaQl va?" ti.
"Dukkhal!l bhante."
2. "Tena hi. Sivaka, tafiiiev'ettha pafipucchami. Yatha te khameyya tath~ nrup "Yam panamccarp. dukkhaiP viparil)amadhammalll, kallannu 4 taQl
byakareyyasi. . ---\ · · . · / · samanupas~itutn, 'etarp. mama, eso'hamasmi, eso me atta:'?" ti.
Tam kim maiill.asi, SIVaka, santai'Jl va ajjhatta!p. lobharp "atthi me ajjhattam. 'No h'etam, bhante."
Iobho" ti paja~asi, asantal!l va aijhattal!l Iobh31!1 "n'atthi me ajjhattal!l lobho" ti
pajanasr ti?
Vedana ... pe. .
sanha ... pe ... saiJikharB ...pe ... viiillfu).arp_ niccaq1 va
aniccam vaT ti.
"Ev31!1 bhante." . ;,Aniccaql, bhante."
"Yal!l kho tval!l. Sivaka, santal!l va ajjhattal!l Iobhal!l 'atthi me ajjhattal!l "Yam pananiccarn,dukkha:q~ va ta:rp- sukharp. va?' ti.
lobho' ti pajanasi, asalltaQl va ajjhattarp Iobharp 'n'atthi me ajjhattarp lobho', ti "Dukkhal!l, bhante." ·
'I pajanasi- evaQl pi kho, Sivaka, sanditthiko,dhamino hoti... "Yam pananiccarp_, dukkhaJll, vipafir)amadha_mmaql, ka1lannu tarn
samamipas~ituJll, 'etaql mama, eso'hamasmi, eso me atta'?" ti.
Tarp kiifl mai'lftasi, S1vaka, santarp va ajjhattarp. dosarp ..pe... 'No h'etal!l bhante." (-S.N.)
santaqi·va ajjhattarp mohaQl ... pe ...
santal!l va ajjhattal!l Iobhadhammal!l ...pe ... GLOSSARY
santal!l vii ajjhattal!l dosadhammal!l ... Pe ... from today on ( • ajjato + agge)
'i·'l "' ajjatagge
santal!l va ajjhattal!l mohadhanunal!l "atthi me ajjhattal!l mohadhanuno" ti inwardly, internaliy, subjectiveOy)
ajjhattam
pa)anast, asanta.rp va· ajjhattaQl moQadhammarp "n'atthi me ajjhattalJl worthy of respectful salutation
afi jalikaraqlya
mohadhBmmo" ti pajiiniisi"ti? some, a certain
afifiatara
"Ev31!1 bhante.". excellent, superb, wonderful,
abhikkantam
Yal!l kho tVal!l, Sivaka, santal!l va ajjhatt31!1 mohadhammal!l "atthi me (literally, gone-beyond-ly)
ajjhattarp mohadhammo" ti pajanasi, asantaq1 vii ajjhattaqt mohadhammarp iron ball
ayogu\o
"n'atthi me ajjhattarp mohadhammo" ti pajanilsi - evalll kho, Sivaka,· third singular past of va tti, 'says.speaks'
avoca
sandi!thiko dhammo hoti. ". burning, blazing
8ditta
aha said
"Abhikkantal!l. bhante, abhikkantal!l, bhante ... upasakmp mal!l. bhante, venerable, worthy of offerings'
ahuneyya
bhagava ctharetu ajjatagge r>ao'upetarp. saranaij1 gatarp_" ·ti. third singular past of upasaiiJ_kamati
(-A.N.)
upasaq1kami
'approaches' ·
upasa,Ko lay-devotee, practicing Buddhist
3. Raja aha: "Bhante Nagasena, yo j8nanto papakammazp karoti yo ca ajananto indifferent, disinteFested
upekkhaka
papakammarp kar.oti, kassa bahutaram apufliian" ti? approaches, attains, comes to; reaches
Thera aha: "yo kho maharaja ajananto papakammarp karqti tassa upeti
(the past participle upeta has the sense
bahutaram apufiil.an" ti. · 'endowed with')
Terra hi, bhante Nagasena, yo amhB:kam. 3 ra:japutto va ra:jamah8matto etad ( ~etam) + avoca
~ta-d-avoca
va ajananto papakammarp karoti taQl rnayaQ1 diguGHIJl dal).c;lema" ti. is fitting, seems good"
khamati
khettal!l field, sphere
"Tal!l kil!l mannasi maharaja: tatt31!1 ayogu)al!l aditt31!1 sampajjalital!l, eko
gan hati picks up,. takes
ajananto g31Jbeyya, eko jananto g31Jheyya, katamo balikataral!l 4ayheyya:'ti? instrumental-ablative of c h a- 'six'
"Yo kho bhante ajananto gaiJheyya so balikataral!l <)ayheyya" ti. chahi
qayhati gets burned
"Evalneva kho maharaja yo ajananto papakammarp karoti tassa bahutararp of the nature of X
apufii\an" ti. (X) dhamma
tafifieva .. tarn+ eva
"Kalio'si bhante N;;gasenli' ti.. (-M.P.)

4 kallarp (Neuter of kalla) + nu (interrogative) i.e. 'so then is it ~mart ...?'

3 Honorific (royal) plural.

75
74
 ~ONV
I
li tatta heated, hot
,. tatha thus, so LESSON VI
: terra hi if so, in. that case
thero elder, senior (bhikkhul
dakkhiQ eyya I. Paflca-sikkhapad3ni:
worthy of offerings or gifts
daqQeti · punishes
digUIJ-31{1
1. PaQ.8tip8ta veramaQI sikkhapadarp_ samadiyami.
doubly, twofold
disva having seen 2. Adinn§da:na veramaQI sil:d<hapadaiP- samadiyami.
durii.mana unhappy, downcast
dhifreti holds, bears, accepts, contains 3. Kamesu micchacara veramaQI sikkhapadarp samadiyamL
dhilretu third singular imperative of dhilreti
(i.e., 'let him, her, it'...) 4. Musavacta veramaQI sikkhapadarp samadiyiimi.
naq~
alternate. form of the prorioun tall)
nice a pennanent, non-transitory
no 5. Suramerayamajja..:.paffiadatthana veramaQI sikkh8padarp
negative 'not'; more einphatic than na samadiyami.
pajamrti realizes, understands well
pa\ipucchati asks in response, inquires 2 Yathilpi cando vimalo - gaccham I akasadhatuya
pa(ipucchissami. First Person Future of patipucchati
pan upetaq:t sabbe taragal).e loke- abhaya atirocati,
for life (literally 'possessed-with-breath-ly' · tath'eva silasampanno- saddho pmisapuggato
<piii)B(JD.) 'breath' +upetan;I neuter past sabbe mactharino· loke - cagena atirocati.
participle of u peti (see above)
pi.ip.akammatp. evil, sinful act
pahuQeyya Yathapi megho thanayaJ!l- vijjumali satakkaku
worthy of hospitality thalarp. ninnarp ca piireti - abhivassarp vasundhararp,
Puiifia[(l ,~ merit, righteousness evam dassanasampanno - Sammasambuddhasa:vako
balikataraiQ. more, more greatly
byifkaroti _mac~harirp adhigaQ.h8ti- pai'lcatttanehi pal)~ito.
explains, answers, brings to light
bhagavant fortunate one (used as an epithet for the A.yuna yasasa c'eva - VaiJI)ena ca sukhena ca ·
Buddha) sa ve bhogaparibyii!ho - pecca sagge pamodatl" ti.
,,'·i;; mahifmatto chief minister (-AN.l
yall) that, since, for (adverbial use of the neuter
accusative of -Y a-) 3 Atha kho Selo brahmal).o tihi m3Qavakasatehi parivuto ...?'ena ~eQi~as.sa
rifjaputto prince
vifiiiaya jatilassa assamo ten'upasarpkami. Addasa kho Selo hrah~a?o KeQiyassamt~e Jatile
having perceived or known app:ekacce uddhanani khal)ante. app'ekacce . kattham phale~te, app_ekacce
vipariqama change
vedanif bhajanani dhovante, app'ekacce udakam~Qikarp. patiUhHp~nte, ap~ :kacce asanaru
feeling, sensation paliflapente, Kel)iyaJ!l pana iatilarp samam yeva man<Jalamalam pa\IYadent~J!l~ _
i' saQtkharo essential condition, a thing cOnditioned,
I'
Disvana KeQiyarp jatilal\1 etadavoca: Kinnukho bhot~ -KeQI_:.~ss~ av~ho. va
I I' '·i' :·! saiifiii'
"mental coefficients" bhavissati, vivaho va bhavissati, mahayaflflo va paccupa~~tto. ra)a va Magadho
',, !
sat a
perception, recognrition
mindful
Seniyo Bimbisaro, nim.antito svatanaya saddhirp balakayen~ tt? . . _._ _
santa 'Na me, Sela, avaho bhavissati n'api vivaho bhaVIssatl, n ap•.. raJ(! Magadho
existing, being (present participle of atthi) Seniyo Bimbisaro, nimantito svatanaya saddhiQl balaka:yena. Apt c_a kho ..me
sandi(( hika visible, empirical, empirically ascertainable, mahayafii'lo paccupatthito atthi. SamaQo Gotamo Sakyaputto Sakyakula pahba)tto,
of advantage in this iife AIJlguttarapesu carikiup_ caramano ~ahat~ bhikkhusaQl~?e~a ... Apal)arp. anuppatto.
sampajjalita ablaze, in flames
sammodi ... So me nimantito svatanaya saddhirp bhtkkhusarpghena- tt.
past of sammodati - 'rejoices'
Siv-ako a proper name
sum ana '"Buddha' ti, bho Kel)iya, vadesi?"
r-:
of a happy mind, of a pleased mind

1 Nominative Singular of the pt1esent P8rticiple--see Grammar V .1.

76
 LESSON VI
LESSON VI
'Saccam ve amata vac~i' - esa dhamma sanantano -
''Buddho.· ti, ,bho Sela, vadami." 'sacce ~tthe ca dhamme ca' - ahu, 'santo patitthita.'
(-S.NJ
"Buddha' ti; bho Kel)iya, vadesi?" GLOSSARY
'"Buddha' ti, bho Sela, vadami."
Alpgu ttarapa place name
"Ghoso pi kho eso dullabho lokasmiiJl yadidaiJl 'buddha' " ti. acchariya wonderful, marvelous
(-S.NJ atirocati outshine, excel ,
attarutqt accusative of attan 'self'(see this grammar.l.D
4. "Dve'me, bhikkhave, puggala lake uppajjamana uppajjanti bahujanahitaya atha now, then
bahujanasukhaya, bahuno janassa atthaya hitaya sukhaya ... adinnlldana (IJl) seizing or grasping that which is not given to
one,
'··,''
.,i
Katame dve? addasa saw (3rd singular past tense of dassati2
(passati) 'sees) '
'I '. Tathagato ca araharp sarnrnasambuddho, raja ca cakkavatti. Ime kho, adhigaJJ)Iati excels, surpasses
1[ '!. ' bhikkhave, · dve puggala lake uppajjamana uppajjanti bahujanahitaya anlidaya without taking or accepting
'
' I. hahujanasukhaya, bahuno janassa atthaya hitaya sukhaya .. " iti. anutappa to be regretted (from anutappati 'regrets,
repents')
Dve'me, bhikkhave, puggala lake uppajjamana uppajjanti acchariyamanu'Ssa. anuppatta reachfd, one who has reached
api(ca) but, still
Katame dve? app'elfficce api + ekacce (see this grammar 17)
abhivassati rains (down), sheds rain
Tathagato ca araharp. sammasambuddho, raja ca cakkavatti. Irne kho, araha altefnate nom. sg. of a'rahant (see V.4)
bhikkhave, dve puggara lake uppajjamalla upPaiianti acchariyamanussa" ti. ariyo noble one
assamiya belonging to a monastery or hetmitage
il 11 ·,·1·,
1

'
"DvinnaiJl, bhikkbave, puggalanaiJl kaiakirtya bahuno janassa anutappa hoti. assamo monastery, hermitage, ashram
j, I Katamesarp dvinnarp.? akasadhatu space element, space-, sky Oikaso 'sky,
space' +dhatu (see this glossary)
'!. ·.,' Tathagatassa ca arahato samma:samhuddhassa, raiiflo ca cakkavattissa. apaQo place name
, II I'
abba shine, luster, sheen
I '.·:.1 1;, Inresam kho, bhikkhave, dvirmarp puggaJanarp k8lakiriy8 bahuno janassa ayu longevity, duration of life
f, ''
L, anutappa hoti" ti. avaho. wedding, bringing .a bride
lisanaijl seat
ahu (they) say or said
udakaQl water ·
Katame dve? t,.;.ddhanaiJl fire hearth, oven
uppajjati is hOm, is rebom in, arises, originates
Tatha:gato ca araharp sammasambuddho, raja ca cakkavatti. Ime kho, · ekacce some, a few
bhikkhave. dve thUpHrahH" ti. etad ~etarn

<-ANJ esa altemate form of eso (see II, 2.12)

kat\haiJl wood, firewood
5. Tameva vacarp bhaseyya - yay'attanam na tapaye katva having done or made I
pare ca na vihirpseyya - sa ve vaca subhasita. kamo(aiJl) sense.desire, sense-pieasure II
Piyavacameva bhaseyya - ya vaca patjnandita 2 Trus
verb is commonly cited as such in gra~ars and dictionaries. _but doe~ :rtot
I'
yarp anadaya papani - paresarp bhasate piyarp. actually occur in that form. The actual occurnng present tense form Js dakkhitJ, and
passati is also used in the same sense. II

78
79
!
1\

1:
II
 Us:;;ONVI '-"'SSN VI
Diiuatipato destruction of life, killing
ki!lo proper time papaQI
killakiriya
sin. evil
death, passing away puggalo person, individu-al
kiqJ what (see Ill, ll used here as an putto son
inteiTOgative particle purtsapuggalo individual, man
kinnukho Hdrp + nu +kilO); why, what for, what pllreti fills .
is it then · pecca having departed, after death
kuddho angry. one phiilenta
.! ' kulaqJ lineage, _clan, family
splitting, breaking
'
I' Kel).iyo (present participle of phiileti )
proper name balakayo army
khal).anto digging (present participle of khauati) bahu many
ghoso noise, sound Bimbisaro proper name
\ cando moon bhavissati
I
cago will be (third future active indicative of
liberality, generosity bhavati 'be, become')
c3rik3 sojourn, wandering, journey bhajanaQJ vessel, utensil
cllrikarp caramano (while) going on alms-pilgrimage bhasati says, speaks
ia!ilo one who wearS matted hair, an ascetic bhasate is spoken, speaks (third singular present,
jano individual, person, people (collectively),
-l!hllllaiJl middle voice,indicative)
sandhi form of .th3nHJJ1 bhikkhusaiJlghO community of Buddhist monks
(X) !lhiinaiJl condition or state of X (see this grammar 15) bhogo enjoyment, item for enjoyment, wealth,
tapayati torments, tortures
tarBga.Qo possession
galaxy of stars, host of stars bhoto Dative-Genitive of bhavant 'venerable'
thanayati roars, thunders
thalarp (see this grammar 4)
plateau, raised dry ground maccharin greedy one, selfish and avaricious one,
thilpiiraha worthy of a stupa
-thilpo stingy one
stupa, tope majjaiJI intoxicant
dassanarp perfect knowledge, insight
dullabha rrun:ill<HIJl a big jar, pot
rare, difficult to Obtain mauQalami!la . pavilion, a circular hall with a peaked roof
dhatu element, relic, basis mata dead, (one who is) dead
(feminine-see this grammar 6) mahanto great, big (one)
dhovanto one who washes, one who cleans mahllyaiifio great sacrifice, big alms-giving
nimanteti invites Mligadha of the Magadha (couptry)
ninnarp low land
nu
mllJ)avako youth, young man (especially a young
then, now Brahmin)
I paccupal!hiiti
'
I!! is present micchacaro
·'i paiifiapento wrong behavior
one who prepares or arranges musavado lying, falsehood
li patiyadeti prepares, arranges
I,,, me my, to me, by me (see V, 1.3)
paQ.Qito wise one megho ·rain cloud
patit!hiipento one who places, one who keeps
pati!(hita
yaimo sacrifice, almsgiving .
I , established, fixed, founded upon yadidaiJl that iS, namely
I I patinandita rejoiced; welcomed
I ,i! yasas fame, repute, giory
pabbajita renounced, ordained, gone forth
::; yena ... tena where... there (see this grammar !0)
1;
(into the holy life) loko world
pamodati rejoices, enjoys, finds pleasure in
'I II
paribyU!ha provided with
V3QI)O
vadeti
outward appearance, complexion
says, speaks
parivuta followed by, surrounded by
pare
vasundhara earth
other(ones> <See this ·Grammar 13) rl
i'
I !
i!i 81
80

,,,,,, '
 I.FS.'iON VI

vaca word, speech LESSON VI

vijjumiilin
wearing a garland or row of lightning GRAMMAR VI
(epithet for a cloud) I. MASCULINE -an STEMS
vi mala 1.1 -an stem nouns have a nominative singular in -a, but will be introduced in
clear, clean, bright
vivaho glossaries as ending ii:t -an, so as to distinguish them from -a stem nouns.
maniage4- wedding, canying or sending
away of a bride
vihirpsati injure<;;, hurts, (l)presses EXAMPLE· attan "self sour
ve
indeed, verily Singular ,Plural
veramani abstinence
Sakya · Nom: atta
saccarp family name (of the Buddha"s lineage) attiino
nuth · .. Rtt: ottiinorp I ottorp
sata hundred
satakkaku Gen:
epithet for a cloud ottono ottiinorp
.<lit.erally, 'the hundred-cornered one')
Oat:
saddha
saddhi!Jl
behevmg, determined lnst: ottena
with attanii attanehl ( -eblii) .
' sanantana Rbl:
·,, 'I eternal, old, ancien't
' ' santo Lot: attoni attonesu
good person (declines as· an -ant participle
stem, see V, 3) Dot: ottolattii .
otto no
samadi}rati
takes upon or with oneself
sammasambuddho
perfectly enlightened one, a fully
·NOTE: attan also has alternate plural case forms with -u- or -u- ; thus Genitive-
enlightened Buddha capable of teaching
others Dative attiiDa!Jl, lnsnumental-Ablative attiibi/-bhi, Locative attusu 1-usu.
samarp of oneself, by oneself
sa:marp yeva - sBmaiJl + eva)
12 Many -an stem nouns have irreguiar or alternate fonns. Thus brahman '(god}
sHvako disciple Brahma' is similar to attan, but has Vocative ·singt.ilar brahme; Dative-Genitive
sikkhapadam Singular ·brahmuno, and the following alternate fonns:
precept, rule, instruction
·''I
silasampann~
one endowed with virtue, one who practices
morality, virtuous one lnstr-Abl Sg.: brahmuna (along with brahmana)
Seniya Dat-Gen Pl.: brahmunam (along with brahmanam)
a clan name (literally 'belorigin.g to the aimy')
Selo proper ·name '
svatanaya NOTE: brahman also has forms with -TJ- instead of -n-: thus brahmuva. brahmaQ.3,
hanati for tomorrow, for the following day
! i: kills brahmuQ.arp , brahm3J.18IP. etc.

l3 rajan "king" has forms as follows·

Singular Plural
Nom: raj 11
riijiino
Rtt: rajiinarp I rejorp
Gen: rofiii o I rii ii no raiiiiorp I riijunarp
Oat: (riijiiSSII) (riijiinorp)
lnst: riijinii rojuhi (-ubhi)
rafiiiii
i,;. ' Rbl: riijehi (-ebhi)
I. Lot: raj i nl I r:onii e riijusu (rajesu) .

I DOt: riijo I rojo rojaiUI

82
83

LESSON VI
2. -in STEM NOUNS
Nouns with a stem in -in have a Nominative Singular in -I, but will be listed
in g1ossaries ending in -in to distinguish them·-from -l stem nouns. They inflect as
follows (bhovadin, which occurred in Reading V, is another example of .this class):
LESSON VI
different dialect, Originally, these·were from the present participle of the. ~erb
bhavati 'be, become', hence literally 'the existing one, being' but were s~t;etalized
in this usage, and thus the case forms resemble those of a present partictplf?. All
of.the_case forms of bhavant do not occur, but those which may be encountered
are as follows;

EXAMPLE: maccharin "greedy person, miser' Singular Plural

Nom: bhaYaiJI bhavanto I bhonto
-
Singular Plural Rcc: bhavantaiJI bhavante
il,
Nom: mocchari mocchorinol
liI 6en: bhavata'l) I bhavantiinaiJI
Rcc: m occh ori noiJI lmocchori rp mocchori bhoto
Oat:
'
6en: moccharino I bhavantehi
mocchorissa mocchorinal'fl lnst: bhotii
oat: l!honto
,I·,
Uoc: bhiiYIIIJI, bho
lnst: moccharinol moccharihi ( -ibhi}
Rbl: moccharlmhiil-ismii
5. -as STEM NOUNS: manas . .
Loc: macchori ni /·i mhl(-ismiiJI) moccharisu
' Pa:li has a few Neuter nouns with a stem in -as, such as manas~ mmd., a?d
cetas- 'thought, intentiOn, purpose', which will be listed in .that ~onn m Glossaries
Uoc: macchori mocchori nolmocchori here. In Sanskrit, such riouns formed a distinct class, but m Pali, th~Y have. b~n

. ,,1·' ; i'i
3. mahant AND Santo
3.1 mahan! "great' has endings much like the -vant/-mant stems (V, 2), but with
converted almost completely to the Neuter -a type (1, 22), an? only have d1stmct
forms in the singular, as exemplified by the first alternants m the chart below.
Note that the other alternants have the same forms as -a stem nouns. The plural
i
the following nominative forms. Note that maha occurs as both singular and forms belong completely to that type: thus Nominative Plural manani etc.
plural:
EXAMPLE: rna nas 'rrun
· d'
Si11gular Plural Singular
Nom: mohii mohii I mahanto I mahanta Nom: mono I mana'!'
Hcc: -
32 santo 'virtuous person' may appear in the nominative plural as well as Gen:
singular, as santo. Otherwise, it generaUy follows the -mit stems: manaso I manassa
Oat:
Singular Plural lnst: manena
manasiil manamhii (asmii)
Nom: santo santo I santa Hbl:
Loc: manasi I mane/ am hi (asmi IJl)
HistoiicaUy, sant- is the present participle ofatthi, and still appears in Pali in Uoc: mano I manaiJI
the sense "existing', as well as in the specialiZed sense of 'virtuous person' given
here. Thus the meanings must be distinguished from context.

4. ADDRESS FORM bhavant

bhoto is the Genitive-Dative form of a noun bhavant 'Venerable' used as
a polite form of addresS. The vocative address form bhante With which we are
familiar is actually a related form, and appears to have been borroWffl from a

i 85
';;
I 84
 USSONVI
6. FEMININE -u STEMS: LfSSON VI
dhatu 'element, relic' which appears · th . One form of the past tense of gacchati 'goes' (<gatp.) follows this pattern
element' in this reading repr~sents a new typ m f e com~ound . akasadhatu, 'sky (Other forms will be given later):
but feminine. These nouns are relatively rare eanod nhoun WI~ a stem ending in -u,
• ave endmgs as follows:
· EXAMPLE· dhatu Singular Plural
Singular I Pers: ogamol'fl agomiima l agomomho
Plural
Nom: dhiitu 2 Pers: agamatho I agamottha
Rcc: agamii
dhiiturp . dhiitii I dhiituyo 3 Pers: agamul'fl
,I lien:
Oat: dhiitiinarp 7.2 The upasaQikami Type ("The -is Aorist") Aoother form of the past tense, the
dhotuyii most common in Pall, adds the following endings to the root (again, sometimes
I,, lnst:
with other changes in the form of the root)·
I I Rbl: dhatiihildhiitiibhi
Loc: Singular Plural
dhiituyarp dhiitusu
Uoc: I Pers: -i l'fl I -i sarp -imha I imha
dhatu dhiitu ldhatuyo .
2 Pers: -ittho
i I i
7. PAST 1ENSE ("AORIST') 3 Pers: -il'flSU I -iSUI'fl
largely ~!ri~=~ :r:~s~~e~ (s?me~es referred to as the "Aorist", since it is
regard to past tense forma~:t =~~s~ . There are ~ev.eral classes of verbs with
Thus with upasamkamati- 'approaches' ·( <Upa +sam +kam- )
appear in this lesson. . ' orms exemplifymg two of these classes Singular Plural
I Pers: upaSOI'flkamil'fl uposal'flkomimho/-i mho
7.1 The addasa Type ( "A Aorist" and "R A . .. .
1
1

I
affixes, often accompanied by a prefix a- ~!ue~~ ).}.n
this type, the following 2 Pers:
UPOSal'flkDmi
upasarpkamlttha
I .. verb root Other chailges in the roo t e ugment ) are added to the
may also take place. 3 Pers: UPIISOI'flkOmi l'fl SU
j
Singular Plural Wtth these affiXes. also, an augment a- IS sometimes prefiXed, particularly
I Pers: Ol'fl with shorter stems. Thus from bhl:lsati 'speaks', we have abhasi 'he said', etc.
. -ama I omha When the root already has prefixes, the augment, when it appears, comes
2 Pers: between them ,and the root. ThUs from pavisati 'goes in, enters' (from pa + vis)
-a -otha I -'ottha
3 Pers: we have pnvisi from pa + a + vis ,_where the -a- is the augment, as well as the
Ul'fl I -u form pavisi~ without the augment.
atthi 'be, exist' also belongs to this class. Note the lengthening of the first
Some roots appear with the alternate ending h - vowel in the singular:
As an example from passati/dis- 'sees· h th s s o~ above, some do not.
i ,-: · - . we ave e folloWing:
'
I'.!! ' Singular Plural
Singular Plural 1 Pers: OSil'fl asimho
I Pers: OddOSOI'fl
I I': oddasiimo I oddasomho 2 Pers: asittho
2 Pers: iisi
addosii oddosotho I oddasottha 3 Pers: asirpsu
3 Pers:
oddosurp

86
87
: i,:
 LESSON VI
I..ESSqNVI
10. yena ...tena ·
gacchati appears with these "-is Aorist" endings as well as those of the The correlative pair yena ... tena is very commonly used in an idiom yena-
addasa type, and many verbs in !'ali occur in both types of past. Thus for X ... tena- Y, where Y includes a verb of motion and X, in the Nominative case,
gacchati, in addition to the forms in 7.1, we find (note the augment):
expresses the destination:

Singular Plur111 Yena assamo ten'upasaqrlmmi '(He) came to the ashram.'

I Pers: ogomiSIII!I I ogomil'!'l ogomimho
2 Pers: ogomittho
ogomi
3 Pers: agomil'!'lsu /agomisUI'!'I
8. PAST OF vac- 'SAY. SPEAK'
The root vac- is defective, since it does not have present tense forms in
actual use, though present tense forms vatti Or vacati are sometimes cited. In Pall
it has been supplanted in the present tense by forms of the root vad- as in vadati:
i However vac- does have-forms in other tenses, including the past, in which it c'an
'\
take the endings of the addasa type, It also has alternate endings. One of these is
the form avoca,'said' that occurred in the further readings of lesson five.· Other
forms will be given in a later lesson (VDJ,4) .
9. PAST PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES WITH INSTRUMENTAL SUBjECTS
There is. a very frequent type of sentence in Jrali with transitive verbs3 in
which the verb ls in the past participial form -ta or -na (V, 5). The participle
agrees in number and gender with the object, which is in the Nominative case,
·and the Subject will be in the Instrumental case. Thus the form is like Engiish "X
has been done by Y" (Word ·order, as usual, is variable).The usual sense is "past"
or "perfect", al~ough these ~ntences are sometimes referred to as "passive":
so me nimantito
·r have invited him'. or, 'He has been invited by me'
desito Allanda maya dhammo
'l have preached the doctrine, Ananda. ·
II. liba, lihu .
aha and lihu are isolated forms, the remnant of a Sanskrit Perfect formation
that has otherwise virtually disappeared in !'ali (though some later commentarial
works have other Sanskrit-based Perfect forms). liha 'he (has) said' has already
appeared in the readings (VI, Further Readings) and ls singular. lihu is or®fially
plural, but is also found with a singular sense: 'he, they (has/have) said . The
plural sometimes also appears-~ a:haQlsu. ahu is oft~ .u~ Without an ~essed
subject and an indefinite sense, I.e., They say/have said or It has been smd.
12. 'HUNDREDS'
One way in which things are enumerated by the hundreds in Pall is for the
noun which is counted to -be compounded with sataql 'hundred', with the number
of hundreds specified by a preceding numeral. which agree~ in m~.mber and case.
That ls, It is if in English one said "three youth-hundreds for three hundred
youths":
tlni mllnavasatani 'three hundred youths'
tlhi manavasatehi 'three hundred youths (instrumental)'
Note that J:he endre compound takes the Neuter gender of sataqi even though that
which ls counted ls animate, and that sataqi appears m the plural. . ·
13. para 'OTHER (ONE'S)' and ai\i\a '(ANJOTHER' . . .
para 'other (one's) and aiii\a '(an)other' take the endmgs of_~ronouns, like
sabbe (!V, 8). Thus the plural nominative forms are pare and anne, the plural
Genitive-Dative fonns are paresaQl and ai"tilesaap., et~.

,,, If there is no direct object expressed, the participle will be in the Neuter 14. saddhim AND partvuta . .
Singular: saddrnm and parivuta both mean 'with, accompamed by, and they. take
evrup. me sutarp dependent nOuns in the instrumental case. pariwta is actuallY a ~t~ participle
'Thus have l heard.' ('being accompanied'), and thus agrees in gender, number~ case With the Of!.e
acc·ompanied:
';! Note that the participle may also be accompanied by an auxiliary like atthi:
me mahayaiilio paccupa\ihito att!Ji brnlnnal,lo cattliri manavakasatehi partvuto... · .
I have prepared a great sacrllice.' The Brahmin, with ('accompanied by') four hundred youths ...
bhikkbusaQJghena saddhiql 'with a group of bhikkbus'

~ That is, verbs that take an ·object.

89
88
 LESSON VI
LFSSON Vi
15. -thanmp AND -dhamma COMPOUNDS .
The forms thBnarp and dhamma commonly serve as -the second members of "Tarp kirp mafiflasi, Soi,la, yada te Vlr)B.ya tantiyo atisithita honti, a pi. nu te
I compounds with the senses 'state of' and '(of the)nature of respectively.· An viiJ3 tasmiql samaye saravatl va hoti k~mmanna va" ti?
example. of a -dhamma compound appeared in Further Reading V:
! vippariQ.amadh3mma 'having change as it's nature·. thanarp .is one of those forms No h'etarp, bhante."
"' with a first consonant that doubles when a vowel precedes (II, 12), hence
pamadaWtanarp from pamada+(t>thanarp. "Yada pana te, SoiJ.a, viQ.3ya tantiyo na acca:yata honti nfttisithila same gul)e
patthitB, api nu te viiJB tasmii_P- samaye sa~avatl va hoti kammanna va" ti?
16. LOCATIVE 'AMONG' OR 'IN'
The. plural locative of the name of a place or. a group of people is "Evarp, bhante."
commonly used to signify 'in that place., or 'among those people:'
Evameva kho, So1,1a, accaraddhaviriyarp ui:IdhaCcaya saqwattati,
aljlgllttarapesu 'In the Anguttara country', or 'among the atisithilaviriyarp kosajjaya saip.vattati. Tasmatiha4 tvarp., Smia, ·viriya~amatarp.
Anguttaras' adhitthaha, indriyanarp ca samatarp paP,vijjha, tattha ca pimittarp g&I)hahr t:t.
(-AN.) '
17. SANDHI
Sometimes, when a word ending in a stop consonant plus -i . is followed 2 "Kodhano dllbbaooo hoti - atho dukkhaq1 pi seti so
closely by a word beginning in a vowel, the consonant doubles and. the -i is lost atho attharp gahetvana - anattharp adhipajjati.
(Ci•V -->CCV). Thus:
Tato kayena v~caya - vadhaql katva:na kodhano
api+ekacca -> appekacca. Kodhabhibhllto puriso - dhanajHniQl nigacchati.

As with· similar saildhi phenomena in Pali, this is particularly common ·in certain Kodhasammadasammatto - ayasakyarp nigacchati
set phrases. · flatimitt3 suhajja ca - parivajjanti kodhanarp.

FURTHER READINGS VI anatthajanano kodho - kodho cittappakopano

l. "Nanu -te, Sor.m. rahogatassa patisallinassa evarp cetaso parivitakkO udapadi -
·ye kim keci bhagavato savaka a:raddhHviriya viharanti, aharp tesarp afifiataro.
Atha ca pana me na anupadaya asavehi cittarp vimuccati; sarpvijjanti kho pana me
kule bhoga, sakka bhoge Cfl bhufljiturp puflflani ca katurp. Yannonaharp sikkharp
paccakkhaya hinayavattitv~ bhoge ca bhuftjeyyaqt pliflfiani ca kareyymp.' " ti?
"Eva!Jl, bhante."
bhayamantarato jataiJl - tarp j;mo navab~jjhati.
Kuddho attharp na janati .- kuddho dhammarp na passati
andhatamarp. tada. hoti - yarp kodho sahate nararp
n8ssa5 hili na ottapparp - na vac6 hoti garavo.
kodhena abhibhUtassa - na diparp hoti kiii.canarp.
. (-AN)

"TaQl ki.rp maflflasi, SoQa, kusalo tvaiP pubbe agariyabhUto viQaya

tantissare" ti? 3. Raja ah8: "Kirplakkhai)o bhante manasika:ro, kirplakkhai)l.'i paili'Ia?" ti.

"Eva!Jl, bhante." "Uhanalakkhai)o kho maharaja manasikaro; chedanalakkha1)3 panna"ti.

' i
' I "T;~IP kirp mailflasi, Sor.m. yada te viQ3ya tantiyo accayata: honti, api nu te '.. KathatP iihanalakkhal)o manasikaro, kathaJil chedanalakkhaQa
',! viQ.ii tasmitp samaye saravatl va hoti kamm~Ma va" ti? paiilia?; opammarp karohi" ti.
"No h'eta!Jl, bhante." janasi tvalfl maharaja yavalavake?" ti.

4 tasma + iha with -t- inse1ted in sandhi.

5 na+assa ·Genitive/Dative of ayaiJl
90
91
 LESSON VI
'Yarp kho tvarp, hrahmBJ:m . .santarp va ajjhattarp manosando.sarp "atthi me
"Ama bhante, jana:mr ti. ajjhaUafTI manosandoso" ti paja:nasi, asantarn va ajjhattarp manosandosarp "n'atthi
me ajjhattarn manosandoso" ti pajanasi - evaqi kho brahmaoa. sanditthiko dhammo
"Kath3II1 maharaja yavalavaka. yavarp Iunanti?" ti. hoti" .. .iti.

"Vamena bhante hatthena yavakalapam gahetva dakkhil)ena hatthena
dattaQl gahetva: dilttena chindantr ti.
''!i "Yatha maharaja yavala:vako vamena hatthena yavak3la:parp ·gahetva
dakkhinena hatthena diittam gahetva da:ttena -chindati, evam'eva kho maharaja
yogavaCaro manasikarena m~nasaJl1 gahetva pafifliiya kilese chindati.
Evarn kho· maharaja UhanalakkhaQ.o manasikiiro, evarp chedanalakkhaua
paflflif ti.
"Ahhikkantarp, bho Gotama, abhikkantarp., ·hho Gotama, ... upasakarn mam
bhavam Gotamo dharetu ajjatagge pill)'upetal!l sarai)arp gatarp" ti.
5. "Manujassa pamatta carina- taohii vaQ<;Ihati maiuva viya
so palavati hurahur:af[l - phalamiccharp'va vanasmirp vanaro
Yarp esa sahati7 jammi - taQhii Joke visattika
soka tassa pavac)c)hanti - abhiva(lc)harp·va biraoa111

"Kallo'si bhante Nagasena" ti. Yo c'etmp sahati jammirp taQhamloke duraccayarp

<-M.P.) . soka tarpha papatanti - udabindu'va pokkhar~i" .
(Dhp.)
4. Atha kho annataro bra:hmaiJ.O yena bhagava ten'upasarpkami, GLOSSARY
upasarpkamitva bhagavata saddhirp sammodi. ..ekamantarp nis1di. Ekamantarp
nisinno kho so btiihmaQo bhagavantarp etadavoca: agariyabhUta heing a householder
acdiyata too long, too much stretched, too taut
i!·, "Sandit(hiko dhammo, sandit(hiko dh!III\mo'ti, bho Gotama, vuccati. Kittavata accliraddhaviriyaiJI over-exertion, too much exertion
nu kho bho Gotama, sandi!lhiko dhammo hoti..." iti. anna tara one, someorie, one of a certain number·
atisithiJa too loose, lax, slack
Terra hi brilhmaiJa, taiiiiev'ettha6pappucchissami. Yatha te khameyya tatha attharp gahetvana having held back, or given up; profit or
I, nam byiikareyyasi. TaQl kirp maflfiasi, briihmal)a, santarp_ va ajjhattam ragam "atthi advantage
me. ajjhattam riigo" ti pajanasi, asantam va: ajjhattam ra:garp ''n'atthi me ajjhattarp_ atho - atha
rago" ti paja:na:sr ti? adhi!lhaha concentrate, fix one's attention on,
undertake, PI:actice (imperative)
"Evam. bho... adhipajjati attains, reaches, comes to
anattha(aJ!I) unprofitable situation or condition,
"Yam kho tvam, briihmana, santarn vii ajjhattarp_ riigarp_ "atthi me ajjhattarp. harm, misery, misfortune
rago" ti pajfuuist asaniarp va ajjhattaQl ra:gaQl ··"n'atthi me ajjhattrup ra:go" ti paja:nasi anupadaya without taking hold of. without
. - evaQl pi kho briihmal)a ·sanditthiko dharnmo hoti ... " · clinging to, away from (<an + gerund of
upadati ·grasp')
"TaQl kirp mailflasi, bra:hmai)a, santarp va ajjhattarp dosam ... pe ... antarato from within (ablative of antara 'within')
santarp va ajjhattarp_ moharp_ ...pe. · andhatamaqt deep darkness
santaQl va: ajjhattrup kayasandosarp_... pe .. abhibhuta overcome, overwhelmed by
santarp va ajjh~ttarp vacis:am.losaQl ...pe ... abhiva~ghati grow, increase, outgrow
santarp va ajjhattrup manosandosarp. "atthi me ajjhattarp manosandoso"ti avabujjhati realize, understand
pajanasi, asantarp. va aiihattarp manosandosarp "n'atthi me ajjhattarp manosandoso" ayasakyaf(l dishonor, disgrace, bad repute
ti pajanasr ti?. arad!lhaviriya energetic, resolute
icchati desires, wiShes (for), likes
"Evarp, bhante."

· 7 sahafi for sahati <Lengthened for the meter).

6 taQl + eva + ettha
93
92
 !.ESSON VI LESSON VI
indiiyarp faculty (of experience or perception) nimittaljl object of a thought
iha here, now, in this world nisinna past participle of nisidati
udapadi arose, (past of uppajjati 'arises'} nisidati sits (down)
udabindu drop of water . nisidi third singular past of nisidati
uddhaccaljl over-balancing, agitation, excitement~ pakopana upsetting, shaking, making turbulent
distraction, fluny paccakkhiiya having given up, having aQandoned
Uhanarp reasoning, consideration, examination, paffiia wisdom, insight, knowledge
lifting up pa(ipuccbati questions in return.
ekamantarp aside, on one side Future 1 Sg. pa(ipucchissarni
enha in this case/context, here pqtivijjha having penetrated, intuited, acquired,
ottappaiJl shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse comprehended
'\ kammanna fit for work, ready for. playing ' pa!isalfina secluded, retired, gone into solitude
' kaliipa a bundle, a bunch, a Sheaf, a row pat!hita ' having been set, establiShed
kificanaQl any papatati drops, falls down or off
kittavatlf in what respect, in what sense parivajjati avoids-, shuns, gives up
kileso deftlement. impurity(in a moral sense) parivitakko reflection, thought, consideration
kodhana having anger, angry (one), palavati floats, swims, jumps
uncontrolled (one) pava!l!fhati grows {up), increases
kodho anger, ill will passati see, realize
gahetvana gee of ga!lhiiti puftiiarn meritorious act
gupa quality, nature, ·component pubbe pfeviously, before
Carin doer, behaver puriso man, individual
· cetas mind pokkbaraiJl lotus leaf
chindarl cuts, breakS, plucks, pierces phalaljl fruit, result
chedanarp cutting, severjrig, destroying bira~aiJl name of a plant
janana causing, bringing, producing bhuiijati enjoys, eats _ .
i
jammi wretched, contemi?tible manasikiito attention, pondering, fixed thought
jata born, arisen manujo man
jam deprivation, loss manasarp_ intention, purpose of mind, mental action
ftati a relation, relative ma:J.uva (long) vine (kind of)
tato .thereupon, further mi~ friend
tattha there, in that yaljl 'when
tanti string or cOrd (here of a musical yadii when
instrument) yanniina well, ·now rather, let_ {me),
tantissara string music {used in an exhortative sense)
tara star yannilnaJlaljl now then, let me
'I I
dakkhipa right (side) (also. 'southern· as in F.R.illl yavo barley, grain (in general);
dattarp sickle yog3vacaro one at honie in endeavor or spiritual
dipill{l solid foundation, shelter, refuge exercises, an earnest student, one who
dukkhaiJl unhappily, painfully (adverbial accusative- has applied himself to spiritual exercises
(yoga)
seem, 8)
dubba!l!Ia of bad color, ugly, of changed color rahogata being alone, being in private
duraccaya hard to remove, difficult to overcome Iiigo attachment, lust
dhanarn wealth, riches, tre~sures Iiivako cutter, reaper
naro man, individual Iunati 1 cuts, reaps
,,
;.i
;.. , nigacchati goes down ·to, enters, comes to, suffers vaco speech, word {also appears as vaca)

94 95
 LESSON VI
LESSON VII
vaci compounding stem of vaco
va9Phati grows, increases 1. "Etha tumhe, Kalama, rna anussavena, rna paramparaya, rna itikiraya, rna
I', vadho harm, killing, destruction pitakasampadanena ,...rna. silmaQo nol gan1ti. Yada tumhe, .Kalama, attana·va
.I vanarp forest . janeyyatha 'ime dhamma akusala, ime dhamma savajja, ime dhamma vihlmgarahitil,
vanaro ime dhamma samatta samactinna ahitaya dukkhaya sarp.vattanti'ti; atha tumhe, ·
! I varna
monkey
left (side) Kalama, pajaheyyatha."
vimuccati he freed. Tarp. kirp. maiilicltha, Kalama, lobho purisassa ajjhattaQl uppajjam8no uppajjati
1. viya
like, ~s (particle of comparison) hitaya va ahitaya va" ti?
viriyarp exeition, energy "Ahitaya, bhante."
visattiki'i clin . to, adhermg
. gmg . to. lust, desire "Luddho panllyarp, Kalama, purisapuggalo lobhena abhibhiito,
viharati· live, reside pariyadinnacitto, paQarp. pi hanati, adinnarp. pi 3diyati, parad8ra111 pi gacchati, musa
Vipi'i' lute pi bhat)ati, pararp. pi tathatf§ya samadapeti, yarp.'sa2 · hoti digharattatp. ahitaya
sarpvijjati ~~ms to be, appears, exist~ dukkhaya" ti.
sakka It IS possible (+ inf) "Evarp, bhante."
saddhirp with "Tarp. kirp. maiiliatha, Kalama, doso purisassa aijhattcirp. uppajjamano uppajjati
sandosalJl ·defilement, pollution httaya va ahita:ya vir ti?
I, sama · equal, even, level "Ahitaya, bhante."
samata ~quality, evenness, normal state "Duttho pan8yarp., Kalama, purisapuggalo dosena abhibhi.ito,
samayo tune, peliod pariy3dirmacitto, pHIJBQl pi hanati, adinnarp pi 3diyati, paradaraq1 pi gacchati, musa
sammatta intoxicated (by /with), overpowered by pi bhal)ati, paraiP pi tathattaya samadapeti, yarp.'sa hoti digharattarp. ahitaya
sammada drowsmess, intoxication dukkhaya" ti.
sammodati excha~s friendly greetings, rejoices, Evarp, bhante."
delights, (past sammodi) "Tarp. kiip. maiiliatha, Kalama, moho purisassa ajjhattarp. uppajjamano
saravati havmg resonance or melodiousness uppajjati hitaya va ahitaya v3" ti?
sahati conquers, overcomes "Ahitaya, bhante."
sikkha study, training, discipline "Mil!ho panllyarp, Kalama, purisapuggalo mohena abhibhiito,
suhajjo friend, good-hearted one pariyadirmacitto. p31)arp. pi hanati, adinnaql pi adiyati, paradaraJll pi gacchati, musa
·, seti sleeps, d,wells, lives pi bhal)ati, para111 pi tathattaya samadapeti, yaQl sa hoti digharattarp. ahitaya,
. Sop.o a proper name dukkhaya" ti.
.. 1 hattho hand :·Evarp, bhante."
hiri sense of shame, bashfulness "Tarp. kiQl mafliiatha, Kalama, ime dhamma kusala va akusaUi v~" ti?
hina lo;w, base, infeiio'r "Akusala, bhante."
hini'iya avattati turns to the lower, gives up orders "Savajja va anavajja" ti?
returns to secular-life ' "Savajja bhante."
I hurahura111 from existence to eXistence "Viftilugarahita va viftiluppasattha va" ti?
"Vifl.Ougarahita·, bhante."
"Samatta, samadin.na ahitaya dukkhaya saq1vattanti, nova? KathaJll va ettha
hoti" ti?
"Sarnatta, bhante, sam8dinn3 ahitaya dukkhaya sarp.vattanti ti. EvaQl no
ettha hot!" ti.
(A.N.J

1 Note that this no is not the negative~ but the clitic fonn of a pronoun (Grammar VJ3).
2 yarp. + assa

96
 LESSON VII LESSON VII

2 "NBharp, briihmal)a, sabbam dittham bhiisitabbarp ti vadiimi; na panaharp, Suramerayapiinal!lca - yo naro anuyufljati
brahmal)a, sabbarp dittharp na bhiisitabbarp_ ti vadiimi; nBharp, brahmana, sabbam idh'evameso6 iokasmizp- mUlarp khaQati attano.
sutarp bhiisitabbam ti vadiimi; na panaharp, brl.'.ihmal)8, sabbarll ·sutam n~ ( Dhp,)
bhiisitabbarp ti vad8mi; naharp, briihmai).a, sabbarp_ mutam bha:sitabb~m ti va.da:mi·
na 'pan~harp, briihmaiJ.a,. sabbarp mutarp n8 bhiisitabbaQl ti vadirni; n1ihaQ1: 4. Sace labhetha nipakazp sahayazp
briihmaiJ.a, sabbaQl viiili.atarp bhiisitabbaQl ti vadiimi; na panfihaQ1, briihmal)a, Saddhimcaram sildhu vihiiridhiraip
sabbaQ1 viflfia:tarp. na bhiisitabbaQl ti vadiimi" abhibh~yya s3bbiini parissayani
careyya tena 'ttamano satima
"Yarp hi, briihmai)a, dittharp bhiisato akusala dhamma abhivac;l<;lhanti, kusala
dhannn.a pariha:yanti, evarO.parp dittham na bhiisitabbam ti vadiirni. Yam khv'assa3 No ce labhetha nipakaQl sahayarp.
ca. briihmal)a, dittharp abhiisato kusala dhamma: pa~iha:yanti, akusaia dhamma Saddhirp.cararp siidhuvih8ridhtrazp
abhivag(lhanti, evariiparp dit!harp bhasitabbarp ti vadiimi." Riij§'va rattharp vijitaip. pahiiya
Ek6 care mlitatpg'araflfle'va niigo
"Yam hi, brahmal)a, sutarp bhiisato akusala dhamma: abhivaddhanti, kusala dhamma: ( Dhp.l
parihayanti; evarO.parp sutam na bhl.'.isitabbam ti vada~ Yam ca khv'assa GLOSSARY
briihmaQa, sutarp 'abhiisato kusal~ dhamm~ parihl.'.iyanti·, ak~sala dhamm~
abhival;l.c;lhanti, evarfiparp sutarp bhiisitabba:qi ti vadiimi. n
atipateti kills, fells
attano self's (see Vl, l.l)
"Yal)l hi, brahmal)a, mutal)l bhasato akusala dhamma abhiva<;l(lhanti, kusala attamano delightecl, pleased, happy
dhamma parihl.'.iyanti, evarO.parp mutatp. na bhiisitabb3rn · ti vadl.'.imi. Yam ca anu yufljati practises, gives oneself up to (with AcC.),
khv'assa, bratunar;m, mutaQl ahhiisato kusala dhannn.a padi:iilyanti, akusala: dha~a: attends, pUrsues
abhivac;lc;lhanti, evruiiparp mutarp bhasitabbarp ti vadiimi." anussavarp. tradition, hearsay
appa little
"Yarp hi, briihmaQB, viflfiiitaip bhiisato akusala dhamma abhivac;lt;lhanti, kusala appasmirp. dadati see this gram:mar t
dhamma:· parihayanti, evariipam viflflatarp na bhiisitabbarp ti vadami. Yarp ca abhibhavati overcomes ger. abhibhuyya;
khv'assa, br3hmal)a, vii'ifia:tarp abhasato kusala dhamma: parihayanti, akusala: ppL abhibhUta
dhamma ahhivac;lc;lhanti, evariipam viiifiataQl bhiisitabbarp ti vadiimi." araflflatp. forest, woods
assa gen. sg. of ayal)l (IV, l)
(-AN.) il:ikira hearsay, mere guesswork
eko alone
3. Saccal)l bhane na kujjheyya - dajja'ppasmil)l4 pi yacito etha come. <Second person Plural of eti)
etehi tihi !hanehi - gacche devana5 santike. evariipa (of this form), such, of this type
Kalama Kalamas, a proper name
Kayappakoparp rakkheyya - kayena sarpwto siya kujjhati is angry (with), is rritated
lctiyadu~caritatp. hitva - kl.'.iyena sucaritarp care. khar,~ati digs, uproots
garu venerable (person), te.acher
Vacipakoparp rakkheyya - vaca:ya sarpvuto siyii carati . moves (about). behaves, conducts, leads,
vaciduccaritazp hitva - vaca:ya sucaritarp. care. carries ou·t
janati knows, u·nderstands, realizes
Yo piil)amatipiiteti - musavada:IJl ca: bhiisati tathattaql thatness, the state of being so
lake adinnatp. iidiy8ti - paradiiraQl ca gacchati you (PL)(V, 1.2)
tumhe
':·· dajja Optative of deti (or dadati)
'i (see this grammar D
1dajja
kho + assa .with. the sense 'on the other hand,·
+ See this
appasmim, 7.
grammar
still, furthermore'
.
dadati gives

5 =devanan;t -
6 idha+eva+m+eso. eva. here is the emphatic eva~ -'and the -m- is intrusive.

98 99
 LESSON vn LE.~ON VII

dit!ha seen, witnessed ditthaiJl a vision, that heard, that which is hearil '(ppl. of suQati)
suta
which is seen give up, abandon gerund of jahati
hitva
duccaritarp. bad behavior, incorrect behavior (from root ha -see this grammar 8)
dut!ha wicked, malicious
I nago elephant GRAMMAR VII
I nipaka
pakopo
intelligent, mature
agita~on, anger
I parampara tradition, lineage (of scholars or teachers),
L OPTATIVE
U -ya OptativeS: A few verbs, including deti gJves, Janatt '}mows' and karoti
series 'does' sometimes appear with an optative formed with the suffix -ya. Thus, beside
pariy3dinnacitta with the mind completely overpowered by, the third person forms dadeyya, j3neyya, and kareyya, we find dajja (<dad+ y3),
with the mind completely taken over by jaflfia (<jan + ya:) or janiya, and kariya: or kayira (< kariy3). Some first person
parissayarp. obstacle forms, such as dajjaQl or dajj3mi are alsO found, but in general, such forms are
parihayati decreases, dwindles, deteriorates
p·aro rare.
other 1(person)
pahaya ger. of pajahati 1.2 Optative of atthi 'is': The optative of atthi 'is' is as follows:
pitaka basket, a term used for the three main
divisions of the Pali canon
pitakasampadana Pitaka tradition, authority of the scriptures Slngu111r Plur111
purisapuggalo individual IISS8M8
bhasitabba Future paSsive participle of bhasati 1 Pers: IISSIII!I I siyllrp
8SSII. IISS8thll
. (see this grammar 2) 2 Pers:
rna prohibitive particle (see this grammar 4)
I BSSU I siyurp
I
matarp.go
3 Pers: BSSB siya
,, I elephant. type of elephant
'il''I- .i ' muta thought, what is thought, that which is
, I .i thought The third singular siya form is Commonly used in setting up a hypothetical
mUlaiJl root, origin situation; i.e., · suppose there were .. .' or let it be that.. ·
yacita being requested, being begged for
rakkhati guards, protects, takes care of, controls siya .. Bhagavato...bh'HsitaQl jano afiiiatha pi .pacdigaccheyya
luddha greedy, covetous 'It might be (or 'suppose') that people (jano) might understand
vijita conquered (paccagaccheyya7) differently (afli\athlll what the Blessed one said.'
I
viliflata known, what is known, that which is known
what is perceived /recognized /understood 2. FUTURE PASSlVE PARTIClPLE
sace if (see this grammar 6) 2.1. The future passive participle is formed with the suffixes -(i)tabha. and -aniya,
i saccarp truth (this may be -t)iya after a stem with·-r-). The ending also appears sometimes as
. 'I
satima mindful one (nom. sg. of satimant The - i- -aneyya, or for a few verbs, -ya .. The stem used for this participle commonly,
in the re~ding is lengthened for the but not always, resembles the present stem, Thus:
meter)
saddhiJ11 caro ~onstant companion, one who accompanies Present Future Passive-Participle
santike m (to) the vicinity, near
sabba all, every gacchati 'goes' gantabba
samadinna accepted, taken upon oneself sur;Hti 'hears' sotabba
sahliyo friend karoti 'does' kattabba /katabba /karal)iya /kicca
s3dhuvih3ridhiro one who is Of noble behavior, one who is bhavati 'is, becomes' bhavitabba lbhabba' (<bhav + -ya)
steadfast carati 'moves, practices' caritabba
~ya­ see this grammar I
sucaritaiP good behavior 7 Literally .'go to meet' or 'return'.
8 bhabba has the idiomatic sense 'capable" that we met in Lesson 2, Reading 2.

100 101
 LESSON \Ill
I LESSON Vll
:I ;anati 1knows· janitabba rnatabba :lileyya
passati 'sees' datthabba /dassaniya /dassaneyya 42. no is a negative emphatic. nova has the sense 'or not', 'or isn;t it'
pUjeti ·worships, honors' pUjanJya /pujja ( <puj + -ya) •
hanati 'kills' hantabba I halii'Ia (han + -ya) eso dhammo ku-5810, no va
deti 'gives' databba I deyya 'Is this doctiin:e well suited (i.e. to attain the desired end)or not?'
pivati 'drinks' peyya I patabba
labhati 'obtains' laddhabba 5. eti 'COMES'
The verb eti'comes' adds the person-number affixes directly to the present
I 2.2 The future passive participle does not simply have a future passive sense i e stem e- : emi 'I come' etha 'you come' etc. Some other forms of this verb are:
i, "w~l be don:"· but also connotes d~sireability, i.e., "should be done" or "worthy. J
I
b_emg done. Several such forms have occurred in earlier readings, but have Past Participle ita
sunply been glossed rather than explained:
I [
i Imperative 2 Sg.
Imperative 2 Pl.
ehi
etha
I ~ bhikkhu ... hoti aiijaJikaral)lyo
The bh~u is worthy of reverence' (afljali 'gesture of reverence')' 6. sace AND -ce 'IF'
· pu)a ca pUjaniYanam sace and -ce both express 'if'.
')
·... and worship of those worthy to. be worshipped' 6.1 -ce was given in Grammar IV,ll, and, as 'was stated there, it is a clitic, and
thus follows sOme other form, usually the first word in its own ('if). sentence:
Note that. as these examples show, the future passive participle, like other
participles may be used as either an adjectiVe or a noun, and in either case ahaii.ce. eva kho paila musavadl assarp....
inflects like a masculine or neuter -~- stem or a feminine -a- stem. ' 'If I were to he (Literally 'be a liar (musavadin= 'liar'))
·'!.i:
·:, 3.attan 'self, soul' ·AS .A REFLEXIVE r
'l'j (In the example just given, note the use of the optative of atthi that was
'., ·'·' . ·The form attan <VI.. 1) can be used as a reflexive pronoun, i.e., 'oneself, given in 12 a.bove.) ·
!:1
I'
himself: h~rself yourself', .etc. CommooJy it remains in the singular in this usage 6.2 sace is, like English "if", an independent Word, and usually occurs at the
I when It Is used adverbmlly, as in the example below, where it is in the beginning of a sentence:
instrumental· case: sace labhetha nipakam. ·sahBya!p. ...
yada tumhe attana·va jiineyyatha... 'If you acquire a wise friend ...
'When you know (this) by yourselves ..
4.NEGATNE5 no AND rna The form of the verb occuring with sace (and that in the 'then' claUse) varies
4.1 rna is a prohibitive particle, and thus forms negative commands or prohibitives. with the sense. In. the example above from the Reading, it is in the optative. This is
It may be used with the past, the optative, or the imperative: common, but present tense forms (and others) are also possible:

'!
rna saddarp akattha 'Dd not make noise·
) (akattha· Second Person Plural Past of l<aroti)
rna saddarp akasi 'Do not make· noise·
(akasi ~ SecOnd person Singular l?ast of karoti)
rna pamadam anuyufijetha
'You should not indulge in sloth'(or "Don't be indolent')
i,':,' {anuyuiijetha ,_Second Person Plural Optative of
anuyufljati 'indulges in, engages in')
rna gaccha 'Don't go
(gaccha= Second Singular ImperatiVe of gacchati <Ill. 5))
sace ... saccaiJI vadasi adasi bhavasi
'If you speak the truth (2 sg. Pres.) You will not be a servant.'
(adasi- 'non-servant <Feminine)')
· 7. LOCATIVE CASE
With deti (or dadati) ~giVe', The locative case signifies 'from' or 'out of':
dajjappamasmilp '(One) Should give from the little (one has')
(<dajja + appasmirp.)
Note that appa 'little (amount)' like para 'other' sabba 'all', etc. takes the
pronominal affixes when used as a pronoun (see IV, 8)

102 103
 LL'iSON VIT LESSON VII
8. THE ROOT ha
From
-ayau· the root.sh ha ·ct'ecrease
'dJ.mllll· ' · several Important
· ' verbs are formed amon-g KasmTI cftyarp, briThmal)a mohaggi pah5tabho parivajjetahho, na sevitabho'?
them h · es, wastes away· ·· h · · · '
leaves', pajahati 'gives up .. aba~dons, r~no'::'~c!~ f~r~: ~P._ aba_ndon:<s, !~r~a~es,
MU!ho kho, hriThmal)a, mohena abhihhfito pariyadinnacitto k3yena duccaritam

1es • rahati or rahati g~ves

carati, vacaya duccaritarp carati. manasiT duccaritam carati. So kiTyena· duccaritaq,
up, abandons, forsakes, leaves' and ha:peti . ·t·
5 caritviT, vacaya duccaritarp caritva, m<.J.nasa duccaritarp caritva kayassa bhediT
Note that several of these verbs are · ann : neg ects, reduces (transitive)·
of them involve a stem jah(a)- Some r~onymfsthOI near-synonyms, and that moSt
8 paraiP marar;la apTiyarp duggatirp vinipatarp niraym11 upapajjati. Tasmftyarn mohaggi
· ms o ese verbs are as follows: pahiTtabho pal'ivajjetabho, na sevHabho. Ime kho tayo, briThmaQa, aggl pahatahba
parivajjetabba, na· sevitabbU."
Pres. 3 Sg: hayati vijahati pajahati jahati hapeti (-A.N.)
/pajahati
2 . Raja aha: "Bhante Nagasena, kirplakkhanTI paiii1.5'?" ti.

''
I Past 3 Sg: hi!yi vijahi pajahi jahi hapesi ''Pubhe kho mahTir5ja· m~ya vutta111-: 'chedanalakkhana: pailfi3'ti. api ca
obhiTsanalakkhaQl'i pi paflf1.3" ti.
Pres. PI: hayanta vijahanta pajahanta jahanta · hilpenta
,I:
·-/hayamiina
"Kathan)., bhante, obhasanalakkhaqa pailli.a'?" ti.
"Panna, maharaja, uppajjamana avijjandhak3raqt vidhameti, vijjobhasarn
Past PI: hlna vijahita pajahita jahita hapita janeti, fliii)Eilokaqi vidaqJ.seti, ariyasacciini' pakatani karoti; tato yog5.vacaro aniccan-
ti va dukkhan-ti va anatta-ti va ..sammapafifli'iya passati"ti.
Oerund: hayitva vijahitva pajahitva jahitva hapetva "Opammarn karohi"ti.
/vihaya /pahaya fhitva
"Yathfi, maharaja, puriso andhak3re gehe padiparp. paveseyya, pavittho
Fut PI: hatabba vijahitabba pajahitabba jahitabba padlpo andhakararp vidhameti, obhasaQl janeti, Iilokarp vidarpseti, rUpiini pakatani
hapetabba
karoti, evameva kho maharaja, panna uppajjama:na: avijjandhakaraQl vidhameti.
The form luY.,ti 'is decrea ed d vijjobhasmp janeti, fl3Qfilokarn vidarpseti, ariyasaccani pilkatani karoti, tato
from the same root. Some fo~s br ~~Y~~:~. ~;=~_up
. ·
or abandoned', is ultimately yobrfivacaro aniccanti va dukkhanti va anattati va sammapaiiflaya passati. Evarp
Pres 3 Sg: hiyati kho maharaja, obhiisanalakkhaqa pafifla" ti. ·
Past 3 Sg: hlyi "Kallo'si bhante Nagasenfi" ti.
Pres Part: h1yama:na (-M.P.)
3. "Bhante Nagasena, nav'i'me puggala mantitaQl guyharp vivaranti na
LESSON Vll FURTHER READINGS dhilrentitL Katame nava: ra:gacarito, dosacarito, mohacatito, bhiruko, amisagarliko,
l ? "!ayo' ~e. bra~mal)a, aggj pah~tabba parivajjetabba:
ta yo. Ragaggt, dosaw, mohaggi." , na sevitabba. Katame itthl, soo(io, paiJ.Qako, da:rako" ti.
Thero aha "Tesmp ko doso?" ~i.
"Ragacarito, bh~nte Nagasena, ragavasena mantitaQl guyharn vivarati na
Kasma cilyam, brahmana ragaggi h-tabb
Ratto kho, .brahmWJ~. ragena ~bhibhilto P P: . · ..
~d. o . pan~anetabbo, na. sevitabbo? dh8reti; duHho dosavasena mantitarp guyhai{l vivarati na dhareti; miljho
vac.ay~ - ct_uccaritarP. carati, manasa du~c~~~t~a~~~~tika~ena ~uccantarp ca~ati, mohavasena mantitarn guyharp vivarati na dhareti; bhiruko· bhayavasena
cantva,vacaya duccaritam caritva _ d · . · o. kayena duccanta.Ip mantitarp_ guyhaQl vivarati na dhareti; amisagaruko amisahetu n1antitaQ1 guyha!Tl
pararp maraQa apayam d~g 3f : ·~anasa . uccantarp ~~r~tva, kiiyassa bheda
pahatabbo parivajjetabbo, n: se~:. .. tarp rurayarp upapanati. Tasm§.yaip. ra:gaggi
vivarati na dhareti; itthl ittarataya mantitarp_ guyharp. vivarati na dhareti; SooQiko
suralolataya mantitarp guyharp. vivarati na dhareti; paiJ.Qako anekarpsikataya
mantitarn guyharp vivarati na dh~reti; darako capalataya mantitarp guyharn
Dut!ho "Kasma ciiyam • bri.ihmana
kho bralun· d . . ct osag&l_· pahatabbo
- parivajjetabbo, na sevitabbo?
ca~ati, vaca;a ducc!~:~rp. ~!~~ ~~h~~~uto par!Yiidinnaci~to. kli"_Yena duccarita~
vivarati na dh3reti.
/caritva, vacaya duccaritam caritva n a du~c~ntarp ~arati. ~ k~yena duccaritarp Bhavatiha:
Ratto duttho ca mU!ho ca - bhiru amisacakkhuko
.pararp maraiJii api.iyarp duggatim vini ~~nasa. uccantarp .~a~Itva k~yassa bheda Itthi sooQo pai)Qako cq -navamo bhavati darako
pahatabbo parivajjetabbo, na se~tabb~... IP rurayarp upapanati. Tasmayarp dt?saggi Nav'ete puggala Joke - ittara calita cam
I
',
Etehi mantitarp guyharp- khippaqt bhavati pakatan" ti.

104 105

I
:I
 lESSON vn LESSON VII

(M.P.) ka'yassa bheda pararp marai)H after the breaking up of the body and
after death
4. Middhl yada hoti mahagghaso ca kuiijaro elephant
samparivattasByi
NiddByita khippam soon, quickly
Maha:varaho'va nivapaputtho gabbho womb
· punappunalJl gabbhamupeti mando garuka heavy, important, bent on, attaching
importance to
Appama:darata: hotha - sacittamanurakkhatha guyha to be hidden, that which is hidden, secret
Dugga uddharath'attanarp - parp.ke satto'va kun.jaro. geham house, dwelling, household, hut
<Dhp.) capalata fickleness, unsteadiness
carati move about, practice, lead
GLOSSARY caiitaip behavior, character
carito one who has a character
aggi fire (plural agg1)9 X-caiita one who has the character of X kind
anatta not a soul, without a soul, non-substantial caia unsteady, fickle
anurakkhati guards, protects, watches calita wavering, unsteady
anekamsikata uncertainty, doubtfulness iiar.Iam knowledge, intelligence, insight
andhakilro(am) darkness. tato thence, from that, thereupon, afterwards
apayo Calamity, a transient state of loss· and woe darako child
after death duggam rough ground, wroog way
a pi --pi 'al,o' (see I, 3) duggati unhappy existence, realm of misery
!
I: apica (-api + ca) further, moreover;. doso wrong, fault, defeat, blemish
furthermore navama ninth
ariyasacca!Jl noble truth niddayita a· sleepy person
avacaro one at home in, conversant with nirayo purgatory, hell
Hmisam (raw) meat, food for enjoyment, material nivapapu !lha fed on fodder
things patpko(aml mud
Hmisagaruko one who attaches importance to material pajahati gives up, discards, abandons
things, items of enjoyment of food, Plll.I<iaJ<O eunuch, weakling
a greedy person param after ·
amisacakkhuka one int~nt on or inclined to material ·palivajjeti shun, avoid
enjoyment (literally,- 'one with an eye pavi!lha entered, gone into, procured
on enjoyment') ppl. of pavisati 'enters'
aloko seeing, sight, light paveseti makes enter, procures, furnishes, provides
ittara unsteady, fickle, changeable passati sees
ittarata changeableness pahl!tabha Fut. pass. part. of pajahati gives up
uddharati raises, lifts. up Plikata open, manifest, unconcealed i
Upeti comes, reaches pakatam karoti makes manifest (plikatam will agree with
uppajjamana arising, being born the object)
obh8sanarn shining puna again
obhaso shine, splendour, luster, effulgence, punappunilm again and again
appearance bhavatiha (<bhavati iha) it is said On this context)
kasma why (ablative of ko; cf. Lesson ll,l) bhllu coward
bhlluko fearful one, coward, one who is shy
bhedo breaking, splitting, disunion, decomposition
9_ This represents a new type·or noun: f!~asculine -i stems. Their remaining fonns will be
'i gi.Vf"n in the grammar of Jesson VTIJ. mantitam (that which is) given as counsel, secret talk
'

106 107
 _LES.."iiN vn
mando idiot, fool, stupid one
mahagghaso <one who) eats much, greedy, gluttonous LESSON VIII
maha big, great, large, huge m·om mahantl
I,' middhi slotjlful (one) I. Atha kho Venagapurikii hriihmaQagahap~tika yena Bl;tagava
yogo application ten'upasarpkamirpsu; upasatpkamitv~ app'ekacce Bhagavantarp abhiv3detva
rata attached to, finding delight in ekamantarp nisidirpsu; app'ekacce Bhagavata saddhirp sammodiQlsu ... ekamantarp
ratta infatuated, impassioned fone) nislc.lirpsu; app'ekacce niimagottarp savetva ekamantjup nisidirpsu; app'ekacce
ragaggi fire of passion tuQhibhiitii ekamantarp' niskliQlSU. Ekamantarp nisinno kho Venagapuriko
lolatli nature of being fond of or addicted to, Vacchagotto br;ihmaQo Bhagavantarp etac.lavoca:
longing, greed , "Acchariyarp. bho Gotama, ahbhutarp. bho Gotama! Ya:vaii.c'iP,arp ·-bhoto
varaho pig Gotamassa vippasannani inc.lriyan'i. parisudc.lho chavivaQIJO pariyoda.to.· Seyyath§pi,
vasena b~cause of, on account of
bho Gotama, saradarp badarapaQ<JUQl parisuddharp hoti pariyodHtarp, evameva
vijjobhiisa ~vijja + obhasa hhoto .Gotamassa vippasannani im.lriyi.ini parisuddho , chavivaQQo pariyodato.
vidarpseti shOws, makes appear Seyyath§pi, bho Gotama, t8lapak:karp sampati bandhana pamuttarp, parisuddharp
vidhameti Qestroys, mins, does away With, dispels hoti pariyodatarp, evameva bhoto Gotamassa vippasannani inc.lriyani. pariSuddho
vinipato great ruin, a place of suffering, state of. chavivaooo pmiyodato ...
I -i
punishment (-ANJ
! !
vivarati opens. discloses
vutta said; spoken pp. of vadati 2 Tena kho pana samayena Uggatasarirassa brahmaiJ_assa mahayahii.o
satta sunk upakkhato hoti: Pai'lca usahhasata:ni thfi.Q'Upanitiini honti y~i'Iilatthaya: paflca
samparivattasayi one who sleeps turning to and fro vacchattarasatani thOIJ'llpanitani honti yaii.ii.atthaya; paflca vacchatarisati.ini
'I ·i. jl,
sammappafifla thiiQ'llpanlti.ini honti yaiiliatthaya: paii.ca ajaSatani thUQ.'fiNnitani honti yafiiiatthi.iya;
; i~ ! I, , right knowledge, true wisdom
sevati serv~s. practiCes, takes upon oneself
paflca urabhhasatani thiiQ.'fipanita:ni honti yaiiilatthi.iya. ·Atha kho Uggatasariro
SOQQikO dnmkard hri.ihmaQo yena Bhag-dva ten'upasm:pkami: upasarpkamitva Bhagavata sac.ldhiiJI
sOoQo one who is addicted to drink. a drunkard samm<XIi... ekamantarp nis1c.li. Ekamantarp nisinno kho Uggatasarlro hri.ihmaQo
hetu for the sake of, fc~r the purpose Of, Bhagavantarp etadavoca:
by reason of "Sutam m'etam, bho Gotama, 1
aggissa iidi.inarp yilpassa ussi.ipanaru
X hetu by reason of X, for the purpose of X mahapphalarP hoti mahanisamsarp" ti.
I I "Maya pi kho etaqi, brahmaQa. sutarp aggissa actanarp yUpassa ussa:panarp
mah~pphalarp hoti rflahtinisarpsarp'"ti. Dutiyarp pi kho uggatasariro
brahmaQo ... pe ... tatiyarp pi kho Um,YBtasarlro brahmaQo Bhagavantarp etadavoca:
"Sutarp m'etarp, bho Gotama. aggissa i.idHnarp yiipassa ussapanaQl mahapphalarp hoti
mahanisarpsam" ti.
"Maya pi kho etarp, bra:hmaQa, sutarp aggissa actanarp yilpassa ussapanarp .
mahapphalarp hoti mahanisatpsam" ti. ·
"TayidaiJl, bho Gotama 1 sameti bhoto c'eva Gotam~ssa amhakarp ca. yadidarp
sahbena sabbarp." Evarp vutte i.iyasma Anando Uggatasarirarp bri.ihmaQafll
etadavoca: ·
"Na kho. hrahmaQa, tathagata evarp pucchitabba - 'sutarp ffi'etarp, bho
Gotama, aggissa acJanal{l yUpassa ussa:panarp mahapphalarp hoti mahfmisarpsam· ti.
Evarp kho. hri.ihmaQa .. tathagata· pucchitabha 'Aharp hi, bhante, aggirp .adatukamo
ynparp ussapetukamo - Ovadatu marp, bhante .. Bhagava. ,Anusasatu marp, bhante,
Bhagava yarp mama assa digharattarp hitaya sukhaya" ti. Atha kho Uggatas'ar1ro
bri.ihmaQo Bhagavant3rp etac.lavoca: "aharp hi. bho Gotama, aggim adatukamo
yOpaiJI ussapetukamo. Ovadatu marp bhavarp .Gotamo. Anusa:satu marp bhavaQl
Gotamo yarp mama assa digharattarp hitaya sukhaya· " ti.
(-A.N.l

108
 lBSONvm
LESSON VlU
ada:naiJI grasping, putting up, placing
Arlando Ananda, a disciple and chief attendant of
3. Dunniggahassa lahurio- Yatthakamanipalino Buddha
cinassa damatho sadhu. -cittam dantaQl sukh3vaharp. anisamso(aiJI) advantage", good result/ consequence
a:yasma Nom.· sg. of ayasmant 'venerable (one)'
Suctuddasarp sunipu1J.3Ql - Yatthakamanipiitinarp (used as adjective. or absolute as a ·
cittaQl rakkhetha medhiivi. - cittarp guttarp sukh3vaharp respectful appellationofa Bhikkhu of
some standing)_
Anavatthitacittassa - saddhammarp avijanato uggata~Iiro a name of a Brahmin. Literally 'with upright
Pariplavapasa:dassa - pa.Oii.ii na paripiirati. body'
upakkhata prepared, ready, adminiStered-
Yavajivaril pi ce halo - pai)Qitarp payirupasati (pp. of upakaroti)
Na so dhammarp vij~nati -- dabbl sUparasarp yatha. upanita bring up to/into, offer, preseht
(pp. of upaneti)
Muhuttania:pi ce vifiiiii - paiJQitarp payimpasati upasarpkamati approaches, goes near
Khippaq1 dhammarp vijanati - jivhii si:iparasatp yathii. urabbho a ram
usabho bull, ox
Na tarp kammam kataQ1 sadhu - yatp katva anutappati uss3panarp. erection, putting up
Yassa assumukho rodatp- vipakarp patisevati. ussiipeti raises, lifts· up, erects
evarp vutte when it was said thus (locative absolute-
~ Taq1 ca kammarp. katarp siidhu - Yarn katv3 nanutappati See this grammar .3)
Yassa patitq sumano- vipiikatp patisevati. ovadati advises, admonishes, instructs, exhorts
kilissati is stained, does wrong
A!tanaineva pathamarp - patirUpe nivesaye khippaiJl quickly, instantly
Atha 'flflamanusiiseyya - na kilisseyya pal)<;lito. gahapatika belonging to the rank of a householder,
(cl}hp) a member of the gentry
gOltaiJl aricestry, lineage1
GLOSSARY chavi skin
tayidaip < taJp. + idaiJI 'thus this ..
aggi fire(seethis grammar D ta!apakkarp palm fruit
ac.chariyarp a wonder, a marvel tu(lhibhiita (being) silent
a he-goat thUIJO pillar, post
aflfio another, other·(one) dabbi, spoon, ladle
atthaya for the purpose of (see this grammar 8) damatho restraint, training,· taming
anavaWUta - (an+ ava + thita) not. steady, not well dunniggaha .difficult to restrain
composed namaiJI name (for recogn.itiori)
anutappati repents na:magottaQl the name (for recognition) and the surname
anusasati advises, counsels, admonishes (for the lineage)
abbhuta exceptional, astonishing, marvellous, ~veseti establishes, arranges
surprising nivesaye third sing. optative of nlveseti (see VJI,l)
abhivadeti salutes, greets, shows respect patiriipa agreeable (status, position. state)
avoca said, spoke.3 sg., past tense of vatti 'says' patita delighted, with delight
(see this grammar 4) pamutta p{>l. of pamuOcati lets loose,_ liberates, sets
assa 3 sg. ya optative of atthi. (see VII. I) free
assumukha with a tearful face payirupilsati ~ssociates
iidiituka:ma eager to/ desirouS. of putting together paripUrati be filled, attain fullness
(See this grammar 8 under kama)

111
110
 li:SSON VIU
IJ:'iSON VIn

pariplava unsteady. wavering

pariplavapasa:da one whose tranquillitY is superficial GRAMMAR VIU
pariyodi.ita very cle"an, pure, cleansed
parisuddha clear, pure, spotless. 'bright. perfect L MASCULINE -i STEMS . .
pasado ti·anquility, serenity, clarity, purity aggi -in this reading represents a new type of noun: masculine n~un~ With
pucchati qUestions, asks stems ending in -i, with f01ms as follows. They will be listed in th~ glossanes m the
badarapaJJQUQl light yellow (fresh) Jujube fruit nominatiye singular, but with the notatiOn "masculine" to distingmsh them,from the
bandhanam bond, fetter, stalk feminine -i stems (1,23) :
,maha great, big ( <mahant)
muhuttarp (for an) instant. moment EXAMPLE : aggt. 'fIre '
medhavin wise, wise one Plural
Singular
. yafliio sacrifice, almsgiving
yattha wherever · Nom: aggi aggl I aggayo
.

yattha kamanjpatin that wQich falls/clings wherever it wishes ·Ace: aggiiJI

yava(m) to the extent of, as far as
y:avajivarp. 6en: agglnart~ I aggin&IJI .

as long as one lives aggi SS8 I aggi no

yavaiicidam <ya:Vain + ca + idaQ1) that is, namely, Oat: . I.
as far as, in so far as (cf. yadidam) lnst:
yilpo a sacrificial post agginii aggimha 1-sma oggibhl I ogglhi ·
nxfuti weeps, laments, cries
Rbl:
lahu _ lightly, light . Loc: aggi mhi I aggi smi 1J1 aggisu I agglsu
Vacchagotta name of a Brahmin referred to by- his Doc: oggi .
oggl l oggoyo
surname ,'of Vaccha lineage'
vacchataro a weaned calf, a bullock
-tart a weaned female calf, a heifer 2. THIRD PERSON IMPERAl1VE
VaJ)IJ.O color, cOmplexion 2.1 The second person imperative was given in ill, 5. Pali aJso has third person
vippasaooa tranquil, calm, purified, clean, bright, happy, imperatives, with- the following endings:
pure, sinless
Venagapura a city na~e .
Plural
Singular '

.i i
Venagapurika
satarp
of Venagapura
3 Pers. tu -ntu
a hundred (see VI, 12)
sBbbena sabbarp completely, altogether
sameti · corresponds, agrees bhavatu
sampati Thus:
,, now, right now, just now hotu '(May) he/it bel'
:i' sadhu good bhavantu
atthu
i s3rada autumnal, fresh hontu ·(May) they be!'
i'l saveti announces, tells, declares santu
sukhavaha bringing happiness labhatu '(May) he/ it obtain!'
sududdasa ' exceedingly difficult to see/grasp ·(May) they obtain!'
labhantu
sunipuQ.a very subtle
siipa soup, broth, cu~ 2.2 1n p~m. third person forms are commonly used i~ direct address to ~xpress
I, seyyatha jusi as, just like, as if ·great respect. In that case, the third ,person imperative L'5 also used rather than the
second person:
desetu bhante· bhagava dhammam
'Sir·, let the Blessed One (i.e., 'you') preach the Dhamma.'
i

113
112
 ll:SSON VIIJ

.Other forms are ·(next page):

etu kho bhante Bhagava 'Please come, sir, 0 Blessed One.·
lnfmitive: .vatturp.
It may also be used to expre~s a wish. Gerund: vatva(na)·
'i'
Past participle: vutta
''I.. 1
suvatthi hotu 'May there be happiness.· Present participle: vuccamana
Future passive participle: vattabba

I~
3. LOCATNE ABSOLUTE
An absolute construction expresses an action which is prior to or 4.2 There is also a verb vuccati (or vuccate) 'is said' which we have met
simultaneous with that of the main verb, but which has a different subject (unlike earlier, made from the same stem, but with a passive sense.
the genmd or present participle.) In PaiL one absolute construction is formed by
using a pr~sent or past participle in the locative case. If the subject is expressed it 5. ADDRF.'>S FORM bhavant
will also be in the locative, but objects, instruments, etc., will be in their usual bhoto is the Genitive-Dative form of a noun bhavant 'Venerable' used as a
i
cases. The past participle expresses a prior action and the present participle polite form. of address. The vocative address form bhante with which we are
. '
:I
e_xpresses a simultaneous one: familiar is actqally a re_lated form, and appears to. have been borrowed from a
''
I i different dialect. Originally, ,these were from the present participle of the verb
evarp sante 'Thclt being so ... · bhavati 'is, becomes .. hence literally 'the existing one, being' but were specialized in
purise agacchante 'When the man was coming. this usage. All of the.case forms of bhavant do not occur, hut those which may be
evarp vutte 'That having been said ... encountered are as follows:
parnubbute Bhagavati .

'When the Blessed one had achieved final liberation ... :

Singular Plural
Note that" the word ord,er is variable, w that the subject need not precede Nom: bhavarp bhavanto I bhonto
the participle. as in the last eXample. nee: bhavantarp bhavante
The past participle santa of as- has a locative form sante, as in t.lte first
example, used usually in impersonal ('there is/are') constructions like that one. It 6en:
bhoto bhavatarp
also has an alternate locative form sati, used in the same way: oat:
lnst: bhota bhavantehi
tal)ha:ya sati 'There being craying ...
Uoe: bhaYarp, bho bhonto
4. FORM~ of vac- 'SAY, SPEAK'
4.1. As stated "in VI,S, The root Vac- 'speak, say· vei'b · 'spe"aks', does not 6. ENDINGS ON -e VERBS: nivesaye
have present tense forms in actual use in P~ili. but has been replaced in that tense As we saw in Lesson III, many Pall verbs have present stems ending in -e,
by vadati. though it may be cited using the artificial forms vatti or vacati. It does such as nivfseti 'establishes, settles". When affixes are added to this stem. the -e
have forms in other tenses, however. of the stem may appear as -ay-. Thus nivesaye in this reading. Similarly, one may
encounter cintayati as well as cinteti 'he/she thinks'; plljayati instead of .pujeti
The past forms of vac- (vatti vacati) are· ·makes offerings'; nayati instead of neti 'leads',etc. In general, the -e- forms are
Singular Plural found more in 'later texts, the -aya ones in earlier. (This is because most of these
·verbs derive from Sanskrit verbs in -aya-, which generally became -e- in p-ali).
I Pers_ avacarp, avocarp avacumhaj aYOCUmha
7. USE OF CASES
2 Pers. aYaca, avoca, av.aciisi 7.1 The instrumental is sometimes used to form time adverbs:
avacuttha,ayocuttha
tena samayena 'at that ,time'
3 Pors. avoca .. avoca .. avac8si
.•

aYaCUIJI, -aYOCUIJI 7.2 vatti /vacati ·speaks' takes the hearer in the accusative:
. Bhagavantaiil avoca 'he said to the Blessed one'

114 115

',,
;I,

,1,1
1:1;
 lfliSON V1U LESSON V1II

8. attho "Puna ca pararp, Siha. cJHyakassa danapatino kalyal)o kittisad<.lo

attho use. meanmg, purpose may he used in the dative case to serve as
the secon.d member of a compoune:l with the sense for the 'sake/purpose of'. The
first member. as usual, will appear in the stem form:
yaflfiatthaya ( yaflfl.a + atthiiya) 'for the sacrifice'
9. kama
kama ·desiring· is used with a preceding infinitive in the sense ·desiring to
carry out the action (Of the infinitive)'. The infinitive loses the final -ql, and
kiimo declines as an -o or -a· (femJ noun.
ahaQl Bhagavantarn dassanaya gantukamo
(:gantuQl + kama Masc. Sg.)
'I am desirous of going to see the Blessed One.' (Man speaking)
ahaQl Bhagavantarn· dass:ana:ya gantukama
'i'
(<gantuQl + kama Fern. Sg. )
·ram desirous of going to see the Blessed Of\e.' (Woman speaking)
ahbhuggacchati. Yarp .Pi.· Siha, c.Jayakassa danapatino kaly3IJO kittisaddo
abbhuggacchati.idam pi sanditthikaQ1 diinaphalaqt.
"Puna ca paraQ1. Siha, ctayako diinapati yarn yad~v~ parisam.. up~sarpkamat~
- yadi khattiyaparisarp yadi hrahmat)aparisarp yadt gahap~ttpa_nsaQ1 _ yad1
samat)aparisarp - visarado upasarp.kamati amarpkubhuto. Yarp p~. S1ha. day~ko
ctanapati yarp yadevaparisarp upasarpkamati ... visiirac.Jo upasarpkamatl amarn~ubhuto,
idarp pi sanditthikarp danaphalarp ...
"Puna ca pararp. Siha. dayako diinapati
kByassa bheda pararp marat)a sugatiQ1 saggaQl Iokam upapajjati. Yarp pi. ~h~.
diiyako da:napati k3yassa hheda pararp. maraiJH sugatirp saggarp lokarp upapanatt,
idarp samparllyikarp danaphalam" ti. (-A.N.)
2 EkaQl samayaQ1 Bhagava VesBiiyarp viharati Mahavane KUtagarasaiayarp.
Atha kho Mahali Licchavi yena Bhagava ten'upasarpkami; upasamkamitva
Bhagavantarp abhiviidetva eka~antarp nisidi. Ekamantarp nisinno kho Mahiili
Licchavi Bhagavanta.rn etadavoca:

Kl. SANDHI "Ko nu kho. bhante, hetu. ko paccayo p8passa kammassa kiriy§ya, p8pa~sa
I' 10.1 A word-final a or a may he dropped when the following word hegins with a kammassa pavattiylf' ti?
vowel. The following vowel may then be lengthened:
thilt)a + upanlta thiil).'fipanita "Lobho kho. MahBli. hetu. lobho paccayo papassa kammassa kir!_Yaya,
papassa kammassa pavattiya. Doso ~ho. Mahali. hetu, doso p~c.cayo papassa
10.2 A final -a plus a following a- may be reduced to -a-: kammassa kiriyaya papassa kammassa pavattiya .. Moho kho, Mahah, hetu, m~)h~
maha + anisamsam mah3nisamsam parcayo pHpassa kammassa kiriyiiya, piipassa kammassa pav~tnya.
Ayonisomanasikiiro kho. Mah3li, hetu, ayonisomanisikaro. _raccayo papa~s.a
LESSON VTII - FURTHER READINGS kammassa kiriyiiya, piipassa kammassa pavattiyil. Micchapai)lhtta£?. ~O; ~ahalt,
cittam hetu, micch8paQ.ihitarp. cittarn paccayo papassa kammassa _k1nyaya .papassa
I. Ekarn samayam Bhagava Vesaliyarp viharati Mahavane Klltaga:ra.sa:Iayaql. kam~assa pavattiya ti. Ayarp kho, Mah8li, hetu, ayarp paccayo papassa kammassa
Atha kho Siho senapati yena Bhagava ten·upasamkami; upasarpkamitva kiriyaya papassa kammassa pavattiya" ti. (-AN.)
Bhagavantarp ahhiviidetva·'ekamantaQl nisidi. Ekamantarp. nisinno kho Siho sena:pat.i
Bhagavantarp etadavoca - "Sakka nu kho, · hhante, Bhagava sanditthikarp 3. akkodhano'nupaniihi - amayo rittapesuno
ctanaphalaQl pahi'!'iipeturn" ti? sa ve tiidisako bhikkhu - evarp. pecca na socati.
akkodh~mo·nupan8h1 - amiiyo rittapesuno
"Sakka Sibil" ti Bli.agava avoca - "dayako Siha. diinapati hahuno janassa piyo . guttadvaro sada bhikkhu - evarp pecca na socati.
hoti manapo . .Yarp pi Siha, diiyako danapati bahuno janassa piyo ho~i maniipo, idarp
pi sanditthikaQl danaphalarp. akkodhano'nupan8hi- amayo rittapesuno
kaly3t)asilo so bhikkhu- evarp'pecca na socati.
"Puna ca. pararp, Siha, dayakaQl danapatirp santo sappurisa bhajanti. YaQl pi, akkodhano'nupanahi - amayo rittapesuno
Siha, <.layakarp dBnapatirp santo sappurisa bhajanti, idarp pi sanditthikarp kaly8t)arniito So bhikkhu ·- evarjt pecca na so.cati.
danaphalaqt
akkodhano'nupana:hi - amayo rittapesuno
kalyanapafffio so hhikkhu - evarp pecca na socati.
. !ThGl
•• 1

116 117
 LES..'iONVID
LESSON VJIT

4. Raja aha: "Bhante Nagasena, yo idha klilakato brahm~loke uppajjeyya yo ca

idha k8lakato Kasmire uJ)pajjeyya, ko ciratararp ko sighataranti?"
GLOSSARY:

Samakarp maharajfi"ti. akkhodano without anger, without ill wi!l

anupaniihin one without ill-will (-in stem, see VI, 2)
"Opammarp karohi"ti. abbhuggacchati ,go forth, go out, rise into
~maya non-de~eitful
"Kuhirp pana maharaja tava 1 jatanagaran"ti?
akaso(aql) outer space, sky
"Atthi bhante Kalasigamo nama, tatthfih3rp ji:lto"ti. aramo park, resort for pastime, a private park
given to the Buddha or the Sangha
"IGva dUro. maharaja ito Kalasigiimo hOti"ti. ingha par1icle of exhortation:'come on, go on,
look here, go ahead,'
"Dumattani bhante yojanasatani"ti. ito from here, hence
"IGva di1raip maharaja ito Ka~mirarp hoti"ti?
ucca tall, high, lofty
upapajjati/ uppajjati be bmn
"Ova:dasa bhante yojananrti. kamQa making, causing, producing
I i
X karal)a making X
"Ingha tvarp maharaja KalasigamaiJl cintehi"ti. Kalasigamo place name
kalyaQaslla of good conduct
"Cintito bhante"ti.
kalyapamitto good friend, good companion
"'lngha tvaQl maharaja Kasmirarp cintehi"ti. Kasm.Irarp place name: Kashmir
kalakata dead
"Cintitam bhante"ti. kitti fame, renown, glory
kitti,.ddo sound of fame. praise, renown
"Katamannu kho maharaja cireila cintitarp katamarp sighataran"'ti? kiriya doing, action
kiva· how much, how many, how great
"Samakarp bhante:'ti.
kuhim where
"Evameva kho maharaja yo idha k8lakato brahmaloke uppajjeyya yo ca. idha kilt8g3rasa:Ia gabled house, pavilion
kalakato Kasmire uppajjeyya samakaQl yeva uppajjanti"ti. khattiya of the WBITior (K:mtliya) caste
gahapati householder
"Bhiyyo opammaq1 karohi"ti. guttadviira · with guarde~<;enses
(literally, 'guarded door or entrance')
"Tarp kiQl mafJ.iiasi maharaja: dve sakuQ8 akasena gaccheyyurp, tesu eko cinteti thinks (of)
I
ucce rukkhe' nisideyya eko nice rukkhe nisideyya, t~sarp samakarp patitthit3narp ciratararp rather long, longer. delayed
I
katamassa chaya pathamataraQl pathaviyarp patitthaheyya, katamassa chaya cirena cirena after a long time
'il pa!haviyarp patit!haheyya"ti? chaya shadow. (light) image
I,:
jilta bOITI
I l! "Samakarp bhante"ti.
tattha there
:J. "Evameva kho maharaja yo idha klilakato brahmaloke uppajjeyya yo ca idha tiidisaka of such a quality /nature
kalakato Kasmire uppajjeyya samakarp yeva uppajj~nti"ti. danapati a liberal donor .
,.il
.,.,·,·
"Kallo'si bhante Nagasenfi"ti.
dayako giver, (lay) donor
i i du- , two· (compounding stem)
!''i (-M.P.l dUra fm·
I
dva:dasa twelve
niv3seti ·, dress oneself
!Genitive of tvam. --see Grammar V.I. nica low

118 119

·•. 'I' ..
. ' II$SON VIU
i. I
'' paggaQhilti stretches forth, holds out/up, takes up.
makes ready LESSON IX
I pace ayo reason, ground. cause. motive, means
I> comlition · l. EkaiP- samayaJP- Bhagava Bhoganagare viharati Anandacetiye. Tatra kho
Bhagava hhikkhii amantesi - "bhikkhavo" ti.
X-paccaya having X as paccayo
pannapeti· indicat~~-· -points-out, makes known, declares
pathamatararp as early as possible, (very) first "!3ha<lante" ti te ~hikkhu Bhagavato pticcassosurp.
pathavl em1h ·
pal)idahali . Bhagava etadavoca -. "cattaro'me, bhikkhave, mah8pa<.Jese <.Jesessami, taiP- sul)Btha,
puts fonh. lqngs for. applies, tlii·ects. •
ppL paQihita sadhukarp manasikarotha; bhasissamr ti.
pavatti manifestation. wielding,. executioh.'happening
puna ca param "Evarp.~ bhante" ti kho te bhikkhO Bhagavato paccassosuq1.
moreover. furthermore
:I
brahmaloko · Brahma-world
II bhiyyo further. more Bhagava etadavoca: .
maQJkubhilta ··Katame, bhikkhave, cattaro mahilpadesa'l ldha. bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaiJl
discontented, troubled, confusetl
matta about, only · ·
vadeyya - 'Sammukha m'etarp., avuso, Bhagavato. sutarp. sammukha patiggahitatp. -
manapa ayatp. dhamril.o, ayam vinayo, idam satthusasanarp' ti. Tassa. bhikkhave. bhikkhuno
agreeable, pleasing. pleasant
Mahlili . bhasitarp. n'eva abhinanditabbarp nappatikkositabbatp.. Anabhinanditva
a name of a person
mahavana appatikkositva tani padabyafljartiini sadhukam uggahetva sutte otaretabbani, vinaye
a name of a park
yarp yadeva sandassetabbani. Tiini ce sutte otariyamanani vinaye sandassiyamanani na c'eva,
whichever
yonisomanasikam stitte otaranti na vinaye sandissanti, nitthamettha I g'imtabbarp: 'Addha, idam na
proper attention, cmTect reflection eva tassa Bhagavato vacanarp Arahato Samma:samhuddhassa .. .' iti h"etmp,
rittapesuna free from slander'
bhikkhave. cha<)<)eyyatha:·
(< Jitta 'devoid of,_ having relinquished'
+ pesuna(rp) 'slander~')
rukkho
"Idha pana, bhi.kkhave, bhikkhu evam vadeyya - 'sammukha m'etaqi., avuso,
tree Bhagavato sutarp, sammukha patiggahitatp. - ayarp dhammo, ayatp. vinayo, idarp
Licchavi a dan name
visarado satthusasanarp' ti. Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhHsitaQl n'eva abhinanditabbam
self-possessed, confident.' wise, nappatikkositabbatp.. AnabhinanditvH appatikkositva tiini padabyafljanani sadbukarp
· knowing how to cOnduct oneself uggahetva sutte otiiretabbani, vinaye sanda:ssetabbani. Tiini ce sutte otariyamanani
Vesali a place name
sakuoo vinaye sandassiyama:nani s_utte c'eva otaranti vinaye ca sandissanti, nitthamettha
bird gantabbain: 'Addha, idam tassa BhagaVBto vacanarp Arahato Sammasambuddhassa.
sant good ,-person. true person
samakarp .. \ti. lda.P. bhikkhave, pathamaiJl mahllpadesaiJl dhareyyatha:· <cA.N.l
equally, at the same tinle
samparayika belonging to the next world
sighataram faster, sooner
Siho
2. "Ahatp. kho, bhikkhave, ek8sanabhojanarp bhufljami: ekasanabhojanarp kho
a proper name , aharp bhikkhave, bhufljamano appabadhataQl ca safljBnillni, app8tarpkatarp ca
sugati happiness, bliss, happy fate, happy state, ' lahu!!hllnaiJl ca balaiJl ca phasuviharaiJl ca: Etha tumhepi bhikkhave,
a realm. of bliss ekasanabhojanam bht,Jfljatha; · ekasanabhojanarp. kho bhikkhave, tumbe'pi
senapati a general
hetu
bhufljamana appabadhatarp. .ca saflj8nissatha app8tarpkataQ1 ca lahutthanaQ1 ca
basis, cause balaiJl ca phasuviharandr ti. <M.N.l

3. Paparp. ce puriso kayira- na tarp. kayir~ punappunarp

na tamhi chandarp. kayifatha 2 -- dukkho papassa uccayo.
· Puili':larp. ce puriso kayira - kayiriith'etBQ1 punappunarit

I nhtham+ettha
2 -thD here is third person. This ending wi11 be given in a later lesson.
120
 LFSSON IX
LFSSON IX
tamhi chandaq1. kayira:tha - sukho pufiii.assa uccayo. chandalfl desire,· delight
Papa 'pi 3 passati bhadrarp- ya:va paparp na paccatt.. taira there
yada ca paccati p8parp -atha p8po papani passati. deseti preaches, declares
Bhadro'pi passati pHparp. - yava bhadrarp na paccati; nittharp gacchati conclude, anive at a conclusion
yada ca paccati bhadrarp - atha bhadro bhadrani passati. paccati ripens
PaQimhi ·ce val)o nassa - hareyya pa:l)ina visarp; paccassosurp. Third Plural Past of paps.<;UI).8ti
rllibbal)ailJ- 4 visamanveti - n'atthi pa:parv. akubbato. (see this grammar 2..'3)
OabbhaQl eke uppajjanti- nirayaQl pa:pakammino patikkosati blames, rejects
saggarp sugatino yanti - parirtibbanti anasava:. patiggahita Past ppl. of patigaQ.h3ti, 'receive, accept'
(Dhp.) padaiJl word, (in addition to 'place, foot' etc.
given ·in Lesson IV)
GLOSSARY: parinipbati passes away without rebirth , is emancipated
plll)i (ljl) hand
akubbant . non-doer pllpo evildoer
addhll certainly, verily phasuvih8ro comfort, ease
anasavo one free from the four asavas: i.e., byafljanarp syllable, consonant, sign, mark
ka:masava, sensuality, bhadante 'sir, sire' a forin of address generally used
I 11• .I. bhavasava, craving for rebi11h, in addressing the Buddha (by- monks)
ditthiisava, speculation, bhadram go{xJ
.,
•jj
avijjiisava, ignorance bhadro good one, (doer of good)
anveti enters, follows Bhoganagararp the· city of Bhoga
apadeso reason, cause, argument, statement manasikaroti reflects upon, considers w~ll, hears in mind;
aPPiitmpkatll freedom from illness recognizes
appablldhatll good health mahllpadeso maha + apadeso .5
ahbana .. a+ vaQa- yiiti goes, proceeds, goes oh
abhiliandati rejoices (over), approves of, delights in yava until, as long as, up to
Anandac.etiyarp monastery n~med Ananda lahutthllnaiJl lightness of body, bodily vigor, good health
amantesi addressed {past of amanteti 'calls. vacanaiJl utterance, word, saying, speech, remark
addresses') V3Q.O wound
avuso friend, brother, sir {a form of pOlite vadati says, speaks ·
address) vinayo discipline, code of ethics, monastic
uggaheti learnS discipline, principles of good llehavior6
· ucc.ayo heaping up, accumulation visarp . poison
- ekiisanabhojanarp taking only a single meal (solid food) a day sai'IjBnati knows, recognizes, is aware of
(adverbial accusative) , · satthu genitive of satthar 'teacher; the Buddha'
otarati descends, enters into (see this grammar I. I)
otariyati is caused to descend {see this grammar 4)· sandassiyam8na · that which is compared with
otariyamana that which is caused to be brought down sandasseti compares with, shows (against)
<see this graminar 5) sandissati tallies with, agrees with
otareti causes to descend, brings down, .lowers sammukha face to face, in .p.resence
kammin one who acts, doer sadhukaljl well (adverb)
kayira optative of karoti (see this grammar 7)
cha(lc,lheti gives up, discards
5 This has also been interpreted as mahii + padeso 'province, part, area. location.'
'3 From api 'even'. 6 The term vinaYo refers to a large collection of rules governing the monastic life of the
4 na+a+vaqa hhikkhus, as against the term dhammo, referring to the theoretical and philosophical
part of the Pali canon.
122 123
 Lf.SSON !?(
LES.."iON IX
1.2 The -ar stem nouns have a stem form in -u ( Satthu, pitu) which occurs in
.sfi.sanaTfl teaching, message, order
compounds. Thus:
sugatin righteous one
-satthusasamnp 'the teaching of the Master'.
suttarp. discursive part of Buddhist sciiptures
(Sanskrit sUtra) pitusantakaiiJ 'father's possession'
harati take away, remove
1.3 The -ar nouns given above are masculine. There are also felllilline
GRAMMAR IX relationship nouns like matar 'mother' which inflect similarly:
L -ar NOUNS EXAMPLE· matar 'mother'
l.l A new type of noun, -ar nouns, occurs in this. lesson. They will he liSted with
-ar in the glossarieS. There are two subtypes: 0.) Nouns formed with a suffix Singular. Plural .

-tar, and (2.) "Relationship nouns (a small set.) They have forms as follows: Nom: miit8
miitoro
Lll Agent Nouns: nee: motor8rp
.I EXAMPLE·..satthar 'teacher the Buddha'
Gen:
'
Singular Plural miitu I miituyii mii tilnorp
I Oat: .·
Nom: sottho
sotthi'iro lsotthore lnst: miitilhi
nee: sotthi'i rorp ( -orort~) miitorii I miituyii
nb.l:
' 6en: sotthu( -sso)l . sotthilnom I sotthi'iri'inorpl
I,,,~
! !
Dot: sotthuno sotthi'inorp Loe: m8toril motuyii(-yorp) matusu
'
Uoc: mo to I rna tii miitoro
lnst: I sotthuno sntthn rehi( -ebhi)l
. i nbl: sotthi'iro I sntthnrn sotthiihi 2. PAST TENSE
Loe: sotthori sotthilsu ./ sotthiiresu 2.1 The assosi T)rpe ·Past Tense: ("the -s- Aorist")
. L., Uoc: sotthilsottholsotthe sotthoro Two forms of the past tense were given in VI, 7. Another form
!.],ij: appears in this lesson. It _is formed hy adding the following suffixes (as with the
r
t.l2 Relationship Nouns: other types an augment a- may sometimes be prefixed)·
EXAMPLE· pitar 'father' Slngul8r Plural
Singular Plural -(i)mho (-simho)
I Pers: -Sir{~
Nom: pill!
pitoro 2 Pers: -(i)ttho (-sittho)
nee: pitororp I piturt~ pi tore -si
3 Pers: SU'tl I mrt~su
Gen: pitunnorp ( -il norp)
pitu I pituno I pitusso pitori norp I pi ti norp
Oat:
Note that_ the first, second and third person singular forms are like
lnst: pit uno pituhi (-ilbhi) I those of the upasaQlkami t)rpe (VI, 7.2) with a preceding -s-. So are the alternate
pitorii pitorehi ( -ebhi)
nbl: first and second plural forms, but-they are rare. One third person form is like
pitnri pitusu I pitoresu that of the addasa type (Vl, 7.1) with a preceding -s-. The other plural forms are
Loc:
like the upasaqtkami type.
Uoc: pita I plto pit oro
.
The verb root may undergo changes to f{)rm a past stem to go with
Note that the two subtypes are almost alike. The impmiantdifferences are: these endings. Thus, for su_- 'hear' (pres. SUIJHti) and kar- 'do' (pres. karoti),
t) The relatiom;hip nouns have -ar- 'Yherever the agent nouns_ have either we have (note the augffient_s) (forms on next page):
-ar- or -ar-.
2) · The Dative Plural is usually1 -unnmp for the relationship nouns but
-iinaiJl for the agent nouns.

124 125
!·:
 LESSON IX
U:SSON IX 2.3 The Past of patissuQ.iiti: The verb patissuoati 'promises, assents, agrees' has a
past·ten:Se of the assosi type, but a very irregular past stem paccasso-. Hence
su - 'hear' paccassosi 'he/you agreed', etc.
'
Singular Plural It also has an alternate past stem patisun- which takes the upasarpkami type
I Pers: IISSOSirtJ as sumba endings: papsul)i 'he/you agreed', etc. ·

2 Pers: assuttha The gerund is papssul)itva or patissutva.

assosi
3 Pers: IISSOSUrtJ
3. FlTfURE TENSE
kar- 'do' 3.1 The future tense in Pall is formed by adding -(i)ss- followed by the present
tense endings .. to the present stem. Hence, for bhavati 'be':
Singular Plural
I Pers: okiisirt~ akamho
Singular Plural
2 Pers: akottho
okiisi I Pers: bhovissomi bhovi ss11 mo
3 Pers: OkOSUrtJ, OkOrtJSU bhovissotho
2 Pers: bhovlssosi
:"1 Pers: bhovissoti bhovi ssonti
Note t_hat the stem-final vowels "shorten~· (i.i becomes a, o becomes u)
before the endings without -s-. Sometimes the stem used may differ from the present stem, or there may
Verbs with.present tense stems in -e-, whether causative or not, be alternate forms. Hence:
commonly take this type of past tense, and form it from the present stem. With gacchati 'goes' has gamissati along with gacchissati
these, e > ay before the endil)gs without -s-, and the linking vowel-i- appears: sul)8"ti 'hears' has sossati along with suW,Ssati
3.2 The future tense may be used to indicate probability or a general truth as
deseti 'preaches. ' tells' well as indicating future time.
Singular Plural 4. PASSIVE VERBS
I Pen: desesirtJ desliyimho (desesimho) There are are some verbs in P~ili that have a passive· sense. That is, the
subject of the verb 'is that which is effected or brought about. Thus vuccati 'is
2 Pers: desoyittho (desesittho) said', diissiyati 'is seen' etc. Such passive verbs are commonly related to transitive
desesi
'I "'Pers: desesurtJ/desoyi rtJ su verbS. Often, the pasSive verb will be foi:med by addillg -iya- or -iya- to the
I
present stem of the tranSitive verb, which may undergo further changes of form.
Hence deti 'gives', diyati 'is given'; pUjeti 'worships', pUjiyati · is worshipped',
2.2 The Past of gacchati: karoti 'does' kariyati or kariyati 'is done' etC. Sometimes. the passive verb has a
The verb !f<J:Cchati goes may appear with past tense forms of the double consonant while the related transitive verb has a single one or a consonant
.I upasarpkami type (compare VI, 7.1) Thus: · cluster: thus hanati 'kills', hai\i\ati 'is killed'; bhindati breaks' bhijjati 'is broken;
pacati 'cooks', ·paccati 'is cooked', etc. (these double consonants occurred because
_Singular Plural· some passives were formed earlier by adding -y-, which doubled the prfx:eding·
consonant, sometimes changing it, a·nd disappeared.) In any case, in Pall these
I Pers: ogomisortJ, ogomirtJ ogomimho pairings must be !earned a-5 they occur, since the relationship may be more or
I •
I •
2 Pers: ogomit trio .
less transparent due to the changes .that have taken place.
1. ogomi
:"1 Pers: .
ogomi!;u~t~. ogomirtJSU

127
126

,.
·I':'
i,l
 LESSON IX
/,ESSON IX
··vathllkatharp pana bhante ariyassa vinaye chaddisa namassitabba? Sadhu
5. PRESENT PARTICIPLE.~ OF PASSNE VERBS IN mana
me bhante Bhagava tathii dhammarp. desetu yatha ariyassa vinaye chaddisa
The passive verbs described in 4 above i>ften occur with the -mana
part~ciple_ ([V,,4) : Thus piijiyamana 'being WOrshipped' vuccamana ·'being spoken', namassitabbiiti."
dasstyamana bemg seen', kayirama:na 'being done' etc. Sirililarly desiyamana 'Tena hi gahapatiputta suQohi sadhukarp. manasikarohi, bhasissamr ti.
'being-preached'.' related to deseti 'preaches'.
6. yati 'GOES' "EvaJp bhante" ti kho _Sigalo gahapatiputto Bhagavato paccassosi.
yati 'goes, goes on, proceeds' has the following forms iJ;I the present
tense· Bhagava etadavoca: ·"Yato kho, gahapatiputta. ar'iyasavakassa cattaro
kammakilesa pahina honti, catOhi thHnehi pap8kammam· na karoti. cha: ca
Singular Plural hhogijnaiP apaya~ukhiini na sevati, so evarp cuddas'a Papak8.pagato, chaddisa
yemi paticchlldi, ubhaya lokavijayaya ·patipanno hoti, tassa ayaQl c'eva Ioko araddho
1 Pers: yima
hoti para ca loko. So kiiyassa bhedll parammaral).ll sugcitirp saggaqt lokaip.
2 Pers: yasi yo tho upapajjati.
<-D.NJ
:! Pers: yoti yonti
...e ..
Other fonns at 2. Atha kho bhikkhave Vipassissa Bhagavato arahato Sarnmasambuddhassa
Present participle: yanti etadahosi: "Yannunaharp dhammaQl deseyyan"ti. Atha kho hhikkbave Vipassissa
Infinitive: yatul!l I (yatave) Bhagavato arahato Sammasambuddhassa etadahosi: "adhigato me ayarp. dhammo
Past Participle: yata gambhiro duddaso duranubodho santo paiJito atakkavacaro nipuQo.
7. kayira pai)c;Jitavedaniyo. Alayara:ma: kho panayarp paja atayarata a:Jayasamudita.
kayira and kayirHtha are ·-ya optatives of karoti (See vn, 1).
AJayaramaya kho pana pajaya ·alayarataya. alayasamudit8ya duddasarp idarp
thiinarp yadidarp "i<;lapp<iccayata..,.paticcasamuppado. ldampi kho thllnaqJ._ duddasarp
yadidarp sabbasamkh8rasamatho sabbllpadhipatinissaggo tal).hakkhayo virago
FURTHER READINGS IX
nirodho nibbiil)arp.. Ahaflc'eva kho pana dhammarp.. deseyyarp., pare ca me na
I. Evarp. me slitarp.. Ekarp. sarnayarp. Bhagava Rajagahe v1haratr Ve!uvane ·ajaneyyum, so mam'assa kilamatho,.sa mam'assa vihesa" ti.
(-D.N.)
Kc,dandakanivape. Tena kho pana sarnayena S1galako gahapatiputto ka:Iass'eva
vutthaya Ra:jagaha ni~amitva allavattho. allakeso pafljaliko puthudisa namassati: 3. Ko imarn pathavirp vijessati
puratthimarp. disarp. dakkhiQ.arp. diSaQl. pacchimam disarp uttararp ·disarn hettimam yamalokaflca imarp. sadevakarp
dL~arp upalimarp disarp. - ·· · ko -dhammapadarp. sudesitarp
__ Atha _. kh_? Bh~g~:'a pubb~Qhasamayarp hivasetva pattaclvaratnadaya ku.salo pupphamiva pacessati?
Ra)agaharp. PIIJc;Jaya paVIsi. Addasa kho Bhagava: SigHlakarp. gahapatiputtam Sekho· pathavilp vijesSati
kalass'e_v~ utthilya Rajagaha nikkhamitva allavattharp allakesarp. pahjalfka~ yamalokaO.ca imam sadevakarp.
puthud1sa namassantarp.: · puratthimarp disarp. dakkhiQ.arp. disarp pacchimam disam sekho dhammapadarp.. sudesitaql
uttararp. dis~~ hetthimaQl disaQl uparimarp. disaqt. Disva Sig"alakarp.. gahapaiipuitarP kusalo pupphamiva pacessati.
e~davoca. kinnu tvarp.., gahapatiputta, ·ka:Iass'eva vutthilya Rajagaha nikkhamitva
PheQ.Upainarp kayaffiimmp. viditva
allavattho allakeso paflji:tli~o puthudisa namassasi: puratthimaQl disam dakkhinam
maricidhammarp abhisambudhiino
disarp pacchimarp disaQl uttararp.. disarp hetthimarp. disarp upalimarp.. di;anti?" · ·
chetvana marassa papupphakHni
"Pita marp. bhante kalarp. karonto evarp. avaca:'disa tata namasseyyasrtL" adassanarp. rriaccurajassa gacche.
S~ kh~ aharp b~ante- pitu v;acanarp.. sakkaronto gatilkaronto manento piijento Yo balo maiiliati bl.llyarp.
kalasse va ·vutthaya Rajaga_ha. nikkhamitva allavattho allakeso pafljaliko puthudisa pa!J4ito'v8pi 7 tena so
namassHmi: puratthimarp.. disarp-pe-upaiimarp disanti." balo ca pal).c;litamllni
sa ve bHlo'ti vuccati. <-Dhp.)
"Na kho gahapatiputta ariyassa vinaye evarp. chaddisa namassitabbiiti."

7 pag.<jito + eva + api

129
128
 LF...'i_•.;oN IX
i LESSON IX
gahapatipu tto
1

a man of the middle class, a nobleman,

i, a householder
i
cuddasa fourteen
I GLOSSARY:
cha six
atakkavac~ra chaddisa the six directions
beyond logic (or sophistry), beyond the
I ' sphere, of thought, profound
(North, South,' East, West, Up, Down)
adass~ma chindati cuts, severs
non-seeing, away from sight
addasa- Chetvana having cut off, having severed
',,r 3sg. past of passati (see VI, 6.1)
thiinarp fact, principle, conclusion
,, adhigafu
apagata
_realized, understood, highly realized tal)ha craving
: i be away from, desist from
ap~yamukhatp_ tato father, child dear one (an endearing terrri
' cause of ruin
abhisambudhano of address used irrespective of the age
' one who uhderstands
i' ariyassa vinaye in the prinCiples of behavior taught by
of the addressee; normally in the
vocative- singular as Uita)
the noble on~s; normally this refers to
I:·i'
disa direction
the way of life of the noble ones. duddasa difficult to see, incomprehensible_'(by
' (cf. vinayo in the main reading of this
lesson) the ordinary person)
alia duranubodha difficult to be understood
i·i w:et
I
avaca deseti preaches, declares
' said
a&<;a dhammapada:rp word of righteousness
3sg. optative of atthi
ahosi namassati salutes, venerates, honors, pays
was, occurred- (past of hoti)
etadahosi such a thought occurred to <lne homage to
actaya nikkhamati sets forth;. comes out of
I a;anati
having taken
nipul)a efficient, subtle, abstruse, clever,
grasp, understand
araddha skillful, accomplished
begun, wen begun, (well) undertaken nibbill)arp
alayarata lustful, delighting in desire emancipation
alayarama nirodho cessation
clinging to lust
alayasamudita nivaseti dresses oneself; puts on clothes ·(robes)
arisen from desire, craving
idappaccayata pacessati future 3 sg. of pacinati 'gathers'
having its foundation in this, causally
paccassosi assents, agrees (3 Sg. past of pa(i(s)sunati)
connected
upama like, similar pacchima west, western
X-upama paja people, progehy, offspring
like X, similar to X
uparima paiijalika with folded hands
upper, Jibove, overhead
ubhaya hoth pa_ticcasamuppado arising on the-grounds of a preCeding
kammakileso depravity of.action, bad works cause, dependent origination
kalandakanivapa a place name (literally, 'squirrel feed') (theory of the twelve causeS)
kayassa bheda parammara_l)a after complete death (literally, after the paticchadin covering, enveloping
patioissaggo renunciation, giving up, rejection, forsaking
breaking up of the body and after death)
ki.'ilam karop pap parma stepped on to, entering on
passes away, dies
kaio time, morning pa(llta exalted, excellent
ki.'ilaSsa eva in early morning paQc;litamaniil one who thinks himself wise
kilamatho pal)c;litavedaniya to be understood by the wise
fatigUe, exhaustion
I kusalo skilled one pattacivararp boWl and robe
keso papupphakam flowery arrowS, flower-tipped arrows
I! khayo
hair (normally in the plural, kesa)
cessation (Of sensual passion)
garukaroti respects, considers seriously paro other, next
:;!
' 130 131
I

;:
:,11
I I
:1,1
LESSON EX
pavisati enters
pahina calmed, given up
(past participle of pajahati) LESSON X
papakarp bad action
I. EkasmiiJl samaye sattha gaJ)aiJl pahilya ekako"va ekarp. vanarp. pilvisi.
pil)J)O a lump of food (usually of food as alms}
Parileyyakana:mo eko hatthiraja'pi hatthigaQ.aQl pahilya taqt vanaQl pavisitva,
pio,(.laya for alms (begging)
bhagavantarp. ekassa mkkhassa miJ.le nisinnaqt disva, piidena paharanto
pitu compounding stem or pitar 'father'
rukkhamlllam sodhetva soQ.c)iiya sakharp gahetva samrnajji. Tato patthaya divase
<see this grammar l.l2)
divase SOI)c;l§ya ghatarp. gahetVil piifllya-paribhojanlya-udakarp. iiharati:·UQ.hodakena
putltu separate, individual, vmibus
atthe sati ul)hodakarp. patiyiideti: katharp.? katthiini gbarp.sitva aggim pateti; tattha
puratthima easern
.I I
pUjeti
phel)lll!l
phet)Upama
woships, adores,- offers
foam. froth
pheQ.a + upama
·
darO.ni pal<khir}anto jiiletva, tattha tattha pasaQ.e padtva, darukhai)Qakena
pavattetvi.'i, khuddakasooQiyarp. khipati. Tato hattharp. otiiretva, udakassa
tattabhavam jiirtitva, gantva satthiiraQl vandati. Sattha tattha gantva nahiiyati. Atha
nanavicthani phatani aharitva deti. ·
blilyarp folly, idiocy
maccuraja king of death
Yada pana sattha gamarp. pil)Qiiya pavisati, tada satthu pattadvaramadaya
mafliiati thinks, knows
kumbhf: ·thapetva, satthara: saddhirp. yeva gacchati; rattifll vafamiganiviirar:mttharp
maricidhamma nature of a mirage
I mahan~arp-daQ.c)afll··.soQ.Qil.ya gahetva yava aruo'uggamana vanasaQ.Qe vicarati.
maneti respect. honor '
''
' ·ma:to death, Mara (death personified)
!Rasv.)
yato since, whence, because
2. Atite kira Bara:l)asiyarp. siilittakasippe nipphattirp patto eko Pithasappi
yathl!katharp pana (yatha+katharp_+pana) then how,
I I how so then
ahosi. So nagaractvare ekassa vatarukkhassa hetthii nii;inno. sakkhara khipitva tassa
pai)J)ili)i chindanto "hatthirU.pakarp. no dassehi, assarG.pakarp. no dassehi" "ti
yannilna well now (yaffl+niina)
gamadarakehi vuccamiino icchit"icchitani rilpiini dassetvi.i tesarp santika
yamaloko world of Yama (ruler of the kingdom of
the dead) khadaniy'adini labhati.
Rlijagaha place name
Ath"ekadivasarp. ra)a uyyanarp. gacchanto taiP padesarp. papul)i. oaraka
vattharp. doth!es)
PithasappiJP piiroh'antare katvii _paliiyirp.su. Rafill.ol !hitamajjharitike rukkhamG.Iarp.
vijayo victory, triumph
pavitthasSa chiddacchaya sai'iram phari. So '"kinnukho etaiP" ti uddharp. olokento
vijeti wins, conquers
rukkhassa paqt.Iesu hatthirU.pak3Uini disva "kass'etaiP karnman"ti pucchitva,
vi~itva knows, realizes (gerund of vindati)
"pithasappio.o" ti sutva tarp. pakkosapetva aha: ''mayharp. purohito atimukharo.
Vipassin name of-a Buddha previous to Gotama
appamattake'pi vutte brihuJP. hhal).anto marp. upaddavati; sakkhissasi tassa mukhe
virago detachment
n§Jimatta ajalai).Q.ika khipituri"ti? "Sakkhissami, deva; ajalal)c)ika aharapetva
vihesa: vexation
purohitena saddhirp. tumhe antosal).iyarp. nisidatha. Ahamettha kattabbarp. .
(v)utthahati rise. get up (alternatively, (v)utthati) B
gerund of (v)u\thahati/(v)u(thati janissanU"ti.
(v)utthaya
sarpkhara (pi) the sum of the conditions resulting in
Raja tathii karesi. ltaro'p~ kattariy"aggena sal)iyarp. chiddarp. katva,
life or existence; synergies
purohitassa raii.ii.a s<iddhirp. kathentassa mukhe vivatamatte ek'el<aJP.. ajalai).Q.ikarp.
sakkaroti respects. (pres. participle sakkaronta)
khipi. Purohito mukhaiP pavittharp. pavittharp gill. Pithasappi khll).i'isu ajalaQQild'isu
santa tranquil, calm
sa:Qirp. ciilesi. ·Raja taya saii.ii.a:ya ajalaoQik"iinarp. khil).abhavam flatva aha: "acariya.
samatho cessation, calming down
aharp. tumhehi saddhiqt kathento katharp. nitthariturp. · na s<ikkhissami. Tumhe2
sekho one still in training. one who has not yet
atimukharataya na:Hmatta ajalaiJ.c;likil gilanta pi tunh,ibha:varp. n§pajjatM "ti.
achieved arahantship
he!thima lower, below

8 The v- may appear when a form of this verb appears following a wor<.l ending in a
vowel.
l GenitiVe of tajan. See Grammar 6.1 and this grammar 1..
13.2 2 Honorific plural
 ';'' LF.S.<;;QN X
''
! I
LESSON X
BrahmaJ).o ma!Jlkubhiiva!Jl 8pajjitva tato patthaya mukhmp vivaritva raflflii iihariipeti causes to bring
I';
sa<.ldhirp sallapiturp- nasakkhi. Raja plthasappilp pakkosiipetva "tarp nissiiya me
'' sukham laddhan;'ti tu ttho tassa sabbatthakarp nama dhanaiP datva nagarassa catiisu
icchita past participle of icchati 'wants, desires'
icchit·icchitani see thL') grammar 8
disi.isu cattiiro varagi.ime adiisi.
itara the other one
<DhpAk) ul)ha war,m, hot
uddhal{l up, above
3. Yathfig3rarp ducchanita!Jl- vutthi samativijjhati upaddavati causes trouble, troubles <someone), anrtoys
evai'p abhilVitam cittam - ri.igo samativijjhati. ubhayattha in both places
uyyanarp. ·park
Yathagaraip succhannam - vuntii na samativijjhati ekaka being alone
evarp subhi.ivitam cittam - r8go na samativijjhati. oloketi looks (at)
Idha socati pecca socati - papakiirt ubhayattha socati kata past participle of karoti
so socati so vihaflflati - disva kammakilitthamattano. katapuiillo one whO has done pure deeds or good
actions (see this grammar lt)
I ldha modati pecca modati - katapuiillo ubhayattha modati kattari scissors
· so modati so. paniodati - disva kammavisuddhimattano. katha story, speech, tale, talk
katheti speaks, talks
ldha tappati pecca tappatl - papakarl ubhayattha tappati kiireti causes to do
'papam me katan' ti tappati - bhiyyo tappati duggatim gato. kira it is said, truly, really (report by hearsay)
kili!!hal{l foulness, impurity (neuter past participle of
ldha nandati pecca nandati - katapuMci ubhayattha nandati.
kilissati ,'become soiled, stai.ned or
"puflfiarp me katan" ti nandati - bhiyyo nandati suggatiip. gato.
impure'
<Dhp) kumbho frontal lobes of an elephant
GLOSSARY khi.i'danlya edible, eatable
khipati ·throws, puts
agaram house khii)a exhausted, over, finished
aggaQl tip, end khuddaka small
ajalai)c;likii goat dung gal).o group, multitude, crowd
ati very. excessively. gantvii gerund. of gacchati
aUto the past gahetvii gerund. of gaQhiiti
attano one's own gilati swallows
an tare in between: among ghamseti rubs against
anto inside, within. behiod ghato(al{l) pot
antos8niYaiP behind the curtain clileti shakes
appamattakarp even a little chiddarp hole, .cut
abh8vita uncultivated, not developed. untrained jlileti kindles
arm;'uggamanarp_. dawnlight !hapeti keeps, places, put')
(<arul)8 'dawn' +uggarnanarp !hitamajjhantike at midday, at noon
'tising, increasing' · tattabhavo hotness, the fact that it is warm/hot, warmth ·
asso horse tappati suffers, is tormented
acariyo teacher tuttha pleased, being happy /glad
ad!(-ni) etcetera, and so fot1h (see this grammar 9) tul)hibhiivo silence, state of being silent
apajjati anives at. reaches, meets daQ<)o (walking) stick, cudgel, club
8harati brings' dasseti shows
darukhaodakam a piece of (fire)wood, a stick

134 135

'IIII
1.1
,.. ,.,
 LESSON X LF..SSON X

divaso day maqllmbhavo downcast-ness, discontent, confusion,

l duggati evil state moral weakness
ducchanna ill-thatched, badly covered mukharp. mouth, face
devo god; also used as .an epithet for king \ mukharata talkativeness
dvararp door, gate modati rejoices, is happy
nandati rejoices. is happy riipakam image, likeness
nahayati bathes' laddha past participle of labhati
niilliividha various , vatarukkho a banyan tree
nli!i a measure of· capacity , a cupful vanasai).Qo(aqt) jungle, forest
· na}imatta about a na:Ji vandati boWs down at, salutes
~ttharati concludes. ends, finishes varagamo hereditary village, a village given as gift
nipphatti c(mclusion, end, completion· valamigo a wild beast
niviira~attharp for the purpose of preventing, vicarati moves about
to prevent vivata open
I nissaya
pakkosapeti
because of, on account of
summons, calls
vivatamatta
visuddhi
as soon aS it was open
purity
pakkhipati throws, puts vihaiiiiati suffers
pacati - , cooks, bakes, heats wccamana being said, being addressed
patiyadeti prepares, arranges vu(lhi rain
pa(\hliya (starting) from (see this grammar 7) sakkoti is able, can·
pal)l)arp leaf · sakkhara pebble
patta attained, reached sakkhissati future of sakkoti
pattam (-o) (alms) bowl sai'lfla sign, signal, indication
paribhojaniya to be used sati locative Singular of santa,
palllyati flees, runs away (see this grammar 2)
pavatteti turns, rolls santikarp. the vicinity (of)
pavisitva gerund of pavisati santika: (ablative) from the vicinity of
paharati hits, strikes, beats sabbat!haka a gift comprising eight of everything given
pahilya . gerund of pajahilti sama:tivijjhati pierces through
pHteti fells, makes fall sammajjati sweeps
aggimpHteti stmis a fire, kindles saliraqt body
pHdo foot sallapati talks, speaks
pHniyarp water for drinking Sifi)i cmtain
pHpakarin evil-doer sakhil branch
papuQati" reaches slilittakasippa art of slinging stones
Parileyyako a name of an elephant suggati -sugati (f) 'good state'
_'pa:roho downard roots from the branch of a succhanna well-thatched. well-covered
banyan tree, tillering subhavita well-developed/cultivated/trained
pHvisi, past of pavisati soQ.Qil elephants trunk
pi:isHQo stone SOI)Qi a natural tank in a rock
pl\hasappin a cripple sodheti clears, cleans
purohito the kings head-priest hatthalll hand, trurik of an elephant
pharati spreads, pervades, falls on hatthirajan elephant-king, chief of elephants
bahurp much hatthin H) elephant
BiiiiiQasi Benar~s hetthll below, beneath, underneath

136 137
I
'

"'
 Lf._<;SON X
GRAMMAR X
I. GENITIVE ABSOLUTE
The locative absolute was presented in VIII, 3. Absolute constructions also
occur in the genitive. This construction is similar to that with· the locative, except
that the participle, and;its subject (if presentr will both be in the genitive case. As
with the locative absolute, the subject of the absolute and the participle will agree
in case, number and gender, and the subject will be different from that of the
main sentence. With a past participle, the construction indicates an action prior to
the main clause: ·
acira-pakkantassa Bhagavato ay8rp. ... katha Udapadi
'Shortly after the Blessed one had departed, this cpnversation arose.'
2. sati AND sante IN LOCAT1VE ABSOLUTES
·atthi. 'be, ~·xist' has a present partiCiple santa (VII,3). This has two locative
forms, sati and sante. In the locative absolute, sati is most often used, but sante
appears when the sense is impersonal, i.e., when the absolute has no specific
subject, either expresse~. or implied: ·
mahariijassa ruciya sati ...
'at the kings command'
(Literally, 'there. being the king's liking')
but:
evarp sante 'that being the case·
3. GERUND -tva(na)
The gerund in tv3(na) or 3ya was given in IV, ·3. A number; of examples
occur in the present reading. Note that they can be "chained" to express a
sequence of actio~ prior to the main· verb:
Eka itthi puttarp adaya. mukhadhovanatth3ya par:u;litassa pokkharanim
gantva puttarp nahiipetva attano s3Q.ake nisid3petva mukharp dhovit\ra
nahaturp otari. · ·
'A certain woman, taking her child, went to the pandit'S lotus-pond
(pokltharani) to wash <literally ·wash the face') and having bathed her son,
placed him on her own garment, washed ((her?) face) and descended (into
the pond) to bathe:
A present or past participle, with its aPprqpriate objects, adverbs, etc~ may
modify a preceding or a following noun. The participl~ and the noun will agree in
number. case and gender, and the constructiOn may have the the sense of an
English relative clause, partiCularly when the participle follows the noun:
<Reading 3).Thus
snasampanno puriso
'A man. <who is) endowed with virtue'
LESSON X
A participle may also follow the object of a verb with a· meaning like "'see"
or ""hear" to form the equiValent of an English construction like "I saw him going"
or "l.saw him seated there:" . ·
Anandarp gacchantarp addasama.
'(We) saw Ananda going.'
Bhagavantarp ekaiJl rukkhassa mille nisinnarp disva
'Seeing the Blessed One seated at the base of a tree .. ·
The present participle may also serve to indicate conte~poraneous action
or sometimes the manner of an action, particularly when it refers to the subject
of the (main) sentence:
daruni pakkhipanto jlilesi
'(He) threw firewood there and kindled (it)'
5. FUTURE PARTICIPLE IN -niya
Future participles in -tabba, -ya, and -niya were given in VII,2, and some
verbs , may appear with more than one of these endings. Thus karoti has the form
karal).iya as well as· kiltabba or kattabba. These form,s, and especially -niya, may
be used as nouns with "Ule sense 'that which should undergo the action of the
verb, or which is w:orthy of it': Thus pU.janiya 'that which should be worshipped,
that whictt is worthy of worship.· Often too, these forms·,have takeri on idiomatiC
meaning, such as khadaniya, from khadati 'eats', which generally means 'solid
food', and karal).iya has sometimes the specific sense 'obliga"tion.·
6. CAUSAT1VE VERBS:
It will be obvious by now that many different verbs are related to each
other by being derived from the same root. Thus, pairs like otarati 'descend' and
otareti 'lower' or aharati 'bring'and aharapeti 'cau~e to bring' have appeared in
readings. ~orne pairs -of this' kind result from the fonnation of ·causative verbs.
Causative verbs are formed in tl)ree main ways:
l. By adding the suffix -e- <earlier -aya-) to a stem which commonly
differs from the present stem, often by having a longer or a different vowel:
otarati 'descends' otareti ·ca:uses to descend, lowers'
jalati 'burns' jiileti 'causes to burn, lights'
pavattati 'rolls' pavatteti "starts something rolling,
causes to roll'
2. By adding -p-an~ the ·-e- suffix to verb stems ending in -a:

cittarp dantam. mahato atthaya samvattafi ti. tittllati ( root th3) 'exists, stand.s thapeti 'places, puts'
The mind which is tamed ( or 'when tamed') leads to great advantage.' deti/dadati 'gives · dapeti .'induce to give'

138 139
 LF.SSON X
LESSON X
But hetthii may also behave like anto:
3. By aduing -ape-(-apaya) to the present stem: hetthiimaflcarp. 'beneath the bed' (maflco 'bed')
nisldati 'sits' nisidapeti 'seats (someone)' Postpositions often come frorh verb forms like gerunds or case forms of
vadati 'speaks' vadapeti 'makes. (someone) speak' nouns which have been '"frozen in" to idiomatic use as. postpositions. Thus nissaya
is actually the gemnd· of a verb nissayati 'leans on. relies ·on .. and patthiiya is
Often there are· alternate forms of the· causative. Thus there is karapeti in similarly related to patthaQati 'puts down, sets down.' Similarly, the for~· santikfi,
addition to kareti from karoti 'does, makes', and in addition to vadapeti 'makes one 'from (the vicinity on·. which occurs in this lesson, is the ablative nf santikam
speak' there is vadeti, from the same root which has the specialized meaning 'vicinity', but could be regarded as a postposition taking the genitive. ·
'plays an instrument' (i.e., in addition to the meaning 'say' given in Reading 6). 8. REPEATED FORMS (REDUPUCATION)
Sometimes, the base' verb and the causative may overlap in meaning, or even Forms of several kinds may· he repeated {"reduplicated") to give a
have the same meaning. Thus the causative verb uggaheti learn <well)' which distributive sense:
appeared in Reading 9, has the same sense as uggaQhilti, from which it is derived. tattha tattha 'all over. here and there'
Most commonly, if the verb from which the causative is formed is yattha yattha 'wherever'
intransitive, the causative- verb is transitive, and if the basic verb is transitive the icchit'icchitani 'whatever (things) are/ were desired'
causative means 'tO get someone to do it'. However, there are numerous
exceptions. Thus pakkosapeti can mean 'summons, calls. for', but so can pakkosati, 9. adi, adlni 'ETCETERA'
, adi 'hegipning, starting point' wheri added to a noun or a list has· the sense
the verb from which it is formed, and many causative verbs have idiomatic
meanings (like vadeti above). However. it is useful to be aware of the· general 'etcetera, and so forth'. In this Usage, ii commonly appears with neuter plural
pattern, since it often allows one to guess {and retain) the meaning of a new verb inflection:
that is related to one akfady known. Originally, the forms in -ape- were double hatthiliipakadlni 'images of elephailts, etc'
kasignrakkhlldini 'agricUlture, tei)ding cattle. etc'
causatives, and some of them still have that meaning. Thus in addition to mareti (kasi 'ploughing. agriculture')
'kills' from marati 'dies' there is marapeti 'causes to kill.'
10. SA!IDHI
When a form beginning in u- follows one ending in -a, the result may he
7..'PRE- AND POST-POSmONS · -o-, particularly when they are closely joined in a compound. thus uoha ·warm.
As stated in II, 7, Pfili has both prepositions and postpositions. Some
hot' plus ud~karp. 'water' results muQhodakarp 'hot water'.
examples of each appear in this reading:
The preposition anto 'within, inside'does not r~quire any specific. case on IL katapiiiio
the noun that it precedes,but rather forms a compound with it, so that the entire In most compounds <except co-Ordinate ones) the last element expresses
compound takes the case required by the construction in which it appears: the type of thing that the compou·nd refers to, and the preceding element, which
anto&amarp. pavisati 'goes into the village' may" stand in any of several relationships tq it, such as Sllbject. object, adjective.
antonivesanarpgato '(he) who has gone into the house' etc., but generally modifies or qualifies it in some way. thus Buddhadesito
antonagare viharanti '(they) live (with)in the city' 'preached by the Buddha,' kasigorakkha 'agriculture'(literally:"ploughing-cattle
Several new postpositions appear in this lesson, and they require specific protection/maintaining', with a co-ordinate compound as first member)
kammakaro 'worker, work/deed-doer,· pubbakamrnam ;'former action'.
cases on their dependent nouns. kalyanamitto 'good friend' etc. However, Pali has a few compounds in which the
pan:haya '(beginning) from' takes the ablative. Thus: first element is participle, that reverse this order. Thus ditthapubbo 'seen before'
ajjato patthaya 'from today on' or katapuflflo 'doer of merit' in thL.;; reading (compare English "aforesaid' or
ito patthaya 'henceforth' "spoilsport'). There are a riUmber of others formed wjth kata-. the past participle
of karoti; thus kataparadho' doer of guilt. transgressor,' katakalyano '(me who has
niss3ya 'because (of), owing to,· takes the accusative: done good deeds, etc.'
idal'fl kammarp nissaya 'because of this action'
_dhanarp. nissaya 'because of (by .meam of')wealth'
hettha 'beneath' may take the genitive:
rukkhassa hettha 'beneath the tree'

141
140
 '·I·
U:"iSON X LE.."\.."iON X

4. Atite Ba~ai)asiyaJp. Brahmadatte rajjarp kBrente bodhisatto BaraQ.asiyarp

LESSON X< FURTHER READINGS val)ijakule nibbatti. NamagahaiJ-adivase ca'ssa Pandito'ti na:mam akamsu. So
vayilppatto afmena · vauijena saddhirp ekato hu~~ vlli)ijjarp· karoti. · Tassa
l. Ath'eko makkato tam hatthiip. divase divase tatha:gatassa upatth3narp !'--tipaiJ-Qito'ti namarp ahosi. Te Barai)asito paficahi sakatasatehi bhao<;larp. actaya
karontam disva: 'aham pi kii'lcideva karissami' ti Vicaranto ekadivasarp 1anapadarp gantva val)ijjarp katva laddha-lBbha 4 puna Baraoasitp. agamirp.su. Atha
ni~makkhikarp dar:t<;lak3madhum disva daQ.<;lakam bhai'ljitva daQ.<;laken'eva saddhirp tesa!Jl bhal)<)a-bhajanaka!e Atipal)<)ito aha; "Maya dve kol!hasa laddhabbha" ti.
madl;m patalarp satthu santikarp. aharitva kadalipattarp. chinditva tattha thapetva
"Kirp ka:raQ1'i?".
adasi. Sattha gal)hi._ Makkato "karissati nu kho paribhogarp, na karissati" ti
Qlokento, gahetva ~sinnarp disva ''kinr!ukho" ti cintetva dai)<;lakotiyam gahetva "Tvarp PaQ.<;lito, aharp Atipau<;Iho; pao<;lito ekarp Iaddhurp arahati,
parivattetv~ ·olokento aQ<;lakani disva tani sanik.arp. apanetva adasi. Sattha atipao<;lito dve" ti.
paribhogamakasi. So tutthaffianaso tarp. tam sakharp.. gahetva naccanto atthasi.
Tassa gahita-sakha'pi' akk.antasakh8'pi bhijji. So ekasmirp khaoumatthake patitva "Nanu amhakarp dvinnarp bhau<;lammam'pi goi)Bdayo'pi sanl.a-sama
nibbiddhagatto ~atthari paSannena cittena kalarp.katva ta:vatiQlsabhavane nibbatti. · yeva? kasma tvarp dve kottttaSe laddhurp arahasi?'.' ti.
(Rasv.)
"Atipao<;litabhl.ivena" ti.
2. Atite eko vejjo ga:manigamesu caritva vejjakammarp. karonto ekatp
cakkhudubbalarp. itthirp disva pucchi: "k!m te aphasukam" ti? Evarp te katharp va<;l<;lhetva kalaharp akarpsu.
Tato Atipao<;lito 'atth'eko upayo'ti cintetva. attano pitararp ekasmirp susi.ra-
•Akkhihi na passamr ti. mkkhe pavesetva "tvarp amhesu Bgatesu "Atipandito dve kotthase laddhum
"Bhesajjarp te karomi"ti. arahati" ti vadeyya:si ti vatva: bodhisattarp. upas~~Bmitva: "s~mma maYharP
, 'I
dvinnarp kotthasanarp yuttabhavarp va ayuttabha:varp va esa mkkhadevata janati.
1: "KarOhi samr ti. ehi narp pu·cchissam~r ti, tarp tattha netva "ayye rukkhadevate ·amhakam attam
!•
"Kimme dassasi" ti? pacchind§'' ti aha. Ath'assa pita sararp. parivattetva "tena hi kathe1ha'' ti aha: · · ·
"Sace 'me akkhini pakatika:nf katutp sakkhissasi, aharp te putta-dhitahi "Ayye, ayarp PaQ.<;iito, ahar}l Atipandito. Arnhehi ekato voharo kato; tattha
saddhirp d8si bhavissami" · ti. So bhesajjarp. sarnvidahi. . Ekabhesajjene'va akkhln.i kena ki!Jl Iaddhabban" ti. ··
pakatikani ahesu:rp.. sa cintesi "aharp ·etassa 'puttadhitahi saddhiiP d8si bhavissami
ti patiiBnirp: vancessami narr( 3 ti. · "Pal)<)itena eko ko!!haso, Atipal)<)itena dve Iaddhabba" ti.

sa vejjena "kidisarp bhadde?" ti puttha "pubbe me akkhini thokam mjirpsu. Bodhisatto evarp. vinicchitarp attafll sutva "idani devatabhavam va
idani atirekatararp mjanti" ti. aha. adevatabhavarp. va janissa:mi" ti palalarp_ Bharitva susiram pUretva aggirp ·adasi.
(Rasv.) Atipao<;Jitassa pita jfi'Jaya phutthakale addhajjhamena sarlrena upari fuuyha sakhaQl

3. Atite kira eko vejjo vejjakammatthaya gamarp vicaritvB kihei kammarp.

.
gahetva olambanto bhilmiyaip ,patitva imarp gijtharp aha:
' "

alabhitva chatajjhattb Ii.ikkhamitva gamadvare sambahule kuma:rake kijante disva "sadhuko Pao<;lito nama,
':i",i 'ime sappena <;lasapetva tikicchitva ahararp. labhissamr ti ekasmirp ·iukkhabile sisaiJl natv'eva 5 AtipaQ<;lito."
niharitva tiipannarp sapparp dassetva "ambho kuma:rak3, eso $8,lik.apotako; ga[)hatha Uatl
nan'ti aha. Ath'eko kumarako sapparp givaya daJhaQl gahetva niharitva tassa GLOSSARY
sappabhavarp. natva -viravanto avid~re thit~ssa vejjassa matthake khipi. Sappo akkamati steps upon, treads upori;
vejjassa khandhatthikarp. parikkhipitva dafharp. <;lasitva tatth'eva jivitakkhayarp. present participle akk.anta
papesi. eye
(DhAk.)

4 Her~ th~ obj~t.follows the participle and the entire fol111 is plural. agre'eing with te.
which It modifies.
5 na+tu+eva
J Alternate foim of taQl

142 143

,,
 LESSON X
u:..;soN x da!ha!)l tightly. hard, strongly·
attaiJl question, problem. lawsuit case diisl maid-servant
a!lhasi past of ltilthati) dubbala weak
·,;
'
aoQakaQl th'!l dhitar daughter
atipaiJQito a name ( < ati 'very, exceedingly~ + paiJc;lito) naccati dances, plays
atirekataram much more namagahanarp naming, taking a name
addhajjhama half-burnt na:marp. karo·ti gives a name
apaneti removes, leads aWay nigamo market-town, small town
aphasukam difficulty, disease nipanna to lie or sleep
ambho look here, hey, hello mbbattati is born, ruises
ayya worthy one, honorable one nibbiddha pierced·
arahati deserves nimmakkhika without bees or flies
avidiire vicinity, nearby niharati' puts out,stretches or takes out
adaya having taken lger. of lidliti 'takes' pacchindati settles, decides
aruhati climbs papjlinliti promises
ahara food patati falls, ger. patitvli
idani now parikkhipati coils around, encircles
upatthBnatll atteridance, waiting upon partbhogo enjoyment, use, partaking
upari above, on. upon, upper parivatteti turns, changes
upayo method, way out, u·ick paveseti causes to enter, puts inside
ekato together paliilarp straw, dry leaves
,,I olambati hangs (froml, is suspended pasanna pleased, clear, blight
·banana leaf plikatika natural state, state as before
!' kadalipattal)l
k§rapaQl reason, cause papeti brings about, brings to
kiflcideva something or other (kirp+ci(d)+eva) puttha past participle of ( pucchati)
kldisa how, in what manner phu!lha touched (past participle of
kl!ati plays phusati 'touches')
kumaraka young boy bilam hollow ,
koti end bodhisatto aspn·ant to Buddhahood,
kotthliso . share a Buddha-to-be in an earlier life
. khandha!lhika!)l backbone, back Brahmadatto a name of a king
kh31).U stake, spike bhanjati breaks
gatta!)l body bhaQc;la!)l goods
givH neck, throat bhaiJQammiiJarp caJi)ital
gQI)O ox bhadde dear one, lady, term of address for women
chatajjhatta be hungry bhajanarp dividing
jam blazes, flames bhavo nature, fact", -ness
Qasapeti causes to bite or sting bhijjati breaks, gets broken
tavatirpsabh3vanarp. realm of the thirty-three gods bhiimi ground. earth
tikicchati treats (medically) bhesajja medicine
tu however, indeed makkato monkey
tutlhamanasa delighted, with delight matthaka top, head, surface
thoka!)l little madhu honey
dauc;lakamadhU!Jl a bee-hive on a branch madhu patalo honeycomb
daQ\Iako branch, stick mil nasa with .a mind, of the mind
dassasi future 2 Sg. of deti
145
144
 miilarp price, capital, money
yutta proper, befitting, to have a right to LESSON XI
rajjaiJikarotif' kilreti reigns
rukkhadevata a tutelaty deity of a tree l. Atite jambudipe Ajitaratthe eko gopaiako vasi. Tassa gehe eko paccekabuddho
'II rujati pains or aches
' nibaddharp_ bhufljati. Tasmirp gehe eko kukkuro ca ahosi. Paccekabuddho
laddhabba future passive past participle of Iabhati bhufljanto tassa nibaddharp ekarp bhattapiQ.Qarp adasi. So tena paccekabuddhe
laddhul]l infinitive of labhati sineharp. akasL Gopalako divasassa dve vare paccekabuddhassa upatthanaiJI gacchi:
labho profit, gain Sunakho'pi terra saddhirp_ gacchi.
vaflceti cheats Gopillo ekadivasarp_ paccekabuddharp_ aha: "bhante, yada me okilso na
va<)<)heti increases (something), cultivates bhavissati, tada: imaiJI sunakharp pesessarill; tena saflflill)ena 3gaccheyyath3" ti. Tato
vatva gerund of vacati patthaya anokasadivase sunakharp pesesi. So. ekavaca~en'eva pakkhanditva,
vayappatta come of age pac~ekabuddhassa vasanatthilnarp. gantvi:i, tikkhatturp bhussitva attano
vinicchita decided, settled agatabhavarp janapetva ekamantarp. nipajji. ·Paccekabuddhe velarp_ sallakkhetva
viravati Shouts, screams nikkhante; bhussanto purato gacchi. Paccekabuddho tarp_ vimarpsanto ekadivasiup
vejjakammaiJl medical practice
vejjo aflflarp_ maggarp. patipajji; atha sunakho tiriyarp. thatva bhussitva itaramaggameva
a physician narp aropesi.
saiJividahati arranges, applies, prepares, provides
sakato(al]l) Ath'ekadivasarp. aflflarp maggarp_ patipajjitv8, sunakhena tiriyarp_ thatvi:i
cart vilriyamano'pi anivattitva, tarp_ pHdena apanetva 'payasi. Sunakho tassa
s3nikaiJI slowly, gradually
sappo . anivattanabhilvarp flatva, riivilsanakiJ.I).l).e Qasitva ilka<;iQhanto gantabbamaggam· eva
a serpent pilpesi. Evarp_ so sunakho tasmirp_ paccekabuddhe balavasineharp. uppildesi.
sama-sama equal(ly)
sambahula Aparabhilge paccekabuddhassa civaraiJI jiri. Ath'assa gopi:ilako
many civaravatthani adilsi. Paccekabuddho "phasukatthfinarp.· gantva civararp_ k8ressamr
samma · friend; term _of address fof a friend ti gopillakarp. aha. So'pi "bhante, rna cirarp. bahi vasittha" ti avadi. Sunakho'pi tesarp.
saro voice, -sound
sakha katharp_ sui)Bilto atthilsi. Paccekabuddhe vehasarp abbhuggantva gacchante
branch . bhurpkaritva thitassa sunakhassa hadayarp_ phali.
sadhuka good or righteous (one)
sami lord, sfr-, husband Tiracchana nam·ete ujujatika honti akutua.
sa)ikapotako a young bird (Mynah bird)
sfsarp head
susirarukkho Manussa pana ·aflflarp. cintenti, aflflarp_ vadanti.
hollow tree
hutva (Rasv.)
gerund of hotilbhavati
2. Evarp. me sutarp_. Ekarp_ samayaiil bhagava A}aviyarp viharati A.lavakassa
yakkhassa hhavane. Atha kho .Alavako yakkho yena bhagava ten'upasarpkami,
upasarp.kamitva bhagavantarp. etadavoca:

'Nikkhama, samat)3'ti.
·sadh3vuso'ti bhagava nikkhami.

'Pavisa, saman3'ti.
·sadhf:i.vusO'ti, bhagava pilvisi.

Dutiyarp pi kho AJ,avako yakkho bhagavantarp_ etadavoca

Nikkhama' .. pilvisi.

Tatiyarp pi kho AJ,avako yakkho bhagavantarp_ etadavoca:

146

!! ,.
 LESSON XI l.ESSON XI

'Nikkhama' .. piivisi. '

Catuttharp pi kho AJavako yakkho bhagavantaqi t:tadavoca:
'Nikkhama, saman8'ti.
'Na khvi'iha'Ql tarp avuso nikkhamissami: yante kara1)1yarp, taQl karolii'ti.
"Panharp tarp, samaQa pucchissiimi. sace me na vyakarissasi, cittam va te
khipissami; hadayarp va te phalessami, pfide.su va gahetva p8rag~rpgaya
khipissami'ti.
samvatteyya; labhhetha ca rOpe 'evam me Iiipaf!l hotu, evatll me liiparp. rna ahosi
'tl. Yasma ca kho bhikkhave, 'IiipaJil anatta, tasma ri1paQ1· iibiidhiiya samvattati.
Na ca labbhati rape 'evarp. me tiiparp hotu, evarp me roparp rna ahosi'ti.
"Vedana hhikkhave; anatta. V~dana ca hidarp bhikkhave, atta abhavissa.
nayidarp. vedana iibiidhiiya sarp.vatteyya; labbhetha ca vedanaya 'evarp me vedana
·hotu, evam me vedana rna ahosi' 'ti. Yasma ca bhikkhave. vedana: anatta, tasma
vedana· ab~dhilya sarp.vattati. Na ca labhhati vedanaya 'evarp. me vedana hotu,
evarp.. me vedana rna ahosi'ti.

'Na khvfiharp. tarp., avuso passami sadevake loke sabrahmake sassamana- "Sanna bhikkhave, ariatta. Sanna ca hidaiP bhikkhave, atta ahhavissa,
bri.ihmaniya pajiiya sadevamanussiiya yo me cittaQl va khipeyya, hadayam va nayidaQl safiii.a abadhay3 Satllvatteyya; labhhetha ca saMaya 'evarp. me saiilia
phli!eyya, padesu va gahetvli pliragaljlgliya khipeyya. Api ca tvaljl avuso puccha hotu, evarp. me saiifiii rna ahosi'ti. Yasrna ca }Jhikkhave. sahll~ anatta:, tasma sanna
yad iikaQkha;st'ti. abiidhaya sarp..vattati. Na ca labhhati sanflaya 'evarp me sanna hotu, evarp me
saflM rna ahosi'ti.
Atha kho A!avako yakkho bhagavantalJl gathaya ajjhabhasi:
"SaQlkha:ra bhikkhave, anatta. Sarp.khara ca hidaQl bhikkhave atta
'K.irp si:i'dha vittaiP purisassa setthaiJl? abhavissiQlSU, nayime sarp..kha:ra ah3dhaya satllvatteyyurp; labbhetha ca
Khp su suci(l(larp sukhama'vahiiti? sarp.kharesu 'evarp me saQlkhara hontu, evarp. me saQlkhiirii rna ahesun'ti.. Yasma
Kirp su have siidutaraQl rasanarp?. ca kho bhikkhave, sarpkhi.itii anatta, tasrna sarp.khara iib3dh3ya sarp.vattanti. Na ca
.,
•,;I
Katharpjivirp jivitamiihU segliarp?' lahbhati sarpkh3resu 'evam me saiflkhara hontu. evarp me sarp.khara rna ahesun'ti.
li "Vifti'l3parp. bhikkhave, anatta.· Viflil3Q.afic.a hidarp bhi~have, atta
'Saddhidha vitta'Ql purisassa settham.
Dhammo suciwo sukhamavahiiti. abhavissa, nayidarp. vii'lflliparp abadhaya saq1vatteyya; Iahhhetha ca vihftape 'evarp.
me viflfiaparp hotu. evarp. me viftfiaparp. rna ahosi'ti. Yasrnaca, kho hhikkhave
SaccaiJI have sadutararp rasanarp..
PafifiiijiVirp. jivitamahu settharp.. · vifli'liinarp anatta. tasma viflhaparp aha<.lhaya sarp.vattati. Na ca labbhati viimape
(SN.l 'evatP me vifii'l8flaJP. hotu. Eva"rp me viM.i.ittaiP rna ahosi'ti.
(Mhvg.)
'3. Na antalikk.he na samuddamajjhe - na pabbatanarp. vivararp.. pavissa
Na vijjati so jagatippadeso - yatthatthito muftceyya pHpakamma. GLOSSARY

Na antalikkhe na samuddamajjhe - na pabbatanarp. vivararp. pavissa Ajita a name of a country

Na vijjati so jagatippadeso - yatthatthitarp. na-ppasahetha maccu ajjhabhlisati addresses. speaks
anta end, goal
X anta having X as its end
Sukhakamani bhUtani -yo dal).(.lena vihirp.sati
Attano sllkhamesano - pecca so na labhate sukharp. afitalikkhaf!l atmosphere
apaneti Ie8ds away, removes
Sukhakamani bhi:Wini - yo dandena na himsati aparabhiigo later time, later .
Attano sukhamesano- pecca· ~o labhate ~uktiarp. abhavissa ct)nditional of bhavati
(see this grammar 2)
Parijii)Q.amida·rp. Iiiparp. - roganiQI)harp pabhaqtgul).atll akaljlkhati desires
lika<;l<)hati (\rags, pulls
bhijjati piitisandeho- maraQantaiP hi jivitatll.
(Dhp.) aropeti tead.;; up to
4. Atha kho bhagava paftcavaggiye bhikkhii amantesi: 'Rii paJil· bhikkhave liblldho disease, affliction.
avahati =iivahati 'brings, entails' with length for
anatta. RiipaJil ca hidaiJl bhikkhave, atta ahhavissa, nayidatll Iiipatll -iibiidhiiya
tl\e poetic Q1eter

148 149
LFSSON XI
LFSSON XI
.Alavako a name of a demon p8ragaqJ.g8ya beyond the Ganges, the other side of
Alavi a place name
itara
the Ganges
other purato in front of, before
ujuj"atika straightforward, honest piitisandeho accumulation of putrid matter,
upp8deti produces, makes, gives rise to
esi'ina mass of conuption
searching for, eager for peseti sends
okaso occasion, time phalati splits, breaks open
katharp jlvirp leading what kind of life, which way phaleti rends asunder
of.living> phasuka
kukkuro easy, comfortable
dog balavant
kareti great, powerful; compound stem "balava
constructs, makes bahi outside, outer, external.
kutila crooked, dishonest brahmal)l paja · generation (progeny) of Brahmins
khatturp times bhattam boiled rice, food, meal
tikkhattum three times bhavanaiJl abode, residence
gopalako cowherd · bhijjati is broken
catuttharp for the fourth time bhul)lkaroti harks
cittarp khipati confuses (someone"s) mind bhussati barks
jagati (in) the world (locative of jagati~ ·world' bhiital)l living being
j8n8peti informs majjha. mid(fie
jlrati decays, is worn out mui'lcati releases, iS relieved
Jhati stands yakkho demon, devil
(lasati bites, chews, gnaws rogo disease, sickness
tiracchano animal - labbhati is available, is obtained
. tiriyaJP. across vattharp cloth
nikkhanta ppl. of nikkhamati vasati livi=s, abides, dwells
ni\1\lham nest, place vasanattMnarp place of residence
nipajjati lies down variyamana being prevented, obstructed
nibaddham always vliro time, 9ccasion
nivattati turns back vijjati appears, seems
nivasanakai)J).arp hem of the robe vittarp. property, wealth
pakkhandati · springs forward, jumps up vivaro(arp.) cavity, hOle, hollow
· paccekabuddho Individual or silent Buddha vimarp.s~ti tests, considers
(see this gramm~r 8) vela time
paflcavagglya (bhikkhil) the group of fiVe monks to whom the vehaso sky, air
Buddha preached his first sermon vylikaroti explains, clarifies, answers
pafu18jlvi1Jl life of wisdom, insight safu18I)arp token, mark, sign
paiiho question saddha determination, faith
pa(ipajjati enters upon samuddo ocean, sea
padeso province, part, region sallakkheti observes, considers
pabbato mountain, range of mountains sassamap.a-bra:hmap.a including religious teachers and brahmins
pabhamguna ea:Sily destroyed sadutara sweeter, inore· pleasant
payati goes forward, proceeds sineho affection
pariii[)Qa decayed indeed, verily
pavissa
pasahati
gerund of pavisati ""sukhaka:ma desirouS of happiness
subues, oppresses sucir_u:ta well-practiced
papeti briilgs to. causes to attain sunakho dog

150 151
 LESSON XI LESSON XI
settha noble, best, excellent
The fo~s ~re illustrated below with the conditional of bhavati 'be, exist,
:!I
. I
hadaymp heart, mind
have indeed, certainly, surely become'·
hirpsati oppresses Singular Plural
GRAMMAR XI I Pen: obhiiYiSSOIJI obhavi ssiima
I. IMPERATIVES: obhovi ssatho
2 Pers:
. _several_ imperative~ hav:e occUlTed So far. The second person singular and ObhliYissa
plural unperatives were ~lven m m. 5, and the third person in vn. 1. Iri addition, it 3 Pers: llbhliYi SSllf!ISU
.; w~s noted th~t the ~pta~ve can occur as a polite imperative (lli, 4.2) and that the
third person Imperative IS also used as a respectful second person irnperative(VJI,
j' 2.2). .
2.2 Use: The conditional is used in forming "IL(then)" constructions. Usually, the
verb of the "if clause is in the conditional, and the sense is commonly strongly
~ this_ reading, an .alternate form of the second person imperative without hypothetical or counter to fact'; that is, there is an implication that the situation
I
the suff.~ -hi occurs. This bare form of the imperative is found primarily with · described has not or could not take place. The verb of the "then" clause may be
! I
verbs With a present_ ~tern. in -a or -a. R.ecall that final -a of the stem was in the optative, and the implication is then that the whole situation is hypothetical:
I lengthened before -hi If not, already long. ln the imperative without -hi it 18
·
I! always short, even if long in the present: '
1: no ce tmp abhavissa ajatal]l abhiltal]l...nayidha jatassa bhutassa
nissaraQ.am pai"lfuiyetha
PRESENT TENSE -hi IMPERATIVE BARE IMPERATIVE (pai'ii'Uiyati 'appears,.is clear, is evident' nissaraQ.am 'escape,departure')
'If there were not the not:-bom and the not-become, there would not appear an
labhati 'obtains' labhiihi labha escape from tl).e born and the having become.'
SUIJHti 'hears' SUI)3hi SUI)ll
This reading gives an excellent example of this in Main.· Reading 4. Note the
NOTE: Another formation Or the imperative is given under the Middle Voice in 4 below. contrast between the sentences with the conditional - optative sequence and thoSe
,\rith the present -past sequence ..
2. TiiE CONDffiONAL:
3. TiiE PROHIBlTIVE PARTICLE rna
~.1 Forrilation: The particle rna 'don't' usually occurs With the imperative, the past, or the
Pali has a conditional form of the verb. It looks like a blend of the future optative.
_arid past tense forms and is formed as follows : With the imperative, rna forms a negative imperative:
([) Adding the prefix a-. This is 'the same "augment · that appears in the rna gaccha 'don't go'
past tense (VI, 5); . rna evarp. danarp detha 'do not give alms thus~
(2) adding the affix -iss-. that is used in the future (IX, 3), but followed
by the followmg endmgs· With the past verb, it forms a prohibitive, or a negative exhortation:
rna saddarp. akasi 'Do not make noise'
Singular Plural
-iim11 alarp., Ananda, rna soci rna paridevi
1 Pers: IIIJI . (alal]l '(that's) enough')
2 Pers: -II -llthll 'Enmigh,. Ananda, do not grieve, do not weep.'
3 Pers: -11rpsu With the optative, it means that something should not be done, as we
.
would expect:
Note that these resemble the endings of of the past tense (VI, 6; IX, 21, rna pamadarp. anuyuftjetha 'Do not indulge in indolence.·
e~cept that the third person smgular ends in short -a rather than -a. and the·
third person plural has -rpsu like the "-'is aorist " type past . · · 4. MIDDLE VOICE
Sanskrit had a system Of of "middle" or "reflexive" endings, in contrast With
the "active" endings. The middle inflections, in general, occun·ed with verbs that

152 153
 LESSON XI

indicr.~.ted actions done for the subject's own benefit, or which reflected back on lESSON XI
or affected the subject. These endings were also required in passive verbs. In not generally distinguishable in use, and some have been given before simply as
Pall, the descendants of .these endings sometimes occur, but they are relatively optative forms
rare, particularly in prose, and are clearly dying out The line between active and
middle forms in meaning is also blurred, and often the middle endings seem to be Singular Plural
used simply to give an elevated or archaic flavor, or, in poetry, to suit the meter. .
I Pers: · -eyyBI{I -(eyy)BIIlase
They are thus essentially remnants, but where found, may still be associated with
verbs with a "middle" sense. Also, although they are tnuch less common than the 2 Pers: -etho . -eyyavho
more familiar active endings, they do differ from them in shape, and thus the :5 Pers: -etha eral{l
student should be prepared to encounter and recognize them. As with the active
endings, there a're different sets that occur with different tenses and moods, and
here we simply give the endings, with examples of different verbs, so. that the Examples: labhetha 'he should/might obtain'; bhajetha 'he should/ mi!lht
student may recognize them or refer to the charts where necessary.. Ot is associate with' jayetha 'he/it should be born/ come into being'. labbhetha 'might be
difficult if not impossible to find an actually occurring complete or even nearly obtained'
complete set with any single verb.). 4.4 Middle Imperative:
There are also imperative middle voice·forms, as follows. The second
j 4.1 Present and Future Tense Middle Forms; singular form appears to be mo're common ~han the others, especially with certain
i'l The following middle endings occur with present and future tense forms: verbS in fixed expressions
';
'
Singular' Plurol Singular Plural
I Pers: -e · -mhe/-m'hase 2 Pers: -ssu -YhO
2 Pers: -se -vhe :5 Pers: -lOIJI B_ntD'!I
':1 Pers: -te -ante/ -re
Examples:· labhatalp_ 'let him obtain'; gal)hassu '(you) take'!; bhasassu 'speak!'
Examples: 4.5. Present Participle:
manne 'I think, suppose'; labhe 'I obtain'; labhate 'he obtains'; gamissase AJ; desctibed ·in IV,4 and IX, 5, the -mana present participle was otiginally
'you will go'; karissare 'they will do'. a middle form, but in Piili it has greatly extended its use, and has become
primarily an alternate fOr the -ant participle.
4.2 Past Tense Middle Fonns:
The following·endings occur with the past tense· 5 LOCATIVE OF REFERENCE AND WCATIVE OF CONTACT.
. ' The locative case may be used with a sense 'in refe-rence to', with relation
Singular . Plural I to·, or 'concerning':
I' Pers: -Oifl -masa/-mhase
2 Pers: .kathai]l mayai]l Tathagassa satire p~tipajjama?
-(t)tho -vho/ -YhBIJI what shall we do with regard to the Tathagata's body?'
':1 Pers: -(t)tha -re /-ruiJI (sartro, body'; pappajjati 'enters a path, follows a method')
Used with a verb of seizing, grasping, etc, the locative may signify the point of
EXamples: contact
maliflitha 'he thought'; maliflitho 'you thought'; abhasittha 'he spoke (note
the augment); pucchittho 'you asked' · tai]l kesesu gal)hati '(he) takes him by !he hair (used in the plural in p-aJi)'
4.3 Optative Middle Fonns: The optative endings below are strictly speaking (or
more aCcurately, historicallY speaking) middle endings. However,. sirice these 6. labbhati .
endings ·have been mixed to a great degree with other optative endings, they are labbhati is the passive form of labhati 'gets, obtains'. It may have the
!"
expected meaning 'be obtained, be received', but it also ~as a ·':~e ~hich_it .
means' 'come about', or even 'exist'. '(recall the similar use of VIJJati With thBnarp II
154
155
 LESSON XI LEssON XI
,,.,
I
Grammar 7 of Lesson 5). In this use it may occur with the lo~ative of reference (5 Tassa te viflfmssa sato mahallakassa- na etad ahosi; "AhaiP pi kho'mhi
above), as in the_ reading here. vyadhidhammo vyadhiql anatito. Hand3harp kaly3Q.aqi karomi kayena vacaya
manasa"ti.
6. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE
'I' The most common way in which p-aJi expresses the comparative (English
Na tvaiJI addasa manussesu itthiiJI· va 'purisam va ek§hamatam va
"-er") is with the affix --tara add~d to an adjective: dvihamatarp va tihamataqi va uddhtimatakarp. vinllakarp viPubbakaja:tan'ti? ·
Tassa te viiiliussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi:
ADJECTIVE COMPARATIVE
piyatara 'dearer' "Marp pi kho'mhi maraoadhammo mar:aJ)aJil anatito. Handfiham kalyiiQ.aJil
piya 'dear' karomi kayena vacay~ manasa"ti. ·
sadu 'sweet' sadutara 'sweeter
(-A. N.l
bahu 'much' bahutara 'inore'
sllavaht 'virtuous' sllavantatara 'more virtuous'
2. Katama ca bhikkhave samm8-ditthi?
balavant 'powerful' . balavatara ·more pOwerful'
YaiJI kho bhikkhave dukkhe naQ.aJil dukkhasamudaye i'lBQ.aJil
As the last tWo examples show, adjectives in -(v)ant may add -a- or lose du~anirodhe ii3IJ.~IP .dukkhanirodha gamirllya patipadaya i'lat)arp ayarp. vuccati
i.':- the final consonants when -tara is added. bhikkhave samma-dl(thi.
There is also a superlative ("-est) affix -tama, as in sattama 'the best' (<
santa), plyatitma 'dej:lrest' but it is rarer,_ and in Piili the comparative often has a ~ Ya~~ ~o avuso ariyasavako akusalaiica pajanati akusalHmUlaflca pajanati.
superlative sense. kusal~nc~ p~Janati. kusalamlllaiica pajanati, ettavata pi kho ·avuso
ariyasavako
; , Then~ are also irregular comparatives and superlatives. Many of' these are samma-d1ttlu hou, dhamme aveccappasa:dena samann.agato, agato imarjl
·.I'j
'i descended ffom Sanskrit forms in -1yas ans -iWJa. Sound· ·change has disguised saddhamman'ti. ·
them, but in PiHi, they commonly end in -iya or -yya and (i)((ha: Thus seyya
'better', setlha 'best', bhiyyo 'more', papil(ha-' the worst', jel(ha 'the eldest', etc. Katamaql panfivuso akusalarp., katamarp_ akusalamillarp, katamarp. kusalaQl,
katamaql kusalamillan 'ti?
8... PACCEKA BUDDHA" PBQfitipato kho avuso akusalam
A Pacceka , "Individual" or "Silent" Buddha" is an arahant who has attained adinn§danarp. akusalarp .
Nibbiina by himself, without hearing the doctrine.from another, as opposed- to kamesu mitchacaro akusalaiJl (kaya-kammal!l)
those arahants who have learned by instruction. He does not have the capacity to
teach others and awakeri them to the doctrine of the four noble truths, as musavado akusalarp.
op(X)Sed to ·a Samma:sambuddha "Universal or Perfect Buddha" <Glossary, lesson pisuoa vaca akusalarp.
VI), as represented, for example, by Gotama Buddha . The term Pacceka Buddha pharusa vaca akusalarp.
is not much used in the p-aJi Canon, and the concept becomes more import8nt in samphappalapo il.kusalarp. (vaci-kammarp)
Mahayana contexts. ·
abhijjha akusalal!l
FURTHER READINGS XI byapado akusalarp.
micchaditthi akusalaqi (mano-kainmarp)
t. Na tvarp. addasa manussesu itthirp. va purisarp. va asitikarp. va navutikarp. va
vassasatikarp. va jatiya, iiwam gopaQ.asivaqlk.Hrp. bhoggarp. dai).Qaparayanarp. ldarp vuccatavuso akusalarp.
pavedhamanarp gacchantarp ' aturarp. gatayobbanaql khaiJQadantarp. palitakesal{l Ime dasa ?hamma "akusalakammapath8ti namena pi fl3tabba.
vilUnam khalitarpsiro valittim tilakahatagattan'ti? Katamaflc§Vuso akusalamillam?
Tassa te viilliussa sato mahallakassa na etad ahosi: "Aharp. pi kho'mhi
jar8dhammo jararp anatlto. Handfiharp. kalyat)arp karomi ki.iyena vacaya manasfi."ti. Lobho akusalamUlarp.
doso akusalamD.larp.
Na tvaiJI addasa _manussesu itthiql va purisaQl va abadhikaQl dukkhitaq'l moho akusalamD.larp
ba!hagilfularp. sake muttakmise palipannarp semanarp aiili.ehi vutth8piyamanarp ldarp. vuccatavuso akusalamfi.larp..
aiili.ehi sarp.vesiyamallan'ti?

156 157
 LFSSON XI
LES'lONXI
Na ca riipava hOti, na ca bhogava hoti, na ca silava hoti, alaso ca hoti,
Katamafldivuso kusalaq~.? pajaflcassa· na labhati.
Imehi kho bhikkhave paiicahi atp.gehi saniannagato puriso ekantamanapo
Parjiltipata Veramal).1 kusalarp. hoti m3tug3massa. ·
adinnftctana veramaQJ kusalaiP
kamesu micchacara VeramaQI kusalarp. (kaya-kammaQl)
Paflcahi bhikkhave arpgehi samannagato puriso ekantamanapo hoti
m3tug3massa.
musava:da veramaQI kusalarp_ Katamehi paflcahi?
pisuQ.8 vaca veramal)i kusalaf!l
Riipava ca hoti, bhogava ca hoti, silava ca hoti, dakkho ca hoti Hnalaso,
pharusa vaca veramaQI kusalarp. pajaflcassa labhati.
samphappaliipa verarnat)I kusalaQl (vaci-kammarp.)
lmehi kho bhikkhaVe paficahi 31pgehi samannagato puriso ekantamanapo
hoti nllitugamassati.
anabhijjhli kusai3Ql (S. N.l
abyapado kusalaQl
sammli-ditthi kusal3Ql (mano-kammaQl)
4. Paflcimani bhikkhave matugBmassa avel].ikani ctukkhani yani matugamo
paccanubhoti afiiiatr'eva purisehi.
ldarp. vuccatfiwso kusalarp.. Katamani paiica?
. Idha bhikkhave matug3ino daharo va samano patik.Ulrup. gacchati natakChi
Ime dasa cthamma "kusalakammapathii'ti namena pi n.atabba:. vma hoti. Idarp. bhikkhave matugiDnassa pathamarp avei)ikarp· dukkharp_ yam
matugamo pac<;anubhoti afiflatr'eva purisehi. ..
Katamancavuso kusalamillaiiJ.? Puna· ca parar:p bhlkkhave matugam.o utuni hoti. Ida!Jl bhikkhave
matugamassa. dutiyar:p aveQ.ikaiJI dukkhrup. yaJp. matugamo paccanubhoti aiifiatr'eva
Alobho kusalamfilaQl purisehi.
adoso kusalamfilaQl _ Puna ca paraQl bhikkhave mlitugilmo gabbhinl hoti. IdaQl bhikkhave
amoho kusalamfi.laql. matug8massa tatiyaQl avel].ikar:p dukkhrup. yatp. matugamo paccanubhoti aiifiatr'eva
Idarp. vuccatavuso kusalamOlarp: purisehi.
(M.NJ
Pun~ ca pararp bhikkliave matugBmo vijayati. IdaiJI bhikkhave matugBmassa
catutthatp. avel].ikarp dukkhar:p yar:p matugamo paccanubhoti aftfiatr'eva purisehi.
3. Pai'tcahi bhikkhave aQlgehi samanna:gato matugamo ekantfimanapo hoti
Puna c,a pararp bhikkhave matugamo purisassa pHricariyaiJI upeti. Idam kho
purisassa. bhikkhave matugamassa paiicamaiP- aveQikarp dukkhatp. yarp_ rna:ttigamo
Katamehi pancahi'! paccanubhoti ai'tflatr'eva purisehiti.
Na ca rtipava hoti, na ca bhogava hoti, na ca srrava hoti, alaso ca hoti,
· Imani kho bhikkhave paflca matugamassa avei)ikani dukkhani yani
pajaiicassa na labhati. m8tug8mo paccanubhoti aflnatr'eva purisehiti.
Imehi · kho bhikkhave paO.cahi aq1gehi samanna:gato m1itug3mo (S. N.)
ekantfimaniipo hoti purisassa. 5. Atha kho ra)a Pasenadikosalo yena bhagava ten'upasaqtkami. 1 •

Upasarpkamitva bhagavantarp abhiv3detva ekamantam nisidi. Atha kho afl.fiataro

Pancahi bhikkhave aq1gehi samanna:gato ma\Ugamo ekantamanapo hoti puriso. yena raja Pasenadikosalo ten'upasar:pka~. Upasrupkamitva raflflo
purisassa. Pasena~ikosalassa upakaooake arocesi. "Mallika deva devi dhitarar:p vij3tati. Evarp
Katamehi paflcahi? wtte . I!iiH Pasenadikosalo :anatta~ano . ahosi. Atha kho bhagava ra:janar:p
RU.pava ca hoti, bhogava ca hoti, silava Ca hoti, ctaklmo ca hoti analaso, PasenadikosalaQl anattamanatarp viditva tayaQl velayaQl ima gathayo abhii~: .
pajancassa labhati.
Imehi kho bhikkhave paflcahi aQlgehi samannagato matugamo Itthipi hi ekacci ya: - seyya posa: jan3dhipa
ekantamalliipo hoti purisassa. medh3vini silavati- sassu-deva: patibbata
tassa yo jayati paso - siiro hoti dis~mpati
Paiicahi bhikkhave arpgehi samann5gato puriso ekantamanapo hoti tiidiso subhariyaputto - rajjarp pi anusasatiti
matugamassa. (S. N.l
Katamehi pancahi?
159
'' 158

i,il I
 LESSoN XI lESSON XI

daharo young in years

GLOSSARY disampati king
·I afiflatr'eva outside of, exclusive of dukkhita afflicted
atita past, free from Xdeva having X as god, highly respecting
anatita not past, not free from devi goddess (hlso used for a queen}
1!: anattamana displeased dvihamata two days after death (dvi+aha+mata)
,,' anattamanat:a displeasure navutika ninety years old
analasa not lazy paccanubhoti undergoes, experiences
·alasa lazy, idle paja progeny, offspring
aveccappasada perfect faith, perfect clearness paiicama fifth
amra sick, diseased, miserable paJipada way, means, path, method, course
abadhika sick person patikula husbands family
aroceti , tells, informs patibbata a devoted wife
avel)ika inherent, peculiar, special palapo prattle, nonsense
fulitika eighty years old palitakesa having grey hair
utuni a menstruating woman palipanna -paripanna, ppL of paripajjati: 'falls into,
uddhumiitaka swollen, bloated, puffed up sinks into, wallows'
upakal)I,lake secretly pavedhati tremble
ekacci some, certain pijricariya serving, waiting on, attendance
ekanta complete, thoroughly pisuna calumnious, backbiting, malicious
II ekanamata a day after death (eka 'one' +aha' day(s) · poso man, male
IIi
+ mata Ppl of miyyati/miyati 'dies') pharusa rough, harsh, unkind
ettavata so far, to thclt extent balhagiliina grievously sick
kammapatho way of action, doing bbariyli wife
kaiisalJI excrement bh<igavant wealthy
khan\ladanta with broken teeth bhogga bent, crooked
khalita bald mana mind (inst manasa)
gatayobbana past youth, aged mahallaka old person
gatta · body, limbs miitugamo woman
.gabbhinl a pregnant woman muttaq1 urine
gatha verse, stanza medhBvini wise woman
(X )gamin leading to X, going to X (fern. -ini) rajja kingdom, realm
gopanasi rafter, gable raiiiio gen. sg.of rajan (see VI, 3)
-valJika crooked (like a gable) riipavant beautiful
janadhlpo king (of men) vaiJ1ka crooked
iata of the naUlre of valita wrinkled
X iata having become X vassasatika hundred years ol~
jatiya since birth, from birth vijata a woman who has giveri birth to a child
jit:u)_a frail, decrepit vijayati gives birth, brings forth
nataka relation, relative vina without
tadiso (-a) such, of such quality vinilaka bluish black, discolored
tilaka spot, freckle vipubhaka full of corruption and matter, festering
tihamata three days after death (< ti+aha+mata) vilfina cut off (of hair), scanty ·
dakkho (-a) clever. able, skilled ' (v)utthapiyama:na -mana participle of u(thlipeti lifts'
dan\la stick, staff, carie (the v may appear in sandhi after
-parayana leaning on. tottering on voweL'i)

:I.
160 161

,!II: ''
 '

I I LESSON X1

sarp.vesiyamana < S3IJ1Vesiyati puts to bed

:!1 saka
LESSON XII
' one's own
! ·'I '
sato (genitive sg. of sant- pres part of atthi)
, 'I
samano Evam me sutaiJl. EkaiJl samayarp Bhagava savatthiyarp. viharati .Jetavane
being, existing AnHthapii)<;Iikassa a:rame. Atha kho . Bhagava pubbal)hasamayai!l nivasetva
sampha frivolous, foolish pattacivaramadaya savatthllp paVISI. Tena kho pana samayena
pii)Qay;:~
sammaditthi right understanding Aggikabh3radv3jassa brahmaoassa nivesane aggi pajjalito hoti, ahuti paggahita.
:! -ditthln he who has sammaditthi Atha kho Bhagava . sa:vattbiyarp. sapadanarp. pii)_Qaya caramano yena
sassar mother-in-law (compounding stem sassu)
sirarp Aggikabha:radvajassa brahmaQ.assa niyesanarp. ten'upasarpkami. Addasa. ~o
i. silavati
head (accusative sifam or siro)
virtuous woman
Aggikabharadvajo brBhmano Bhagavantatp dllrato'va agacchantam.. diSvana
sDavant Bhagavantarp_ etadavoca: "Tatr'eva, mm;u;laka, tatr'eva samal)aka, tatr'eva, va.~~a~a.'
virtuous titthilhi" ti. Eva!Jl vutte Bhagava Aggikabhiiradvaja!Jl brahmal)a!Jl etadavoca: Janas!
subhariya good wife
sllro (-a)
pa"na tvarp, brBhmar;ta, vasalarp va vasalakaral)e va dhamme" ti.
valiant, courageous "Na khvaharp, bho GOtama, jfulBmi vasalaiP va vasalakaral)e va dhamme.
1: semana -ll)iin.a participle of seti 'lies'
seyya
sacthu me bhavaiP Gotamo tatha dhammaiP desetu yathaham janeyyaiil vasalatp
I
better va vasalakarane va dhamme' ti. 'Tena hi, briihmaJ)a, suQ.ahi, sadhukaiJl
banda well then, now m.lnaSikarohi; hhasissami"ti. "Evatp bho" ti kho .Aggikabh3radvajo brahmaQo
: ,1 1
Bhagavato pacc·assosi. Bhagava etadavoca:
. 'I
"Kodhano upanahi ca -- papamakkhi ca yo naro
vipannaditthl ni3y8Vi -- tarp. jaiiD.B 'vasalo' iti.
'•! i Ekaja!Jl vii dija!Jl va'pi -- yo'dha pill)a!Jl vihi!Jlsati
I I yassa pBIJ-e daya natthi -- tatp. jafli'la ·yasalo' iti.
Yo hanti parirundhati -- g3mani nigamarii ca
niggahako samaiiliato -- tarp. jaiilia 'vasalo · iti

I
Yo matararp va pitaraiJl va-- jioJJ,akaiJl gatayobbanaiJl
pahu santo na bharati -- tam jai'lfla 'vasalo' iti.
Yo matararp va pitararp. va -- bhataraJll bhaginilp sasurp
h3nti roseti vacaya -- taql jallfia 'vasalo' iti.

Rosako kadariyo ce -- papiccho macchari satho

Ahiriko anottapi -'- tarp jaiifla 'vasalo' iti.
· Na jacca vasal6 hoti -- na jacca hoti brBhmal)o
kammana:l vasalo hoti -- kammana hoti brahmai)o .... "

Eva!Jl vutte Aggikabharadvajo bPiihmal)o Bhagavanta!Jl etadavoca:- "Ab~nta!Jl~

bho dotama, abhikkanta!Jl, bho Gotama.' Seyyathapi, bho Gotama, rukkUJJita!Jl va
ukkujjey}ra, pat].cchannarp. va viVareyya, mlllhass~ _v~ · mag~a~.. acikkbeyya,
andhakare va telapajjotarp dha:reyya 'cakkhumanto rup~ dakkhin~ tl; - evameva
bhotii Gotamena anekapariyayena dhammo Pa}(Bsito. Es§harp bhavaf~:t~m. Gotamarp
saranam gaccha:mi dhammai'lca bhikkhu:mOghaflca; upasakarp:. m'arp. bhavarp
Gota~~ dhBretu ajjat'agge pap'upetarp saraQ.aiJl gatarp."ti.
(-SN)
' !

1 Alternative ablative of kammaqt

I
162
! : !
 LFSSON xn
2. "Kacd abhir)ha..:;arpvasa -- navafanasi paJJ.9itarp?
ukki.idhi.iro manussfulaQl -- kacci apacito tayil?'
'Niiharp. abhiohasarpvasa -- avaja:nami paoQitarp;
ukkadharo manussanarp. -- niccarp_ apacito maya.·
'pafi.ca kamagm_1e hitva: -- piyaiiipe manorame,
saddhaya ghara nikkhamma -- dukkhass'antakaro bhava.
Mitte bhajassu kalyllT)e -- pantaflca sayan8sanaq1
vivittaQl appanigghosarp.; -- mattailli.U hohi bhojane,
Civare piQ_QapBte ca -- ·paCcaye sayanftsane~ · k3mesumicchacara· pativirato hoti. musavacta pativirato hoti, silava hoti
etesu tal)harp m§kasi, -- rilli lOkaQl punar 'agami.
Sarp.yuto piltimokkhasmirp. -- indriyesu ca paficasu
satl kayagatilty'atthu 2 -- nibbidabahulo bhava.
I, Nimittarp. parivajjehi -- subharp rag(ipasarp.hitaql;
asubhilya cittarp. bhfivehi -- ekaggarp susamBhitaiP
I
Animittafica bhi.ivehi -- m~anusayamujjaha:
I f) tato milnfibhisamaya: -- upft:sahto carissasrti.
l !I
'I, Ittharp sudaiJl Bhagava ayasmantarp Rahularp. imilhi gi.ithahi abhi.Qharp.
ovadati.
~; I .'1
(SN)
l]i'
3. Atha kho Hyasma Anando yena Bhagava ten'upasamkami; upasamkarpitva
bhagavantarp. abhivadetva ekamantarjl nisldi. Ek.amantaiP nisinno kho ayasm.a
Anando Bhagavantarp: etadavoca:
"Tit)'imiini, bhante, gandhajatani, yesarp. anuvatai'lfieva gandho gacchati: no
pativiitaqL
Katamani tiQ.i?
Miilagandho, saragandho, pupphagandho. Imani · kho, bhante, 1ii)i
gandhaja:tani. yesarp anuvatailli.eva 3 gandho gacchati, no pativiitarp:.
. . Atthi nu kho, bhante, kifld gandhaiiitaiJl yassa anuvatampi gandho gacchati,
patJ.viitampi gandho gacchati, anuvata pativatampi gandho gacchati" .ti?
"Atth'Ananda. kifici gandhajiitarp yassa anuvatampi gandho gacchati,
pativatampi gandho gacchati, anuvatapativiitampi gandho gacchatf" ti.
"Katamaflca pana, bhante, gandhaj"ataQl yassa anuvatampi gandho gacchati,
pativiitarnpi .gandho ga_cchati, anuvatapat].vatarp pi _gandho gacchati" ti? . <RasV.l
2 te .+ atthu
3 rp. followed by-e may become -iiD- in
sandhi.
164
LESSON Xll
ldhilnanda, yastnirp game va nigame va itthi va puriso va buddhaq:t saraQ.am
gato hoti, dhammarp sarai).81Jl gato hoti. sarp.gQaqt saral)atp gato hoti. p8IJ.iltipata
pativirato hoti, adinnadana patlvirato hoti, kamesu micchacara pativirato hoti,
musavada pativirato hoti, suramerayamajjapamadatthana pat[virato hoti, silava hoti
kaly3IJ.adhammo, vigatamalamaccharena cetasa agaraQl ajjhavasati .. tassa disasu
samana briihmana vannam bffiisanti -- 'asukasmitp nama game va nigame va itthi
va p~riso va bu.ddhatlt· sa~aiJ.aQl gato hoti, dhammaJll saraiJ.aiJl gato hoti, saQl&haJll
saraiJ.aiP gato hoti, p3IJ.iltip3ta . pativirato hoti,. adinn3dana . pativirato hoti,
kaly31)adhammo, vigatamalam.accharena cetasa agararp. ajjhavasati ... " iti.
Devatilpi'ssa V3IJ.I:l8Jll bhasanti -- 'asukasmiip nama game va nigame va itthl
Vli·puriso Vii buddha"Q1 S8.1"8(1.81Jl gato hoti pe ... silaVii hoti kaly3l)adhammo,
vigatamalamaccharena cetasa ag3raJp. ajjhavasati'iti. .ldaQ"l kho taqt, _Manda~
gandhajataljl yassa anuvataljl pi gandho gacchati: pativatampi gandbo gacchati,
anuvatapatiVatampi gandho gacchatr ti.
"Na pupphagandho pa(ivatam'eti
Na candanarp. tagaramallika va
Satarp. ca gandho pativatam'eti
Sabba disa saPpuriso pavati"
<AN)
4. Savatthiyaqt Adinnapubbako nama brahmaT)O ahosi. Terra kassaci kiii.ci na
dinnapubbaQl. Tassa eko'va putto ahosi, piyo manapo. Brahmal)o puttassa
pilandhanaJll dB.tuk3mo "sace suval)l)akarassa 3cikkhissami, vetanam diitabbarp
bhavissatr ti sayam'eva suval)l)aqt kottetva, mattani kul)<;ialani katva ada:si; ten'assa
putto 'MattakUI)QaU'ti pafuiliyi.
Tassa sotasavassakiile paQ.c;lurogo udapadi. BrahmaQo venanaqt santikarp
gantvii "tumhe asukarogassa kiip bhesajjarp. karothil'ti pucchi. Te assa yaq1 vii taJp.
va rukkhatacildiQl acikkhirpsu. So taQl aharitva bhesajjarp. kari. TathH karontass'eva
tassa rogo balava ahosi. Br3hmal)O tassa dubbalabhBvaQ"l ftatva _ekaJP. vejjarp.
pakkosi. So tarp oloketva "amhakarp. ekaqt kiccarp. atthi; afui.af(l vejjciqt ·pakkositva
tikicch3pehi"ti vatva nikkhami.
Brahmano tassa · maral)8samayaQ"l D.atva "imassa dassanatthilya agatHgata
antogehe sa:paieyyarp. passissanti, tasma naQl bahi katissamrti puttarp ~~aritv~
hahi alinde nipajjapesi:. Tasmirp. kalakate. br3hmal)o .tassa sarirarp. Jhapetva
devas~ljl a!aha!laljl gantva 'l<ahaljl ekaputtakal kahaljl ekaputtaka"ti rodi.
GLOSSARY
Aggikabharadvajo a name of a Brahmin
ajjh.avasati u;habits
atip"ata slaying, killing
165
 .. ----.- : - - - -.....
i.
I

LESSON XII LESSoN xn

Anathapi!l\liko the name of the chief male lay-donor let one know (Optative 3 sg. of janati)
I of Buddha
jai\fia
frail, decrepit, old
jipj!aka
animittarp unaffected by outward signs or Jeta's park, Jeta's grove
Jetavana
appearance; literally ·objectless jhapeti bums
anuvatarp in the direction of the wind tagara a fragrant stuub
I'
'· anusayo proclivitY, disposition bark, hid<>.-Skin
taca
aneka many, various tikicchapeti gets ·someone to cure
antakara putting an end to (causative of tikicchati--see X. 6)
an to inside telapajjotaiJl oil lamp
apacita respected compassion, kindness
daya
. appanigghosa without noise twice-born one
dija
abhii)haiJl repeatedly, always pubbalabhiiva feebleness
abhisarnayo · realization, comprehension devasika occurring daily
avajanati despises, disrespects lukkuiiitaljl that which is turned upside down
asuka such arid such niggjjliako one who rebukes, oppressor
ahiriko shameless one
. ,II
nippajati lies down, sleeps
I 1

acikkhati tells, informs rubbicll! indifference, disenchantment

'
aharttva (from abarati) fetch, bring nimittaqt (outward) sign, omen, cause
aramo park, resort for pastirile, a private park niharati takes out, drives out
given to the Buddha or the Sangha pakaseti makes known, illustrates
lijabana cremation ground pakkosati summons, calls
ii)inda verandah pagg8I)hati holds up, ppl. paggahita
abut! oblation, sacrifice paccayo requisite (of a monk) (as well as 'means,
ukkli torch support, cause')
ukkujjati sets upright, rights (something) pajjalati burns (forth), blazes up. ppl. pajjalita
ujjahati gives.up paiiiiayati appears, becomes clear
upanabl one bearing_ ill-will or a grudge paticchannaiJl that which is covered, concealed
upasarphita possessed of against the wind
pativatal!l
upasamati is calm, is tranquil, ppl. upasanta paQ.QurOgo jaundice, anemia
ekagga calm, tranquil panta remote, solitary, secluded
eka-ja once-born pariynya order, course, method
kacci 'how is it, perhaps, I doubt' parirundhati completely obstructs, imprisons
(indefinite.interrogative particle parivajjeti avoids, shuns
expressing doubt or suspense) pavati blows forth
kadariyo One who is miserly, stingy pahu able
kamagur:ja sensual pleasureS patimokkha collection of disciplinary rules binding on
kiccam task, duty a reclUse
kul)\lalani earrings papamakkhl one concealing sin
ko!(eti pounds, beats one who has bad intentions, Wicked ,one
papiccho
gatayobbanaiJl old, aged ( < gata 'gone'+yobbanaiJl 'youth') a lump of food, alms giveh as food
pi!l<io
gandha (jatanD (kinds of). perfumes, odors piya dear ·
gatha verse pilandhanaiJl ornament
cakkhukaraQi producing insight putto sc;m
cakkhumant endowed with insight Oit. 'having eyes) (from balavant 'strong')
balava
candana sandal wood .bahula much, frequent
cetasa: Unst of ceto mind) bhagini sL~er

166 167
)
 LfSSON xn

bhajassu
2 sg. Imp. (middle) of bhajati lESSON XII

bharart 'keeps company with· SUV31JJ)a gold

bhatar bears, supports, maintains su val).I)kara , goldsmith
brother susamahita
bhesajjaiJl well-restrained,. well composed
macchara medicine seyya!hapi just as
matta avarice, envy
i,l
manorama polished, burnished GRAMMAR Xll
I mala delightful I. ubho 'BOlli'
mallika impurity, stain The form ubhaya ·both' that occurred in Lesson IX (Further Readings) is
matar jasmine
an adjectival form related to a pronominal form ubho, which occurs in this
I
mana mother rea<;ling, and has the following case forms, for all genders. As we might expect, it
. mananusaya Pride, arrogance, conceit takes plural agreement, since the dual of Sanskrit has been lost almost entirely in
I. ma~vin pred~sposition or tendency to mano Pmi (ubho and ubhaya are themselves remnants of the dual).
mUJ;l\lako deceitful person
mUJha 'a shaven-headed one'
rogo g?ne astray, confused, ignorant (one) Nom:
disease, sickness ubho I ubhe
rodati Rcc: . · ..

rosako cries, laments

angry, wrathful one Gen:
roseti ubhinnort~
'I
'i·
va(t(Ia!Jl bhasati irritates, annoys Dot:
I vasalako ' speaks well (of), praises Inst: ubhOhi lubhobhi
I
vasalo outcaste, wretch
Rbl: lubhehi I ubhebhi
yigata outcaste, person of low birth
vipanna gone away. ceased, bereft of toe: uhhosu lubhesu
vipannaditthi gone wrong, lost
2. asu 'A CERTAIN'
vivareyya ·· one with wrong views, heretic
(from vivarati open, uncover) asu has the sense ·a certain (one)' or 'such aod such (a one/ ones)' It has
vivitta both singular and plural forms:
vetanarp secluded
samvaso wages, hire
'satho association, co-residency, intimacy SINGULRR c
fraudulent one · Mosc.uline Neuter
sati kayagata Fe'mlnlne
santo mindfulness relating to the body
sapada:naiP peacefulness calm Nom: osulomu
osu I omu
in orde~, Without interrilption, lomuko a dull'
Without skipping any house Rcc: omurt~ ., omu'l'
samaiii'la:ta .. (m alms-begging of a Buddhist monk) Gen:
satnaJ;~ako
designated, notorious omuno lomusso omuyiilomussii
ascetic, recluse Oat:
sayanilsana (may have a connotation of lnst: omunii
sasura
bed and seat, lodging contempt) omuyii
father-in-law (ace. sasurp)
Rbl: omunolomumhiilomusmo
sapateyyaijl
sara wealth Loc: omumhl I omusmim omUSS81!'/ omU!J81!'
sa:vatthi essence, heart of a tree .

SUdarp a place name

subha indeed, just, even
pleasant, good

168
!
169

'· I.
. '
 LEliSON 1<fl LESSON Xll

evarp. vadantiya eva attario matuya sa kaflfta vapiyarp. nahayitul'Q. gacchi.

PLURAL
'Despite her mother's saying that, that girl went to the tank ( vapi) 5 to bathe,
Masculine Neute~ Feminine
(Note that here the subject of the genitive absolute attano matuya occurs after
Nom-Ace: amu/amuyo amu/amunl amii/amuyo its verb, the genitive (feminine) participle vadantiya. Such variable order is
Gen-Dat: omusorp/ amiisanarp possible for effect
lnstr Abl: omiihi I omubhi
5.COMPOUND PERFECTIVE FORMS:
Loc: orriiisu'
5J The past participle plus hoti gives the sense that the action of the participle has
, 3, GEMINATE CONSONANT CASE FORMS: jacca
been accomplished (much like English 'has gone, has done', etcL In thi.'
Feminine -i and -i stems with certain consonants before the -i or .-I may construction, the doer of the action will be ill the nominative case if the verb is
have· alternate case formS with the consonant doubled (geminated). This occurs in intransitive (i.e., has no object) and in the instrumental case if the verb is
those case fonns in which the consonant is followed by -iy-. The conSonants so
transitive, as in the instrumental subject sentence construction given in VI, 9. Both
affected-belong to ·the the dental or retroflex series, 4 most commonlY t, d, n or Q
the participle and hoti will agree with the subject, or, in the instrumental
and when the gemination occurs, the -iy-is lost and the consonant is changed as construction, with the appropriate noun (i.e., the object), just as in the participial
follows: sentences without hoti: ·
+ becomes -cc- so gehatp gato hoti 'He has gone home.·
-d- becomes -jj-
-n-, -Q- become -iili-. ena puflftarp katarp_ hoti
He has accumulated <literally 'done') merit'. or:
The remaining case ·ending is added directly to the geminate -consonant. Thus, for
I
example, for jati 'birth, caste', we may encounter the following forms (for the
Merit has been accumulated by hi,m. ·
regular forms see I,L23):
sa tattha gatii hoti 'She has gone there,'
Singular Plural
Nominative-Accusative: jacco sabbe bhiitii matii honti 'All the beings have died (or: 'are dead,')
Instrumental, Ablative, Dative: jacca
Locative: jacca, jaccarp. 52 The past participle plus bhavissati (in the appropriate gender, person and
Similarly, nacli 'river', has forms like najjo, najja, etc. number form) gives the sense 'might have', 'would have· or 'will have·. Note that
·,:!'I although bhavissati is a future form, . the sense of this construction is not
4, GENITIVE ABSOLUIE: necesarily future, but· it may indicate a presumption that something has already
The genitive absolute was introduced in X,l with a temporal sense. The occurred (compare English 'He will have gone by now,'L The case of the doer of
genitive absolute may also be used in the sense 'in spite of, even though' the action will be the same as in the construCtion with hoti, as will the agreement
although', In that use, the present participle is commonly used: ~ pattern:
mcima evarp. vadantassa eva me mitto tam g3maQ1 pahaya gacchi. so adhuua gato bhavissati, 'He will have gone (by) now,'
'In spite of my saying that, my friend left the village'
terra idaiJ) kataJJ). bhavissati. 'He must/might have done this.·
matapitunnarp. aSsumukhanaii) rudantanarp. so kumilro kesamassurp. oharetva
kasayani vatthani acchadetva agarasma anagariyarp. pabbaji. bahujana ettha agata ~havissanti. 'Many people will have come here.·
'bespite his parents' crying With te"arful faces, that prince shaving his hair and
beard (kesamassu) and donning (acchadeti) saffron robes (kilsayaru vatthani)
went forth from home to homelessness. ·

5 The term "tank" is commonly used in South Asia to refer to an irrigation reservoir or
4 i.e .. t, r d. g, etc--see atPI)abet and pronunciation section. temple pond,
/

170 171
 LESSON Xll
Fl)RTHER READINGS Xll
5.3 The future passive participle plus bhavissati gives the sense that .me action
should be or mu-st be done. In ·this construction, the doer of the action will be in DHAMMACAKKAPPAVATTANA SUITA 6
i
;i!i I the fustrumental case whether the verb is transitive or intransitive.
' '
-~1(
,I
Ekarp. _samayarp. Bhagava Bar8.t)asiy3lll viharati lsipatane Migadilye.Tatra kho
ii ' This action should be done by you.· Bhagava paficavaggiye bhikkhU amantesi -
I' I
' maya suve tattlw gantabbam bhavissati. Dve'me, bhikkhave, anta pabbajitena na sevitabba:
'I should/ must go there tomorrow ( suve) ·
li,; i Yo cayarp7 kamesu kamasukhallikfuiuyogo- hino, gamma. pothujjaniko.
I' 6. AGREEMENT WITH va 'OR' PHRASES: anariyo, anatthasarp.hito:
I,
6.1 When the relative demonstrative ·ya- occurs with a~ va 'or' construction, it will ii Yo c§yarp. attakilamathfumyogo- dukkho, anariyo, anatthasarp.hito
agree with the noun that it most_ nearly precedes:
I Ete te, bhikkhave. ubho ante anupagamrna majjhimli pa(ipada Tathagatena
ya itthi va puriso va 'Whichever woman or man abhisambuddha - cakkhukaral)I, llfu)akarani, upasamaya, abhiflilaya, sambodhaya,
but: nibbanaya sarp.vattati..
yo puriso va itthi va 'Whichever man or woman.. .'
d,'I Katama ca sa, bhikkhave, majjhim§ patipada Tath3.gatena
I' 6.2 When a va construction is the subject of a participle, the participle will agree abhisambuddha - cakkhukaral)i, firu)akarai)i, upasamaya, abhii"'tfla:ya, sambodhaya,
with the nearest noun (i.e., the last one in the series): · nibbanaya sarp.vattati?
yada itthi va puriso va Buddharp sarat)arp_ gato hotL.. Ayaqt'eva ariyo attharp.giko maggo- seyyathidam:
'When a woman or a man has gone to the Buddha·-refuge .. .'
but: Samma ditthi, samm~ sarp.kappo, samrna vaca, samma kammanto, samma
yada puriso va itthi va BuddhaiP sarm:mrp gata hoti ... ajivo, samma vayamo, samma sati, samma samacthi.
'When a inan or a woman has gone to the Buddha-refuge .. :·
Ayarp kho sa. bhikkhave, majjhima pa(ipada Tathagatena abhisambuddha "
Note, however, that the verb hoti is singular, since both elements in the- va .cakkhukaraJ)i, fiiiQ.akaral)i, upasamaya, abhifiDaya, sambodh3ya, nibbana:ya
construction are singUlar. sarp.vattati. ·

7. eso aharp. ldarp. kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkharp ariyasaccarp.:

Unlike in English. the demon!!fative (e)so may precede any of the personal Jatfpi dukkha, jara'pi dukkha, vyadhi'pi dukkha. maral)ampi dukkharp.
pronoun'i to giVe emphasis, i&., 'This (particular) I,' Therefore, eso aharp., so · appiyehi sampayogo dukkho. piyehi vippayogo dukkho, yamp'iccharp na Iabhati
aharp., so tvam., etc. tam'pi dukkhaiJl, sarp.khittena·paficllpadanakkhandha dukkl13.

ldarp. kho ~ana, bhikkhave, dukkha-samudayarp. ariya saccarp.:

6 This is the Buddha's first sermon after his enlightenment. in which he expOunded his
doctrine to five monks with whom he had been associated at an earlier time. and who
had remained followers of strict asceticism.
7 yo+ayarp. - 'just this'

173
172
 LE5SON Xll
YayaQI tai)ha ponobhavika nandirB.gasahagata tatra tatr8bhinandinf -
seyyathidarp_: - kB.matai)ha, bhavatai)ha, vibhavatal).ha.
(iii) TaQI kho pan'idarp. dukkhanirodharp ariyasaccaJp. sacchikatanti me,
ldarp. kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodharp. ariyasaccarp.: bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhurp. udap3di, fifu;larp. udapB.di,
I!'
paiiflii udapadi, vijja. udapadi, a.Ioko udapiidi.
II. Yo tassa yeva tal)ha:ya asesa-vir3ganirodho, cago, patinissaggo, mutt!,
ana~ayo . 4 (i) IdalJl dukkhanirodhagiimini pa(ipadii ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhave, pubbe.
.I ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuQt udapadi, fl3Q.arp udap3di, paf'Jfia udapadi, vijja
:i: ldarp. kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagamini patipada ariyasaccarp.: udapadi, iiloko udapadi.

Ayameva ariyo atthm)giko maggo - seyyathidam: - sarruna: ditthi. samma: (li) TalJl kbo pao'idalJl dukkhanirodbagamini paJipada ariyasaccalJl
sarp.kappo, samma vaca, samma kammanto, sa1Il!Il3 3jivo, samma: vayamo, sa.nuna: bh3vetabbanti me,· bhikkhave, ·pUbbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuQI udapiidi,
sati, samma samadhi. iiiil)alJl udapiidi, pai\i\ii udapadi, vijjii udapiidi. iiloko udapiidi.
I
• • • (ill) Trup kho pan'idam dukkhanirodhagamini pati,pada ariyasacca'rp. bhavitanti me,
I
(i)Idarp. dukkharp. ariyasi)ccanti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu bhikkhave, pubbe arianussutesu dhammesu cakkhurp. udapadi, i'tfu)arp. udapadi,
dhammesu cakkhurp. udapB.di, MQarp. udap3di, paiilia udap3di, vijja udap8di, a:Ioko. . pai\i\ii udapadi, vijja udapadi, iiloko udapadi.
ti
I udapiidi.
• • •
(ii) Taw kho pan'idarp. dukkharp artyasaccarp. pariiiileyanti me, bhikkhave, Yiiva kivaiica me, bhikkhave, imesu cati:isu .ariyasaccesu evarp. tiparivattaQl
pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhurp. udapadi,i'tal)arp. udapadi, pafliia udap3di, dvadasrucararp. yath8bhiitarp. flfu.mdassanarp. na suvisuddham ah0Si,.· n'eva tavaharp,
vijjii udapiidi, iiloko udapiidi. · bhikkhave, sadevake lake samarake sabrahmake sassamaQabrahmai).iya paja:ya
sadevamanussaya anuttararp. samma sambodhirp. abhisambuddho paccafiflasirp..
(iii) Tarp. kho pan'idarp. dukkharp. ariyasaccarp. pariflftatanti me bhikkhave,
pubbe _ananussutesu dhaminesu cakkhurp. udapHdi, fial)arp. udapadi,. pafifia Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu Catusu ariyasaccesu evarp. tiparivattarp.
udapadi, vijja udapadi aloko udapadi. ctvadas§kararp. yathabhiitarp.' nao.adassana!Jl suV:isuddhaQI ahosi, ath8.harp.,
bhikkhave, sadevake lake sama:rake sabrahmake sassamaQ..abrahmai)iya pajilya
2 (i) Idarp. dukkhasamudayaJP ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhave, pubbe sadevamanussa.Ya anuttararp. samm.a sambodhirp. ab~sambuddho paccai'tfliisirp..
ananussutesll dhammesu cakkhum udapiidi, nao.am udapB.di, pafifiii udapa:di, vijja
udapadi, aloko udapacti. N3QBflca pana me dassanarp udapadi, akuppa me cetovimutti ayarp. antima
jati, natthi'diini punabbhavo ti.
(ii) Tarp. kllD' pan'idarp_ dukkhasamudayarp_ ariyasaccarp_ pahatabbanti me,
bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhmp udapadi, fi3I).arp. udap3di, ldamavoca Bhagava. Attamaoii pai\cavaggiya bhikkhii Bbagavato bhasitalJl
pai\i\ii udapadi, vijja udapiidi, aloko udapadi. abhinandaoti.

(iii} Tarp kho pan'idarp. dukkhasamudayarp ariyasaccarp. pahinanti me, Imasmifl ca pana veyya:karao.asmilll bhai'tflamane ayasmato KoQc;laiiliassa
bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhurp. udapadi, fii'iQ.aiJ1 udap3di, virajam vitamalaQI dhammacakkhuw udapadi: "yarp.. kill.ci samudayadhammarp
pai\i\ii udapadi, vijjii udapiidi, iiloko uctapiidi. sabbalJl tall) nirodhadhamman"ti.

3 (i) IdalJl dukkhanirodhal!l ariyasaccaoti me, bhikkhave, pubbe Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata dhanimacakke bhumma deva
ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhurp. udapadi, fi.ai)arp. udapadi, pafifia udap3di, vijja saddamanussavesurp.:
udapadi, ·a:Ioko udapadi. ·
EtaiJl Bhagavata ·Bara.Qasiyarp IsiPatane Migadaye anuttaraiJl dhammacakkarit
,'i·i Tarp. kho pan'idarp. dukkhanirodharp_ ariyasaccarp. sacchik3tabbanti me,
(ii) pavattitarp appativattiyarp samaQena va br.ahmaQena va devena va marena va:
i . bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhurp. udap3di, fi3Qarp. udapadi, brahmuQ3 va keriaci va lokasminti.
I,
panna udapadi, vijja udapadi, aloko udapadi.
I

,.
I 174 175

I.
 u;<;SON XII
! LESSON XII
i
abhinandati rejoices, delights in
i Bhumma:narp devanam saddatp. sutva Ciitummaha:rajika deva8 abhinandinl finding pleasure in, delighting in (Fem.Sg.)
saddamanussavesuQl: abhisambuddha perfectly understood, fully realized
I Etarp_ Bhagavata Baral).asiyarp lsipatane Migadaye anuttar(!IJl dhammacakkarp. alliyati clings to, is attached to
!I pavattitarp appativattiyarp samaQ.ena va brahmai)ena va devena va marena va asesa without residue, entire
brahmut;tll va kenaci va lokasminti. akara condition, state
uctana emotional utterance, paean of joy
Oitummaharajikanarp deva:nam saddarp sutva Tiivatirpsa: cteva. - Yama cteva udartatp. udanesi uttered a paean of joy
- Ttisitil deva - - Nirnm.a:narati deva - Paranimmitavasavattino deva - upagamma having approached
Brahmakllyika deva saddamanussavesurp: upasama calmness
ubho both
Etarp Bhagavata Bara:Q.lisiyarp Isipatane Migactaye anuttararp dhammacakkaqt uta:ra lofty, noble
pavatt;itarp appativattiyarp sama.Q.ena va brahmal)ena va ctevena va marena va khaJ)ll moment, instant
brahmuQli va kenaci va lokasrn.inti. gamma low, vulgar, mean
gliminl leading up
lttha terra khaQ.ena terra layena terra muhuttena yava brahmaloka saddo caga giving up
abbhuggaikhi. Ayaflca dasasahassi lokadhi!tu sarpkampi sampakampi sampavedhi. cetovimutti mental emancipation
i\lir)akarai!I
giving right 4nderstanding, enlightening
Appami'iQo ca u}aro obhaso lake pilturahosi atikkamma devanrun flfu)adassana perfect knowledge
dev3m1bhavarp_. nandirliga ·passionate delight
paccaiiD.Hsiql l realized perfectly
Atha kho ,Bhagava: ucta:narp. uda:nesi: parifmata well, fully understood
pariiil\eyya what should be known, knowable,
Aflfia:si v'ata bho KooQ.aiilio, aiiliBsi vata bho KoiJcJafii'toti. parivatta ·a circle
pahlitabba what ought to be· given up
lti h'idaQl Byasmato KooQ.aiiliassa. Aflfla-"KOI)c,laiili.o tv' eva n8marp_- 1lhositi. pahina abandoned. destroyed
(-S. N.l pliturahosi appeared
punabbhava rebirth
GLOSSARY pothujjallika belonging to ordinary man
ponobhavika leading to rebirth
akuppa unshakable brahma Brahma, creator. Gen-Dat brahn~uno;
aflflnsi knew perfectly Jnstr. brahmuna
a(thatpgika eightfold, having eight constituents bhafiftamana being said
atikkamma passing beyond bhavataphli craving for existence/rebirth
attakilamatha self mortification bhi!vetabba what ought to be developed
ananussuta not heard of bhumma earthly, terrestial
aniilaya free from attachment muhutta moment
anussaveti proclaims yatha-'bhlitam as things really are
antima. last laya brief measure of time
an to end, goal, extreme vata surely, certainly
appa(ivattiya irreversible, not t9 be rOlled back Vilylima effort
appama:I)a unlimited vibhavataphli craving for extinction
abbhuggalichi rose up viraja free from defilement
abhii\iiii higher knowledge vitamala -stainless
veyylikara!)ll explanation, exposition
saljlkappa intention, purpose
8 CitummahiDiijika deva, Lavatirpsa deva., etc. are celestial beings that inhabit the deva
and brahma realms.
177
176
tE."50N xn
sarpkampati trembles GENERAL GLOSSARY
smphita possessed of, consisting of Numerals refer to m3in readings of lesSons, unless followed by .l, which indicates the
sacchikata is realized further readings of that lesson. The alphabetical order, as in other glossaries, is,
sacchikatabba ought-to be realized, experienced
samadhi {state of) concentration, a ail u II e orp k kh g gb (rp) c chj jh ill th 9 cjh~ t d th dhnp ph b bh my rl v s h)

sampakampati
sampavedhati
intense state of mind- and meditatioll
trembles, is shaken
shakes violently aqtgam 'component, constituent part,
................
(For more details, see the Introduction, Part D, Alphabet and Pronunciation.)
attaiP 'question, problem, lawsuit,
sambodha highest wisdom limb, member' 2 case' 10.1
sambntlhi enlightenment ai<ammaniya 'inactive, sluggish, slothful, atthaiJigika 'eightfold, having eigbt
samma properly, rightly lazy' 3.1 . constituents' 12.1
sevitabba to be practiced akaral:>am 'non-doing' 2 atthasi past of (titthati) 10.1
akiiicano 'one who has nothing, one who ru:u;lakarp 'egg' 10.1
is free from worldly attachment' 5 atakkllvacara 'beyond logic (or
akuppa 'unshakable' 12.1 sophistry), beyond the sphere of
akubbant 'non-doer' 9 thought, profound' 9.1
akusala 'bad, inefficient, sinful' I ati 'very, excessively' 10
akuslta 'diJigent, non-lazy' 2.1 atikkamma 'passing beyond' 12.1
akkamati 'steps upon, treads upon'; ppl. Atipru,u;lito a proper nmne 10.1
akkanta 10.1 atipata 'slaying killing' 12
akkhirp 'eye' 10.1 a(ipateti 'kills, fells' 7
agandbaka 'having no fragrance' 5 atirekatararp. 'much more' 10.1
agararp. 'house' 6 atirocati 'outshine, excel' 6
agariyabhiita 'being a householder' 6.1 atisithila 'too loose, lax' 6.1
agutta 'unguarded' 1 atlta 'past, free from' 11.1
aggarp 'tip, end' 10 atlto 'the past' 10
aggi ·fire' 7.1 attakilamatha 'self mortification' 12.1
Aggikabharadvajo name of a Brahmin 8.1 attan 'self' (reflexive) 6
accayata 'too long, too much ace. attanaiJI 4.1, 6, linstr sg. attana 'by
stretched' 6.1 oneself3.l, gen.sg attano 'one's own' 7
acdiraddhaviriyail). 'over-exertiOn, too attmnana 'delighted, pleased, happy' 7
much exertion' 6.1 attana.Ql 'self, soul' (accusative singular
acchariya 'wonderful, marvelous' 6 of attan) 4.1
acchariyarp_ 'a wonder, a marvel' 8 atthafifiU 'one who knows what is useful,
ajalru:u;likll 'goat's dung' 10 one who knows the correct meaning
Ajita name of a country ll or proper goal' 4.1
ajo 'a he--goat' 8 attbarp gahetvlina 'having held back or
ajjatagge 'from todaY on' given up profit or advantage' 6.1
(< ajjato+agge) 5.1 attharp. vadati 'characterizes, gives the
ajjhattarp 'inwardly, internally, meaning to' 3
subjective(ly)' 5.1 atthaya 'for the purpose of' < attho 8
ajjhabhasati 'address, speak' ll atthi ·(there) is' 3
ajjhavasati 'inhabit' 12 attho (-arp.) 'advantage, meaning, aim,
afijalikaral)lya 'worthy of respectful usage, use, welfare, gain, sense,
salutation' 5.1 purpose, advantage, (moral) gontl,
aiili.a 'other' l need' 1
aiili.atara 'one, somone,-one of a certain atha 'now, then' 2
number' 5.1 atha kho 'now, but, however' 2
ailii.ati 'Comprehend, discriminate' 2 atho - atha VI
aiiiiatra 'outside· 2 adanta· 'untamed' 1
ai'ifuitreva 'outside of, exclusive of' 11.1 adassana 'non-seeing, away from
aiiiiasi 'knew perfectly' .12.1 sight' 9.1
ailiio 'another, other (one)' 3 adinnarp 'ungiven thing' 3

178
GENERAL GWSSARY
adinnadarta(rp) 'seizing or grasping that
which is not given to one· 6
aduttha 'free from malice or ill-will' not
wicked 3.1
aduttho 'one who is characterized by
adul\ha 3.1
adoso 'non-ill-will, non-anger, non-
hatred, non-malice'. (a«!oso) 2.2
addasa 'saw· (Third singular past tense
of dakkhiti (passati) 'sees') 6
addhajhllma 'half-burnt' 10.1
addha 'certainly, verily' 9
adhama 'low, base, wicked' 4
adhigacchati 'finds, acquires, attains,
comes into possession of'; ppl.
adhigata; inf. adhigaotum 2
adhigal)hliti 'exceL'S,- surpasses' 6
adhitthahati'concentrate, fix one's
attention on, undertake, practice' 6.1
adhi((hati 'attend to' 2 ( -adittahati)
adhipajjati 'attains, reaches, comes to' 6.1
adhivaha 'bringing, entailing' 3.1
X-adhivaha 'entailing x· 3.1
anatita 'not past, not free from' 11.1
anattamana 'displeased 11.1
anattamanata 'displeasure' 11.1
anatta 'not a soul, without a soul,
non-substantial' 7.1
anattho (arp) 'disadvantage,
· pointlessness, meaninglessness
unprofitable situation or condition,
harm, misery, misfortUne' 1
ananussuta 'not heard of' 12.1
anabhijjha 'absence of covetousness or
desire' 3.l
anabhijjhalii 'one characterized by
anabhijja 3.1
analasa 'not lazy' 11.1
anavajja 'not blameworthy,
not faulty' 2.2
anavatthita < an + ava + tthita 'not
steady, not well composed' 8
Anathapil)<)iko name of the chief
male lay-donor of Buddha 8.1
ana:dano 'one who is free from
attachment' 5
anadaya 'without taking or accepting' 6
anillaya 'free f-rom attachment' 12.1
anasavo 'one free from the four asavas:
(see glossary 9)
animittall) "'objectless'' not affected by
outward sense or appearance' 12
anutappa 'to be regretted'
(from anutappati) 6
180
anutappati 'repents' 8
anuttara 'incomparable, excellent' 4.1
anudhammacarin ·one who acts in
·accordance with the Dhamma·
nOm. sing. anudhammacart 4
anupBdiyati < an +upadati ('grasp) 'does
not cling (to earthly things'), pres pan.
anupBdiyBno, ger.anupadaya . 4
anuppatta 'having reached'
(<anupBpuoati 'reach, attain') 6
anuppanna 'nof having_ come into
being' 1
anuppado 'nOt coming into existence,
non-existing' 1
anuyufljati 'practises, gives oneself up to
attends, pursues' 7
anuyogo -'application, practice,
employment' l.l
anurakkhati 'guard, protect, watch' 7.1
anuva:taiJI 'in the direction of the
wind' 12
anu·sayo 'disposition, proclivity' 12
amisasati 'advises, counsels,
admonishes' 8
anussavaiJI 'tradition, hearsay· 7
aneka 'many, various' 12
anekarpsikata 'uncertaintly,
doubtfulness' 7.1
anotappin 'reckless, not afraid of sin,
remorseless' nom. sing. masc. anottappi
(also anottiipi) 2.2
anta ·end, goal' ll
X anta 'having X as its end' ll
antakara 'putting an erid to' 12
antarato 'from within _
(ablative of antara 'within') 6.1
antare 'in between, mUong' 10
antaradhBnarp '.disappearance' J.l
antalikkharp 'atmosphere' 11
antima last' 12.1 · abhiiii\a 'higher knowledge' 12.1
anto 'inside' 12
anto 'end, goal, extreme' 12.1
ant~yarp 'behind the curtain· 10
andhakaro(-am) 'darkness' 7.1
andhatamaii) 'deep darkness' 6.1
andhabllilta 'blinded, (mentally) blind,
ignorant' 4
anveti 'enters, follows' 9
apagata 'is away from, desists from· 9.1
apacita 'respected' 12
apadeso 'argument, reason' ?
apaneti 'removes, leads away' 10.1
aparabhago 'later time, later' 11
apayamukharp. ·c~use of ruin' 9.1
apayo 'calamity, a transient state of loss
and woe after death' 7.1
api 'even, but, still' 5 .
api (pi) 'also' 7 .
apita (api + ca) 'further, moreover,
furthermore' 7.1
appa 'little'
appasmhn dadati see Grammar 7
appaka 'little, few· 2
appam ·(a) little, not much' 4
appativattiya 'irreversible, not to be
rolled back' 12.1
appaniggbosa 'without noise' 12
appamatto 'one who is diligent' 4.1
· appamaoa 'unlimited· 12.1
appamattakarp ·'even a little' 10
·appamado 'diligence, e~rnestness' l.l
appatamkata 'freedom from illness' 9
appabadhata 'good health' 9
appiya 'disagreeable or unpleasant
(person or thing)' 3.1
appo' ·a few' 4 . ones' 4
aphala 'fruitless' 5
aphasukam 'difficulty, disease' 10.1
abbana < a + vana- 9
abbhuggacchati 'goes forth, goes out,
rises into'; past abbhuggai\chi 8.1
abbhuta 'exceptional, astonishing,
marvellous, surprising' 8
.-aby'apannacitto 'one whose mind is free
· from malice or ill-will' 3.1
abyapado 'non-ill-will, benevolence,
non-anger' 3.1
abhavita 'uncultivated, not developed,
untrained' 10
abhikkantam 'excellent, superb,
wonderfui 5.1
abhijjh.a 'covetousness' 3
abhiobam 'repeatedly, always' 12
abhinandati 'rejoices (over), delights in,
approves of 9
abhibhavati 'overcome' ger. abhibhuyya;
ppl. abhibhilta 7
abhibhilta 'overcome,overwhehned by'6.l
abhivaddhati 'increases' 7 .·
abhivassati 'rains (down, sheds rain' 6
abhivadeti 'salutes, greets, shows
respect' 8
abhisambuddha 'perfectly understood,
fully realized' 12.1
abhisambudbano 'one wbo
understands' 9.1
amatarp. 'ambrosia' or' the deathless
181
GENERAL GLOSSARY
state· 4.1
amatapadarp 'the region or place of
ambrosia, the sphere of immortality' 4.1
amiilho ·one who is not confused' 3.1
amoho 'non-confusion, clarity of mind'
( <a+moho) 2.2
ambho look here, hey, hello' 10.1
ayall) 'this one' (also anaphoric) 3
ayogu!o 'iron ball' 5.1
ayya ·worthy one, honorable one' 10.1
arakkhita 'unprotected, unwatched' 1
araflfiam 'forest, woods' 7
arahati 'deserves' 10.1
arahant 'deserving one, one who has
attained absolute emancipation' ~
nominative singular araharp.
or arabli 4.1
ariya 'noble, distinguished' 2
ariyasaccam 'noble truth' 7.1
ariyasa:vika 'a noble female devotee, a
female disciple or devotee of the nOble
ariyassa vinaye 'in the teaching of the
noble one' or 'the way of life of the
noble ones' see glossary 9.1
ariyo 'noble one, exalted one' 4.1
aruo'uggamanam 'dawnlight' tO
alasa 'lazy, idle' UJ
alilddho 'non-covetous person' 3.1
alobho 'non-greed, non-covetousness'
( < a+lobho) 2.2
alia ·wet' 9.1
alliyati 'cling to, attached to' 12.\
avakaso 'possibility, space,
(there is a) possibility' 5
avaca 'said' 9.1
avacaro 'one at home in,
conversant with' 7.1
avajanati 'despises, disrespects' 12
avabujjhati 'realize, understand' 6.1
avijja 'ignorance' 3
avijjagata 'ignorant (one)' 2
avija:nanto 'not knowing, not
understanding
< a + vijB.nanto
avidilre 'vicinity, nearbi 10.1.
aviddasu 'ignorant, foolish' 4
aveccappasada 'perfect faith, perfect
clearness' 11..1 . ,
avoca third singular past of vatti., says,
· speaks' 5.1 . .
asamvuta ·unrestramed l
asarinnoso 'non-bewilderment, non-
confusion 1
 GENERAL GLOSSARY
asuka 'such and such 12
asesa 'entire, without renmant' 12.1
assa gen. sg. of aYllJ!l 7
assa 3 sg. -ya optative of atthi. 8
assaddha 'not detennined, not faithful' '
(<a+saddha) 2.2
,,
.·II .. assamiya 'belonging to a monastery or.
hermitage· 6
assamo 'monastery, hermitage, ashram· 6
assarilpakarp 'image or· picture of a
horse· 10
assumukha 'with a tearful face· 8
asso"'horse' 10
! :
ahal]l T 1
ahitall) 'harm· 3
ahirika 'shameless, without modesty' 2.2
ahosi ·was, occurred' (past of hoti) 9.1
iikal]lkhati ·desires' ll
akac)c)hati 'drags, pulls' ll
akiira 'conditi6n, state' -12.1
iikiisadhiitu 'space.element, space, sky' 6
ilkilso(al]l) 'outer space, sky' 8.1 . aroceti 'tells, informs' ll.l
_agacchati 'comes' . aropeti 'leads up to' ll
(pres pan. agacchanta) 3
acariyo 'teacher' 10
aclldthati 'tells, informs' 12
ajanati 'grasp, understand' 9.1
~lva 'life, living, livelihood'4
Gtura 'sick, diseased, miserable' 11.1
adati 'takes' ger. adaya 10.1
iidiitukama 'eager to/ desirous of putting
together (a ritual) 8
adanal]l 'grasping, putting up, placing' 8
adaya 'taking, having taken' 10.1
iid.i 'etcetera· 10
aditta 'burning, blazing' 5.1
adiyati 'takes up, takes upon· 3
Anandacetiyal!l 'Ananda monastery· 9
Anando Ananda, a disciple of Buddha 8
ilnisall)so(al]l) 'advantage, good result/
good consequence' 8
iipajjati 'anive at, reach,meet' 10
ApaiJ.o place name 6
abadho 'disease, affliction., ll
abadhika 'sick person· ll.l
abba 'shine, luster, sheen· 6
ama ·yes· 3
iimanteti ·'calls, addresses',
past iimantesi 9
amisal]l 'material substance, food,
flesh,sensual desire, lust ' 4.1
amisa.garuko 'one who attaches
importance to material things, ,items of
enJoyment or food,a greedy person· 7.1
182
iimisacakkhuka 'one intent on or inclin"ect
to material enjoyment' 7.1
a~~~~~'i:.;dishonor, disgrace, bad
iiyasmant ··venerable (one)', nom. sg. ·
ayasma (used as adjective as a
respectful title of a Bhikkhu of some
standing) 8
ayul!l 'long life, vitality, longevity' 4
·Instr. ayuna 'by longevity, duration of
life' 6
arati 'abstention' 5
araddha 'begun, well begun, (well)
undertaken· 9.1
araddhaviriya 'energetic, res·olute' 6.1
arabhati 'begin' ( viriyal]l .. .'take effort,
strive') 1
aram.o 'park, resort for pastime, a
private park given to the Buddha or
the Sangha' 8.1
ilruhati 'to climb' 10.1
alayarata 'lustful, delighting in desire' 9.1
alayarama 'clinging to lust' 9.1
alayasamudita 'arisen from desire,
craving' 9.1
aloko 'seeing, sight, light' 7.1
avahati 'for <avahati) 'brings, entalls'
with metrical length ll
avaho 'wedding (bringing the bride)' 6
avlla 'stirred up, agitated, stained,
disturbed' 4
iivuso 'friend, brother, sir' a fonn of
polite address (usually between ·
monks) 9
avel)ika 'inherent, peculiar, special' ll.l
a:sanam 'seat' 6
iisavo 'that which flows (out or onto),
clinging,• desire' A technical term in
Buddhist psychology for certain
specified ideas which intoxicate the
mind. 4.1
asitika 'eighty years old' ll.l
iiha 'said' 10
aharati 'bring' ger. abaritva 10
abarapeti ·cause to bring' 10
ahara 'food' 10.1
ahu '(they) say or said' 6
abutl 'oblation, sacrifice· 8.1
ahuneyya 'venerable, worthy of
offerings' 5.1 ·
lQavako name of a demon ll
l\javi a place name ll
ajabana 'cremation ground' 12
alindo (alindo) 'veraiJ.dah' 12
iiPgha 'come on, go. on, look here, go
abead,' particle of exhortation 8.1
icchati 'desires, wishes, likes. (for)'. ppl.
icchita 6.1
iccha 'desire' 3.1
itara '(th•) other (one)' 10
itikira. 'hearsay, mere guesswork' 7
ito 'from here, hence' 8.1
ittara ·unsteady, fickle, changeable' 7.1
lttaratii 'changeableness· 7.1
itthi ·woman· l.1
itthiriipatp. 'woman as an object of visual
perception, female beauty l.1
ftthisaddo 'the sound of a woman, .the
word woman· 1.1
idam 'this' 3
idapaccayatii 'having its foundation in
this, causally connected' 9.1
idlini 'now' 10.1
idba 'here, in this world, now· 2
indriyal]l 'faculty (of experience or ·
perception), senses· 4.1
iva 'like, as· 4
issatthal]l 'bow, arChery.' 5
iha 'here, now, in this world' 6.1
ukkil 'tOrch' 12
ukkujjati 'turns upright, tigbts
(something)'
uggal)hliti 'learns' 9
Uggatasaiiro name of a Brahmin.
Literally 'with uptight body' 8
ucca 'tall; high, lofty' 8.1
ucc3yo 'heaping up, accun;mlation' 9
ujujlitika 'straightforward, honest' ll
ujjahati 'give up· 12 ' upasanto 'being calm: 12·
u!!habati 'rise, get up· (alternate form
vutthahati,vut!bati ) 9.1
utthapeti 'lifts' (alternate form· . having arrived at having taken upon
vunapeti) pres pl. unapiyamlina ll.l
ul)ha ·warm, hot' 10
. utuni ·a menstruating woman' 11.1
uttama ·noble, best, highest' 4
uttara 'northern· 3.1
uttiina 'plain, open, evident, superficial,
shallow· 4.1
udakam 'water' 4.1
udapadi::arose,' (preterite of uppajjati
'arise') 6.1.
udabindu 'drop of water' 6.1
udana .·emotional utterance, paean of
joy· 12.1
udiinaQl udiinesi uttered a paean of
183
GENERAL GLOSSARY
joy· 12.1
uddhal]l 'up, above' 10
uddhaccam 'overbalancing, agitation
excitement, distraction, flurry· 6.1 '
uddhata 'unbalanced, disturbed,
agitated' 4.1
uddhanatp. 'fire hearth, oven' 6
uddharati ·raise, lift up· 7.1
uddhumataka 'swollen, bloated,
puffed up· ll.l
unnaja ·arrogant, proud, showing off' 4.1
upakaooake 'secretly' ll.l
upakkileso 'defilement, taint, mental
impurity' 4
upakkhata 'prepared, ready,
administered' pp. of upakarcti 8
upagamma 'having approached' 12.1
upajivati lives on, .depends on' 5
upatth3narp. 'attendance, waiting
upon.'10.1
upaddaveti 'cause trouble' 10
upadhi 'substratum (of rebirth), clinging
to rebirth, attachment' 4.1
upaneti 'brings up to/into, offers,
presents' ppl.' upanita 8
upapajjati 'arises, is born, comes into
existence, originates, gets to, is reborn
in (alternate form uppajjati)' 7.1
upama 'like, similar' X-upama =-' like X,
simllar to x· 9.1
upamii 'analogy, simile, example' 4.1
upari 'above, on, upon, uppef 10.1
uparima 'upper, above. overhead' 9.1
upasarpkamati 'approaches, goes near';
past upasarpkami 5.1
upasarp.hita 'possessed of 12
u:Pasama 'calmness' 12.1
upasampajja 'having stepped onto,
oneself 3.1
upasampada 'acquisition, att~ent,
higher ordination of a monk' 2
upayo 'method, way out, trick' 10.1
upasako 'lay-devotee, practicing
Buddhist' 5.1
upekkhaka 'indifferent, disinterested' 5.1
upeti 'approaches, attains, reaches' ·
(the ppl. upeta has the sense'endowed'
with') 5.1 .
uppajjati 'arises, is born, comes _into
existence, originates, gets to, ts reborn
in' (alternate form upapajjati) 1
uppajjamana ·'arising, being born~ 7.1
 I
I

GENERAL GWSSARY GENERAL GLOSSARY

uppanna 'having come into being' e~~~7 '(of this form), such, of this kira 'it is said,.truly, really'
X karai)a • 'making X' 8.1
hence 'existing' 1 ' (reportative particle) 10
karisam 'excrement' 11.1 kiriyli 'doing, action' 8.1
upPade~ 'produces, makes, give esa 'that' alternate form of eso· karoti 'does, mlikes' kili!!h31Jl 'foulness, impurity' (neuter ppl.
.nse to 11 (nom. sg. niasc. 2 2nd person imperative sing. karohi, 3
',, uppljdo 'arising, birth, coming into esa:n~ 'se~rching for, eager for' 11 of kilissati 10
optative kliyira 9. kilissati 'becomes soiled', stained or
',,1 eXIstence) l , eJamu~ :qot receptive to that docuine kalahajata 'quarrelsome, dispu('ing' 4.1
I, . ubhaya 'both' 9.1 · stupid' 2 ' kalaho 'quarrel, dispute' 4.1
impure ,does .wrong' 8
I ubhayattha 'in both places' 10 okaso 'occasion, time' n Kalandakanlvapa a place name
kileso ·defilement, impurity (in a moral
I
ubho 'both' 12.1 ~ti 'd~scends, enters into' 9 (literally, 'squirrel feed') 9.1 sense)' 6.1
uyyanall) 'park' 10 otanyamana ~that which is caused to be KaJasigiimo a place name 8.1
kidisa 'how, in what manner' 10.1
I
urabho 'a ram' 8 · brought down' 9 katapa 'a bundle, a bunch, a sheaf, a kiva 'how much, how many,
usabho 'bull, ox' 8 otiireti 'bring down, lower' 9 how great' 8.1
row' 6.1 kl!ati 'to play' 10.1
usu.!'aro ·~ow-maker, fletcher' 4.1 ottappaiJI 'shrinking back from doing kilamat'ho 'fatigue, exhaustion' 9.1
'i ussa~ . erection, putting up' 8 wrong, remorse' 6.1 knkkuro 'dog' U .
kalyBQ.a 'good, auspicious, morally kujjhati 'be angry (with), be irritated' 7
uS1lli!Jct1 rruse, lift up, erect' 8 otappin 'not reckless afraid of sin good' 4
ujara lofty, noble' 12.1 ~T'pulous (nom. sing. masc. ottappl) kalla 'dexterous, smart, clever' 3.1 kuiijaro 'elephant' 7.1
iih~ ·~easoning, consideration kutila 'crooked, dishonest' U
exammation' 6.1 ' kasma 'why' 7 kul)(lal31Jl 'earring' 12
'1]1 opammarp. 'simile, example' 3 Kasmlral!l a place name, Kashmir 8.1
eka 'one, single, only' 1 obhaso. 'shine, splendour, luster. kuto 'whence, from where' 4
kassako 'husbandman, farmer,
I ekaka 'being alone' 10 ef~ulgence. appearance' 7.1 cultivator' 5
kudlicana 'any day, ever' 2
· kuddho ·angry one' 6
' ekagga 'calm, tranquil' 12 obhasanaiJI 'shining' 7.1 k3magul)3 sensual pleasures t2
'
ekaggacitta 'of conceiltrated mind olambati 'hangs (from) suspends' 10 I lrubbanta 'doer, one that practices' 5
kllmo (-31J1) '(sense) desire' 4
of tranquil mind' 4.1 ' · oloketi 'looks (at) 10 · kumliraka 'young boy' 10.1
kliyika 'felt. by !'he body, physical' 4.1
ekag~a 'compact, solid, hard' 4 ovadati 'advise, admonish instruct kumbho 'frontal lobes of an elephant' lO
kliyira optative of karoti 9 I kulal!l 'lineage, clan, family, household' 6
ekacct some, certain' 111 exhort' 8 ' '
kliyo 'body' 3 kusala 'virtuous, good, efficient, skilled' 1
ekacce 'some, a few' 6 · kacci 'how is it, perhaps, I doubt' kafaprup.'reason, cause' X.l
eka-ja ·once-born'· 12 (mdef.mterrogative particle expressing kusalal!l 'virtue, good (action), merit' 2
ka:reti 'causes to do constructs, makes' 10
ekato 'together' 10.1 doubt or suspense) 12 kuslta 'ind_olent, lazy' 2.2
klil31Jl karoti 'pass away, die' 9.1
ekanta 'complete, t'horoughly' 11.1 kat!haiJI 'wood, firewood, stick' 6 klilassa eva 'in early morning' 9.1 kuhil!l 'where' 8.1
ekamantam.. aSide, on one side' 6J kata ppl. of karoti 10 kil!llglirasrua 'gabled house, pavilion' 8.1
klilakata 'dead' 8.1 Keniyo proper name 6
eklisanabh<;>taJ13ltl 'taldng only a single katapuflfto 'doer of pure deeds or klilakiriyli 'deat'h, passing away· 6
meal(solid food) a day'; (ace.) 9 good actions' 10 keso 'hair' (normally in !'he
Kalama proper name, K.alamas, 7 plural, kesli) 9.1
eklihamata a day after deat'h kataiii\utii 'gratitude' 5 klilaiiilil 'one who knows !'he proper
l<.eka :one+ aha 'day(s)'+ mata (ppl of katama 'which, what' 2 ko 'who whichever person·· 3
time' (for something)4 koci 'any (one), some (one)' (ko + ci) 3
nnyyati/mlyati) · U.! kattari 'pair or scissors' 10 klilo '(proper) time, morning' 4
eke 'some, a few· 4 katva 'having done or made' 6 kocideva 'some (one) or other'
instr. kruena 'in time, at !'he proper (ko + ci + eva, with -d- inserted) 3
eko 'alone' 7 kat'ham 'how' 3 time' 6
e!al!l 'this, this t'hing' 2 kat'haQI jlvirp 'leading what kind of life kiip 'what'· (neuter singular of ka koti 'end' 10.1
etad -etam 6 which way of living?' n ' as an interrogative particle 3
kotteti 'pound, beat' 12
etadaggaiJI ··this (or this one) is best' 41 kat'ha :st?ry, speech, Wte, talk' 10 kiiplakkh3Q31Jl ·of what nature, of what kotthliso 'share' 10.1 .
eta(lavoca < etad (:oetam) + avoca 51 . katheu speak, talk' 10 kodhana 'having anger, angry (one),
characteristic' (< kiip 'what'+1al<kha1)3111
etad~osi 'such a thought occurred i.o kadariyo 'one who is miserly stingy' 12 'feature' ) 3.1
uncontrolled (one)' 6.1
one 9.1 kadalipatiaiJI 'banana leaf 10 i kiCcam 'task, duty' 12
kodho 'anger, ill will' 6.1
etilivatii 'so far, to !'hat extent' U.! ~ ·a~tion, deed, actio~ as related kii\cal13ltl 'any' 6.1 -·
kosajjaiJI 'idleness, slot'h, indolence' 1.1
e~a~~~e, Ill this context, in relation to rebirt'h <.among many me'!nlngs) 2.2 khaJ)a 'moment, instant' 12.1
kii\cano 'worldly atiachment, a trifle' 5.1
kannnakileso depraVlty of action, bad khal)ati 'dig, uproot' 7
kitilivlita 'in what respect, in what khai,IliDto 'digging, one who digs' 6
et'ha. 'come' Second P.,rson plural of eti 7 works' 9.1 sense' 6.1
eva verily, mdeed' (emphatic particle) 1 kammaiiiia 'fit for work ready for · khal)Qadanta wit'h broken teet'h U.l
kitti 'fame, renown, glory' 8.1 khattiya 'of !'he wanior U<shatriya)
CvaiJl 'thus' I · playing' 6.1 ' '
kittisaddo 'sound of fame, praise,
evmp wtte 'when it was said thus' kammaniya 'ready, active' 31 renown' 8.1
caste' 8.1
Ooc. absolute) 8 kammantarp_ 'business, activitY' 2 khatiUI!l 'times' (as in ti khatiUI!l 't'hree
kinnn 'why, but why, is it (!'hat), how is· times') U ·
e~eva ·~ven so, jUst so, in sirililar kamm~Pl'lt'ho 'way of action/doing' ll.l
it !'hat' ( < kim + nu) 3 khanti. 'patience, forbearance' 5
~m:mer • m the same manner kamrnin one who acts, doer· 9 kinnukho 'why·, what for, what is it
similarly' 2 ' karai)a 'making, causing, producing'; khandha\lhikal!l 'backbone, back' 10.1
then' (< kiq1 + nu + kho) 6

184 185

GENERAL GLOSSARY
khamati 'is fitting, seems good 5J
khayo 'end, cessation' 9.1
khalita 'bald' UJ
khlll).u 'stake, spike' !OJ
khadanlya 'eatable' 10
kbipati 'throws (away), puts, confuses
(the mind)' 10
khippa!Jl 'soon, quickly' 7J
khll)a 'exhausted, over, finished' 10
khlrlll!l 'milk' 4,1
khlrodak!1Jhilta 'like milk and water, (at
harmony as milk and water blend 4J
i:
khuddaka 'smail' 10
' khettaq1 'field, sphere' 5J
'
: i
kho 'emphatic particle' 2
i: gacchati 'go'; ppl. gata, ger. gantva 1
1'1
:I gal)aYIII!l 'counting' 4
gal)eti 'counts, reckons' 4
,,
i
gai)o 'group, multitude, crowd' 10
,,li
,r, gal)hati 'picks up, takes'; ger. gahetva 5J
I, gatayobbana 'past youth, aged' UJ
gatia!Jl 'body, limbs' !OJ
gandho/a!Jl 'odor, scent, smell' 1.1
gandha jatani 'kinds oT perfumes,
odors' l2
gabbho 'womb' 7
gabbhini 'pregoant woman· UJ
gambhlra 'deep' 4
gamma 'low, vulgar, mean' 12J
garahita 'despised, condemned,
not approved' 3 ·
garu· 'venerable person, teacher''?
garuka 'heavy, important, bent on,
attaching importance to' 7J
garukaroti 'respect, consider
seriously' 9.1
gahapati 'householder, a man of private
(i.e. not official) life' 8,1
gahapatika 'belonging to the rank of
a householder, a member of the
gently' 8
gahapatiputto 'a man of the ntiddle class,
a nobleman, a householder' 9.1
gahetva(na) ger. of gaphati 6J
gatha 'verse, stanza' UJ
X giintin · leading to, going to X
(fentinine -ini)' UJ
gamini 'leading up' 12J
gamo 'village' 5
g3ravo 'reverence, respect, esteem' 5
g3vo accusative pl. (irreg.) of go 'cow' 4
gilati 'swallows' 10
gihin 'householder, layman';
compounding stem gihi 4,1
186
, I
d
g[va 'neck, throat' !OJ
gopa 'quailty, nature, component' 6J
gutia 'guarded'; ppl. of gopeti 1
guyha 'to be hidden, that which is
hidden, secret' 7J
gehaiJl 'house, dwelling, household,
hut' 7J
gocara 'sphere, range' 4.1
gol).o 'ox' !OJ
Gotama 'one of the Gotama family, the
family name of Buddha'. 5
gotialjl 'ancestry, lineage' 8
gopanasi 'rafter, gable' UJ
gopanasivaljlks 'crooked (like a
gable)' UJ
gopiilako 'cowherd' ll
gupo 'cowherd' 4
gorakkha 'cow-keeping, tending the
cattle' 5
ghaljlseti 'to rub against' 10
ghato(a!Jl) 'pot' 10
ghatayati 'causes to kill' 4J
ghiinlll!l 'nose' 3.1
ghayati 'smells' 3,1
ghoso 'noise, sound' 6
ca 'and, also' 1
caia 'unsteady, ficlde' 7J
cakka!Jl 'wheel, wheel as a symbol of
conquering efficacy' 4.1
cakkavattin 'universal monarch·
'Nom. sing. cakkavatti 4J
cakkhum 'eye' 2
cl)kkhu karal)i 'producing insight' ?
cakkhumant 'endowed with insight'
(literally 'having eyes') ?
catu 'four' 4
catuttha 'fourth· 4
catuttha!Jl 'for the fourth time' ll
candana 'sandalwood' 12
cando 'moon' 6
capala 'unsteady, fickle, vain' 4.1
capalata 'fickleness,unsteadiness' 7.1
carati 'moves about, behaves, conducts
(oneself), leads, , practices,
carries out' 7 · iala 'slow, ~tupid' 2
carltnp. 'behavior, character' 7J
carito 'one who has -a character';
X-carita .. 'one who has the character of
X kind' 7J
calita 'wavering, unsteady' 7J
cavati 'fail (away)' 2.2
caga 'giving up' 12J
Ciigo 'liberality, generosity' 6
carika 'wandering, jou~ey, sojourn· 6
cilleti 'shake' 10
d · indefinite particle 3
cittarp. 'mind' 1
cinteti 'think (of) 8J
ciratararp.'rather long, longer, delayed' 8.1
cirena 'after a long time' 8.1
cuddasa 'fourteen' 9.1
ce 'if' 4
cetas 'ntind' <Nom Sg.ceto,
instt. cetasa) 6 .I
cetasika 'belonging to the mind,
mental' 4.1
cetovimutti 'mental emancipation' 12.1
coro'tltief, robber' 5
cha 'six' 9.1
cha<;l<;lheti 'give up, discard' 9
chaddisa 'the six directions'· (North,
South, East, West, up, down) 9.1
chando 'desire, resolution, will' I
chavi 'skin' 8
chiitajjhatta 'be hungry' 10.1
chiiya 'shadow, shade, (light) image' 8.1
chiddam 'hole, cut' 10
chindati 'cuts, sev~rs, plucks, breaks' 6.1
chetva(na) 'having cut off, having
destroyed, having removed' (ger. of
chindati, 'to cut, sever') 5
chedanarp 'cutting, severing,
destroying' 6.1
-ja 'be born': X -ja - 'be born of X' 2.2
jagat 'world'; loc. jagati ll
jallfia 'let one know' (Optative 3 p. sg. of
janati) 12
jatilo 'orie who wears matted hair, a
kind of ascetic' 6
janana 'causing, bringing, ptoducing' 6.1
janapado 'province, locality,
the country' 2
janadhipo 'king (of men)' ll.l
janeti 'generate, cause to be born' I
jano 'man, people, individual' 6 '
jamrrii 'wretched, contemptible' 6.1
jara 'old age, decrepitude, decay' 3.1
jah8ti 'gives up, abandons' (root ba)
ger.hitva 7 . adverbally as 'thirdly','for the third
ja}o 'a stupid person' 2
j8garati 'to be awake, watchful' pres.
part. jagaranto 'one who is wakeful' 5
jata 'born, arisen'; X jata- 'of the nature
of' X', 'having become X' 6.1
jatarilpa!Jl 'gold' 4 .
jati 'birth, rebirth, possibility of
rebirth' 3.1
187
GENERAL GLOSSARY
jartati 'knows, realizes, comprehends,
understands' ger. fiatva 3.1
janapeti 'informs' ll
jani 'deprivation, loss' 6.1
jayati' 'arises, is born' 4
jalarp 'net' 4
jilla 'blaze, flames' 10.1
jiDeti 'kindle' 10 .
- jir:UJa /jipp.aka 'frail, ·deCrepit',old ll.l
jivha 'tongue 3.1.
jirati 'decays, is worn ol,Lt' 11
jlvati 'lives' 4 ·
jivitO!Jl 'life· 2
jivo 'life' 4
Jetavana ']eta's park, ]eta's grove' 8.1
jhapeti 'bum': ger. jhapetva 12
flatva 'having known, having
understood' ger. of janati 4.1
fiaJ:)aiJl 'knowledge, intelligence, insight,
understanding' 7.1
fiiil)akarai)i· 'giving (right) understanding,
enlightening' 12.1
flfu)adassana 'perfect knowledge' 12.1
Mtako 'relative, kinsman' 5
Mti ·a relatiOn, relative' 6.1
(X) tthiinlll!l 'condition or state of X' 6
thapeti 'keeps, places, puts' 10
thati 'stand' II
i.hanam 'place, locality, condition, cause,
fact, principle, conclusion' 4
th8narp. ... (vijjati) 'it is possible, it is·
conceivable' 5
thitamajjhantike 'at midday, at noon' 10
thi:ti 'persistence, continuity' I
<;layhati 'gets burned' 5.1
c;Iasati 'bites, chews, gnaws' 11
c;Iasapeti 'cause to· bite or sting· 10.1 . ·
takkara 'doing thus, acting accordingly 4
tagara ·a fragrant shrub' 12
taca 'bark, hide, skin' 12
tacchako ·carpenter' 4.1
tailli.eva < tam+ eva 5.1
tal)ha 'craving: thirst' 4
tatiya 'third' accusative tatiyarp used
time' I .
tato 'from this, thereupon, further
thence, afterwards' 6.1
tato patthBya 'since then, from then
onwards' 10
tatta 'heated, hot' 5.1
tattabhavo 'hotness~ the fact that it is
warm/hot, warmth' 10
tattha 'there, in that' 6.1

GENERAL GLOSSARY
tatra 'there' 8.!
tathattam 'that state,'thatness'
I ' ii Lit 'the state of being so'J'.. 3.!
!·
tatha. 'thus, so' 5.! · thero 'elder, senior (bhikkhu)' 5.1
,,
I tathagatappavedita 'expruwded by the
Tathagata' 2 -
I
tathHgato' Tathagata, 'thus-gone-urt&,-an
epithet for a Buddha 2
· tanuko 'a few' 4
I reahn of misery' 7.!
tanti 'string or CQrd of .a Jute' 6.1
'i tantissara ·suing mu-si~J~_.l -
'
tapati 'shines, is bright, lustrous' 4
tappati 'suffer, be tormented' 10
I'': tarp third pers. singular pronoun
i, I (neut nominative-Accusative. or masc-
fem. accusative) 2
';
I' l I tayidarp. 'hence, therefore, so' (Itarp +
ilii,,, ida!Jl) 8
tasati 'fears' 4.!
I'!'
!
,,
!·-1
I~ ' I
tasma 'therefore, hence' 3
tato 'father, child, dear one· eVocative
singular mta) §t'e glossary 9.! ·
t3disako 'of such a quality/nature'S
tl!<liso •(-a) 'such, of such quality' ll.l
tapayati 'torments~- torture' 6
mra 'star' 6.! ' ~ damayati 'restrains,controls' 4.1
taragaiJ-o 'galaxy· of stars, host of stars' 6
mlapakkaJR 'pahn fruit' 8
tavatitpsabhavanalfl 'realm of the thirty-
thl'ee gods' 10.!
-ti a form of iti, the quotation-marker.l
tikicchati ·u·eats (medically)' 10.!
tikiccha:peti ·cau:se to cure, employ to
cure' (Causative. of tikicchati 'cures' l2
titthati 'stands, exists, is; remains'
ppL (()!!rita. pres. part. ti!tl!anta,l.l
tiracchl.ino 'animal' 11
tiri)rarp. 'across' U
tilaka 'spot, freckle' 11.1
ti(U 'three' (neut nom. pL) 2.2
tihamata 'three days after death'
Cti+ah<,t+mata) 11.1
tu 'however, indeed' 10.1
tu!tha 'pleased, being happy/glad' 10
tuQhibhl.ivo 'silence' 10
tuQluohilta '(being) silent' 8
tumhe 'you(pluraD' (nominative plural
of tva!Jl, 'you')· 3.1
tejanam. 'point or shaft of an arrow,
aiTow' 4.1
ten~;~ hi 'if so; in that case' 5.1
telapajjota!Jl 'oil lamp' 12
thanayati 'roars, thunders' 6
ti:~larp. 'plateau, raiSed dry ground' 6
188
thiil)il ·pillar, pOst' 8
thilparaha 'worthy of a stupa' 6
thilpo 'stupa, tope' 6
thoka!Jl 'little' 10.1
dakkhil)a 'right (side),south, southern' lt
dak.khil)eyya ·worthy of offerings or
gifts' 5.1
dakkha 'clever, able, skilled' ll.t
dajja Optative of deti (or dadati) 'give· 7
daJ).Qakamadhull) ·a bee-hive on
a branch' 10.1
daQ<,Iako 'branch, stick' 10.1
dal)Qapaliiyana 'leaning on. totteririg on
a staff' ll.l
daQ<,Ieti 'punish' 5.1
daJ)c;la 'stick, staff, cane, rod,
punishment' 4.1
datva 'having given'(ger. of deti /dadilti
'gives~ 4
dadati 'gives' Opt dajja, ger. datva 7
danta 'tamed' I
dabbi 'spoon, ladle' 8
damatho 'restraint, training, taming,
control, silence' 4.1
daya compassion. kindness 12
dassasi future 2 Sg. of deti II
da~anarp 'seeing, sight, insight, perfect
knowledge' 2
dasseti ·show' 10
daharo 'young in years' ll.l
da!ha!Jl 'tightly, hard, strongly 10.1
dattarp. 'sickle' 6.1
dana!Jl 'giving, charity' 5
danapati ·a liberal donor' 8.1
dayako 'giver, (lay) donor' 8.1
darako 'child, youngster, boy' 7
diiruQl 'wood' 4.1
dl.irukhal)dakaQl ·a piece of firewood·, a
stick' 10 · king 5
dilsi 'maid-servant' 10.1
digul)a!Jl 'doubly, twofold' 5.1
dija 'twice-born one· 12
dit!ha 'seen, witnessed' 7
dittham 'a vision, that which L'i seen' 7
dii}pati 'shines, shiiles forth' 4.1
dibba 'divine 4
divaso 'day' 10
disampati 'king' 11.1
disa 'direction' 9.1
disvB(na)' 'haying seerf
(ger. of dis-/ passati 'sees') 5.1
digha 'long' 3
digharattan) 'for a long time' 3
dipafl) 'solid foundation, shelter,
refuge' 6.1 · proper, knowing the doctrine' 4.1
du 'two' 8.1
dukkha 'painful, of suffering' 3.1
dukkhita 'afflicted' 11.1
dukkho/-am 'sorrow, suffering, ill' 2.2
dugga 'rough ground, wrong way' 7.1
duggati 'unhappy existence, evil state,
duccaritam 'bad behavior, incorrect
behavior· 7
ducchanna 'ill-thatched, badly covered'
10
duttha 'wicked, malicious' 7
dutiyall) 'second time' (accusative of
dutiya, 'second,' used adverbally) I
duddasa 'difficult to see,
incomprehensible (by the ordinary)' 9.1
dunniggaha 'difficult to restrain' 8
duppaflfia 'not wise, foolish, ignorant' 2
dubhanna 'of bad color, ugly, of
changect color' 6.1
dubbala 'weak' 10.1
dubbalabhava 'feebleness' 12
dubbhasita 'ill-spoken' 2
dummana 'unhappy, downcast' 5.1
duraccaya 'hard to remove, difficult to
overcome' 6.1
duranubodha 'difficult to be understood'
9.!
dullabha 'rare, difficult to obtain' 6
dura 'far· 8.1
deti 'gives, donates' (• dadati) 4
future 2 Sg. dassasi U
dentl 'one who gives' 4
X deva 'having X as god, highly
respecting X ll.t
devasika 'occurring daily' l2
devo 'god';.also used as an epithet for
deseti 'preach, declare' 9.1
doso 'anger, ill Will, evil intention,
wickedness, conuption, malice,
hatred' 2.2 . nfunam 'name (for recognition)' B.
dvadasa 'twelve' a:!
dvara!Jl 'door, gate' 10
dVI1lamata 'two days after death
( < dvi+aha+m.ata)' 11.l
dhanam 'wealth, riches treasures' 6.1
X dhaffima 'of the nature of x· 5.1
dhammakammarp. 'righteous deed or
activity. activities pertaining to the
doctrine' 4.!
189
•
GENERAL GWSSARY
dhammacariya 'righteous living' 5
dhammaflfm 'knowing that which is
dhammapadaQl 'word of righteousness'
9.1
dhammavinayo 'teachings of the
Buddha, <Dhamrna and Vinaya
together)' 2
dhammo 'doctrine, .physical or mental
element or phenomenon; that which is
true, righteous, proper and/or natural;
factor; quality' (among many
meanings) l
dhatu (feminine.) 'element, relic, basis' 6
dhareti ·holds, bears, accepts, contains,
holds, holds back' 5.1
dhltar 'daughter' 10.1
dhovanto 'one who washes, one who
cleans' 6
na 'not' I .
nam alternate fofm of the pronoun tam
5:t ·
nagaraiiJ 'city, town' .'3.1
nagaraguttiko superintendent of a city'
11
naccati 'to dance, play· 10.1
nanu (< na + nu)'isn't it that'(as particle
of iii.teiTOgation), surely, certainly',
(as particle of affirmation) 3
nandati 'rejoice, be happy' 10
nandirilga 'passionate delight' 12.1
nam.ayati 'bends, fashions' 4.1
namassati 'salute, venerate, honbr, do
homage to' 9.!
nayati. 'leads, takes' 4.1
naro 'man, individual' 6.1
nava 'nine' 7
navama 'ninth' 7
nahayati 'bathe' 10
Nilg'aseno proper name;
vocative singular Nagaseno 3
nilgo 'elephant' 7
n.anavidha 'various' 10
nama 'just, indeed, for sure· 5
namaiD karoti 'give a name' 10.1
namaiahariall}. naming, taking a name·
10.1
namagottam .. 'the narrie (for recognition)
and the sUrname (for lineage)' 8
navutika :ninety years old' 11.1
nan a measure of capacity, 'cupful' lO
nil!imatta 'a cupful' (about a na}i)

GENERAL GLOSSARY
! ' nikkujjitam 'that which is turned upside
down' 12
nikkharnati 'set forth, come out of' , ppl.
nikkhanta 9.1
,j·' nigacch~ti 'go down to, enter, come to,
suffer 6.1
nigamo 'market-town, small. town· 10.1
niggahako 'one who rebukes, oppressor'
12
nicca 'permanent, constant,·
non- transitory' 5.1 ·
nittha:rp. gacchati 'concludes, arrives at a
conclusion' 9·
nil;lc;lhal}.1 'nest, place' l1
nittharati 'concludes, ends·t finishes 10
nidllilaQI 'source, cause, origin: m •
I''I 'I'I'
!
X-nidana 'having X as.source or.origin'
niddayita 'a sleepy person' 7.1
, , I, I,. ninda 'blame' 4 · pakkosapeti. 'summon, call' 10
I '· 'I ninnarp 'low land' 6
, , I
nipaka. 'intelligent, mature' 7 pakkhipati 'throw, put' 10
nipajjati 'lies down, sleeps' 12
nipanna _'having lain down or slept'
lppL of nipajjati) 10.1
nipul)a 'efficient, subtle, abstruse, clever,
skillful,accomplished' 9.1
nipphatti (f) 'conclusion, end,
completion' 10
nibbattati 'be bOrn, arise' 10.1
nibbal)all). 'emancipation' 9.1
nibbida 'indifference, disenchantment' 12
nibbiddha 'pierced' 10.1
nibaddha!jl 'always' 11
nimanteti 'invites' 6
nimittmp 'object of a thought' 6.1
nimmakkhika 'without bees or flies' 10.1
nirayo 'purgatory, hell' 7.1
niramisa 'not characterized by amisa' 4.1
nirupadhi 'free from passions, or
attachment, desireless' 4.1
nirodho ·cessation, emancipation, calming
down· 2.2
nivattati 'turns back' ll
nivato 'modesty, gentleness' 5
nivapaputtha 'fed on fodder' 7.1
nivara~mttharp 'for the purpose of
preventing, to prevent' 10
nivasanakawam 'hem Of the robe·· 11
nivaseti 'dress Oneself, put on clothes or
robes'·8.1
nivesana'n) 'settlement. abode. house' 8.1
niveseti ·established' 8 · paJa 'people, progeny, offsp1ing' 9.1
nisidati 'sits down. sit, ·is seated'
ppl. nisinna '3 sg. past ni.Sidi 6.1
n:issaya 'because of, on account of tO
nica 'low' 8.1
niharati 'puts out, stretches out. drtves
or takes out'; ger. nlharitva(na) 10.1
nu 'then, now'· (interrogative particle) 3
nekkhammarp. 'renunciation of
worldliness, freedom from lust, craving
and desires' 4.1
nettiko 'irrigator' 4.1
oo 'verily not (na + u; negative
emphatic " more emphatic than na) 3.1
pakata 'done, rnade:
X-pakata- done out of X' 2.2
pakaseti 'make knowri, illustrate' l2
pakopana 'upsetting, ~haking, making
2.2 turbulent' 6.1
pakopo 'agitation, anger' 7
pakkosati 'summons, calls' 12
pakkhandati 'sp1ings forward, jump up' U
paggai)hati 'uplifts, takes up, stretches
forth, holds out/up, takes up, makes
ready" ppL paggahita 1
paiJII<.o (-aiJI) 'mud' 7.1
pacati 'cooks, bakes, heats' 10
paceti 'gathers' 9.1
pati(s)su 0 ati 9 . concealed' 12
paccanubhoti 'undergoes, experience 11.'1
paccakkhaya 'having given up, having
abandoned' 6.1
paccaiiftasiiJI ·(I) realized perfectly' 12.1 ·
paccati 'ripen' 9
paccatthika(o) 'opponent, opposing' 4.1
paccantima 'bordering, adjoining (near),
·Countryside' 2
paccayo 'cause, motive, means,
ground,motive, support' 8.1. 'requisite
lof a monk) 12
X-paccaya 'having X as paccayo · 8.1
paccassosi 'assented, agreed' 1
3rd. sg. past of pati(s)sunati 9.1
3rd pl. past paccas.Sosum 9
paccajayatf 'is (re)bom' 2 ·
paccupatthati 'is present' 6
paccekabuddho 'silent Buddha, indiVidual
Buddha. See glossary 6
pacchindati 'settle, decide' 10.1
pacchima 'west, western' 3.1
pajahati /hati 'gives up, abandons,
~iscards';infin. pajahitaDJ; ger. pahaya 3
paja:nati 'realizes, understands well' 5.l
190
pajjalati 'burns !forth), blazes up': ppl.
pajjalita 8.1
pai'ica 'five' 3.1
pai'icama 'fifth' ll.l
paiic'upadanakkhandha 'the five
aggregates' See glossary 3.1
paiijalika 'with folded hands' 9.1
paffiiavant 'wise (one), insightful
(person1' masc. nom. sg.paiilia.V'i.i
nom. pl. p~vanto- 2
paiiiiil 'wisdom, knowledge, insight' 2
paiiflacakkhurp_ 'eye of wisdom; eye of
insight' 2 · directs', ppl. pal)ihita 8.1
paiii\ajlviiJI 'life of wisdom, insight' U
pai'ili.Hpeti 'indicate, point out. make
known. declare' 8.1 · pai).Qitamanin ·one who' thinks himself
paiifiapento 'one ·who prepares or
arranges' 6
palii\ayati 'appear, be clear· 12
paiiho 'question' ll
pa\ikkOsati 'blame, reject' 9
pa1iggai)]lllti, 'receive; accept'; ppl.
patiggahita 9
patiggahai)afQ. 'a(Xeptance, receiving' 4
p3.tiggahako 'recipient, he who receives'
4 keeps' 6
paticchannarp. 'that whiCh is covered,
. P::t.ticcasamuppado 'aii.sing on the
grounds of a preceding cause,
dependent origination' (theory of the
twelve causes) 9.1
pa\icchadin 'covering, enveloping' 9.1
patijanatr 'to promise· 10.1
papnissaggo. 'renunciation, giving up' 9.1
pat]nissagga 'rejection, forsaking' 12.1
Pa\ipanna 'stepped on,to, entering on' 9.1
patiPajjati 'enters upon' ll
patipada 'way, means, path, method,
course' U.l
pa(ibala 'competent, capable' 2
patipucchati 'asks in response,
_ inquires in return' 5.1
patiy3deti ·prepares, arranges' 6
pa(ilabho 'attainment' 2
papvattiya 'to be turned back,
resistible' 4.1
papvllta!I) 'against the wind' 12
pativijjha 'having penetrated, intuited,
8cquired, comprehended' 6.1
pativirata 'restrained from, abstained
· from· 4 ··
pat:i.Sandahati 'is connected, is reunited,
is reborn' 3
191
-··----.,.---·--~
GENERAL GLOSSARY
pqtisallina 'secluded, retired,
gone into solitude' 6.1
patisevati 'follows, pursues, indulges in,
experiences· 4
pat(haya 'beginning from, henceforth'
!with Abl.)' 10
pathama 'first': ace. sg. pathamaQl used
as adverb 'first(ly)' 4
pathamataraiiJ. 'as early as possible,
Ivery) first' 8.1
pa(haVi 'earth' 8.1
paQidahati 'puts forth, longs for, applies,
pat)ita 'exalted, excellent' 9.1
PBIJ.Oak.O· 'eunuch, weakling' 7.1
wise' 9.1
p81J-Qitavedanlya 'to be understood by
tl'ie wise' 9.1
paiJ.Qito 'wise one' 4
paQ<;lurugo 'jaundice' l2
Pai)I)liiJI leaf' 10
patati 'to fall', ger. patitva 10.1
patikula 'husband's famlly' ll.l
patitthapento 'one who places, one who
patit(hita 'established, fixed, founded
upon' 6
patit(hati (-tthahati) 'stands fast or
firmly, staYs. sets up, establishes
oneself 2.2
patinandita 'rejoiced, welcomed' 6
patibbata ·a devoted wife' 11.1
patiropa 'agreeable (status, position,
state)' 8
patlta 'delighted, with delight' 8
patta 'attained, reached' 10
pattacivaraq~. 'bowl and robe' 8.1
padaq~. 'word, foot, footstep' 9
padahati 'exert, strive, confront' 1
padlpeti 'lights, kindles' 3
padlpo lamp' 3
padeso 'province, part, fact, limited
extent, indication' 9
pana ·verily, but' 3.1
panta ··remote, solitary, secluded' 12
papatati 'drops, falls .down or off 6.1
papupphakam 'flowery arrows, flower-
tipped ilJTows (of sensual passion)' 9.1
pabbajita 'renounced, ordained, gone
forth !into holy life,)' 4.1
pabbato'mountain, range of mountains' U
pabhaiJI!lUna ·easily destroyed' 11
pamatto 'one who is lazy, not diligent' 4.l
 01-::NERAL GlpSSARY
pamado 'indolence, sloth' 1.1
pamu~cati 'is let loose, lib~rated,
free, ppl. pamutta 8
P~~ati 'rejoices, "enjoys, finds pleasure
pay~ti ·~es. ~orward, proceed' 11
I' pa}'irupasati associate' 8
'I
I
:ra~<?t/te~tllfrs 4
paro 'oilier (person)' 6
;;I paradaro 'someone else's·wire· 3
'
,,
" parapessa 'serving others' 5
,, : i
parampara 'tradition' 7
' :. ~ l
I i
· ~dti 'to codil around, encircle' 10.1
ppaanrikkhip)·mna·
.. ~· ecaye'll
pannne~~ 'wha.t should be known· 12.1
pantassati be excited, be worried,
1! be tormented' 5
' pavatteu ·~ets in motion, keeps
P~~~~ti 'pass away, die witho1.,1t
9 · (something) going, turns, rolls
i ;i I ••.
~ I. i
1' ' iI paripajjati: 'falls into, sinks into
~ wallows' ll.l ' again' ll.l
I '' I
,. paripurati, 'be filled, attain fullness' 8
~plava unsteady, wavering' 8
p~nplavap~s.a:da 'one whose tranquillity
ts. suEerftct~l or wavering· 8 ·
panbyu)hya provided with' 6
PBf!bho~o 'enjoyment, use' 10.1
panbhoJaniya 'to be used
<of wate~ for washing)· 10
panmutto one who is completely freed
a fully-freed one' 3 ' pas~hati subdues, oppresses' 11
parivajjeti 'shun,- avoid' 7.1
pariyadaya 'having overpowered taking
up completely' l.f ' passati 'sees, realizes' .'3.1
pariyadinnacitta 'with the mind
· c~mpletely overpowered by, with the
mmd completely 'taken over by' 7
par!ya:ya 'order, course, method' 12
pa~yod~pa~arp/-a 'purification' 2
pa~yodata _v~ry clean, pure, cleansed' 8
P~nru~tlhau completely obsuuct
unpnson' 12 ' pahu ·able' 12
P~vajjati .·avoids, shuns gives up' 61
panvatta ·a circle' 12.1 ' ·
panvatteti 'iums, changes' 10.1
PariV!takko :reflection, thought
constderauon' 6.1 '
pali~ta 'followed by, surrounded by' 6
pans~ .assembly, group gathering
retm_P.e' 4.1 · ' ' pii)<)aya 'for alms (begging)· (dative of
pansapfl.u 'knowing or knower of the
assembly' 4.1
parist,J.ddha 'clear, pure, spotless, bright,
perfect' 8
set
par!ssayarp. 'obstacle' 7
parihayati 'decrease dwindle
deteriorate' 1 ' '
pare 'other, other (ones)' 6
paro 'another, next (one)' 31
pal~va~ 'floats, swims, jum~· 6 .1
palapo prattle, nonsense' 111
palayati 'flee, run away' 10.
palalaiJl 'straw, dry leaves 10 1
~v~seti 'to cause to enter t~ put
ms1de 10.1 ' pa:timokkha 'collection of disciplinary
palitake:sa 'having grey hair' ll.l
pavatti · Il_lamfestation, wielding,
happemng· 8.1
pavappha.ti 'grows (up), increases' 6.1
pavatta~ proceeds, goes on' 4.1
(someth!fl&) 4.1
pavati 'blow forth' 12
pavisati 'enters, goes irito ; ppl. pavittha;
ger. pavissa 8.1
pavedita 'pointed out, expounded,
declared, made known· 2
pavedhati 'tremble' ll.l
pav~ti 'make enter, procure furnish
proVIde' 7.1 ' ·
pasarpsa~ 'praises'; ppl. pasattha 5
pasarpsa 'praise· 4
pasanna :pleased, clear, bright' 10.1
pasad~ 'tranquility, serenity, clarity
punty' 8 ' papo 'evildoer' 9
paharati 'hit, strike beat' 10
pahatabba 'what o~ght to be given
up 12.1
paha:narp 'avoidance' 1
pah~ya . .ger. of pajaliati 7
pahlna given up, abandoned
calmed down· (ppl. of pajabati) 3
P~Jipan~a paripanna, ppl. of paripajjati·
g
falls ~to, sinks into, wallows· ILl
Pi!kata open, m.anifest, unconcealed' 7.1
pakataiiJ karoti makes manifest makes
appear' 7 ' main divisions of the Pall canon 7
pa::.-.ata 'common, vulgar, uncontrolled'
Pilk"tindriYa 'of uncontrolled mind' 4.1
~~~tika natural state, state as before'
paQa 'life, breath, living (being). 12
192
paQatipato 'destruction of life,
taking life· 6
pal)i (IJl) 'hand' 9
plil)in ·a living being',
_instrumental singular p3I)in3 4.1
pai)Upetall) 'for life' (literally 'possessed-
with-breath-ly' < pa:t}a(rp.) 'breath +
upetarp.
neuter -past participle of upeti
approaches, obtains') 5.1
plil,Io 'breath, 'life' 3
rules binding on a recluse' 12
pa:tubhuta 'manifested, become manifest,
appeared' 3.1
paturahosi ·appeared' 12.1
pateti 'fells makes fall'
(aggin) )pateti • 'kindles (fire)' 10
pado 'foot' 10
plinaljl .drink, drinking' 4
pilnlyaljl ·water for drinking' 10
papaiJl 'sin, evil, bad deed,
wrong action' 2
papaka 'sinful, evil, wicked' I
papakaiJl 'bad action· 9.1
pa:pakarrunam 'evil, sinful act' 5.1
pa:paka:rin 'evil-doer; (nom. sg.
papakiiri J 10
pa:pal)iko 'merchant, shopkeeper' 2
p8.piccho 'one who has bad intentions,
wicked one' 12
p3p1.1Qati 'reaches' 10
pa:peti 'brings about, causes to attain tO.l
pliragaipgilya 'beyond Ganges, the other
side of the Ganges' ll
pa:rtcariya. 'serving, waiting on,
attendance' 11.1
paripuri 'fulfillment, completiGn' I
parileyyako ·a name of an elephant' 10
p3roho 'side br'lflch of a banyan tree
descending roots from the branch of a·
banyan tree 10
pasa:Q.o 'stone' 10
pahuneyya 'wortlly of hospitality' 5.1
· peseti 'sends' n
pi 'emphatic particle' 1 .
pitaka 'basket' a term used for the three
pitakasampadana 'pitaka tradition,
authority of the pitakas· 7
pii)<)oJ 9.1 ·
pii)Qo 'a lump of food, alms given as
food' 8.1
193
GENERAL GLOSSARY
pita 'father· Compound stem pitu 91
piya 'dear· 12 ·
piy~rp.-'pleasure, pleasant thing, dear
thmg, endearment' 4
piyo 'pleasant one~ agreeable one dear
one' 3.1
pivati 'drinks' 4
pilandhanarp. 'ornament' l2
pisuna 'calumnious, backbiting, malicious'
ll.l .
plthasappin ·a cripple' 10
puggalo 'person, individual' 6
ucchati 'questions, asks, ppl. Pllttha' 8
r ufiflarp. 'merit, righteousness,
meritorious act' 5.1
puttha ppl. of pucchati 10.1
putto 'son, child' 6 ·
putpu 'many, various, individual,
dtverse, separately' 5
puna 'again'? .
puna ca pararp. 'furthennore, and
punappunarp. 'again and again' 7.1
punabbhava ·rebirth' 12.1
pupphalJl 'flower· 5
pubbaQhasamayarp 'in the forenoon, in
the morning' 2
pubbe 'previously, before, earlier, in the
past' 6.1
purato 'in front of, before' II
puratthima 'eastern· 9.1
purisapuggalo 'individual, man' 6
purisftdhamo 'wicked person' 4
purisuttamo 'noble, best person' 4
puriso 'man, male, person' 3
p11rohito 'the king's bead-prtesf 10
pfijaniyo 'respect-worthy person' 5
puja ·worship, offering' 5
piijeti 'worship, adore,' offer' 9.l
piitisandeho 'accumulation of putrid
1
matter, mass of corruption' 11
pureti 'fill' 6
pe signal of repetition (ellipsis) 2
pecca 'having departed, after death' 6
pemarp 'love, affection' 4
pessiko 'a messenger, a servant' 5
pokkharaljl 'lotus leaf 6.1
pothujjanika 'belonging to an ordinary
man' 12.1
ponobhavika 'leading to rebirth' 12.1
porohiccarp 'office of a family· priest' 5
poso 'man, male' ll.l
pharati 'spread, pervade 10
 GENh'RAL GLOSSARY
pharusa. 'rough, harsh, unkind' ll.l
P~a:a!Jl fruit, result, having the result'
phalati 'splits, breaks open' u
ph~ti ·~~'!crease, development' 2
.phaleti rends asunder, splits, cleaves'
pres part. phalenta 6
ph~suka 'easy, comfortable' ll
phasu~aro 'comfort, ease' 9.
phusab touches, feels' ; ppl. Phu!tha 31
phel)B!Jl foam, froth' 9.1
phel)fipama <phena(m) + upama 91
phot!habbaljl 'touch, contact' l.1 '
badarapandu!Jl light yellow (fresh)
JUJUbe fruit' 8
bandh~na!Jl 'bond, fetter; stalk' 8
balarp_ strength, power force' 4
balakayo ·=y· 6 · ' (from bhiyyo 'greater' + bhavo 'state' I
balavant 'great, powerful'; cmpd. stem
balava; nom. sg. balava u
balil_<-~tara~
'more,_ Inore greatly' 5.1
bahi <?uts1de, outer, .external' n
bahu many' 8.1
bahu(!Jl) 'much, many' 4
bahutara 'many more' 2
bahula 'much, f~equent' 12
bahulikata 'practiced frequently
exercised, expanded' 3.1 ' bhante ·reverend sir sire Sir venerable
B~a'?asi CJ?roper !illme)_ Benares 10
b~o fo~l, Ignorant one, stupid one' 5
b~ya!Jl folly, idiocy' 9.1
b~hus~c~a~ 'l~aming, knowledge. 5
biijhagtlana grievously sick' U.l · bhogavant 'wealthy' ll.l
B~bi~ro proper name of a king 6
bila!Jl hollow· 10.1
birapaiP (proper name)the name of
a plant 6.1 . counsel, secret talk' 7 .l
Buddha 'a Buddha, one who has reached
enlightenment' 1
buddha 'enlightened, awakened' 41
bodhisatto 'aspirant to Buddbahood, a
Buddha m an earlier incarnation· tOt
byafljamup_ 'syllable, consonant si·gn ·
mark' 9 ' '
byiikaroti 'explains answers brings to
light' 5.1 ' ' . ma!Jlg3la!Jl 'blessing, good omen,
byapannacitto 'he whose mind is
malevolent' 3
byapado 'ill will, malevolence
revengefulness' 3 ' maccu 'death, the god of death' 4.1
Brahmadatto proper name of a king 10 1
brahmaloko 'Brahma-world' 81 · maceo 'mortal, human being' 2
brahma 'Brahma, Supreme God'
lnstr.sg. brahmuna) 4.1
Gen-Dat brahmuno
brahma~ paja 'gener~tion (progeny) of
Brahnuns ll
brahmai)O 'B~ahmin'; in Buddhist texts,
s~metnnes one who lives a noble life
Without regard to caste' 4
briiti 'says,. tells, calls, shows, explains' 5
Bhagavant fortunate one' (epithet for
the Buddha) 5.1
bhagini 'sister' 12
· bha~ati 'associates (with)'impef. 2 sg
bhaJaSSU 4
bhaii.jati 'breaks' 10.1
bhaii.ii.amana'being said· 12.1
bhaoati 'says, speaks' 3
bhal)<ja!Jl 'goods' 10.1
bhaQ.Qanajiita 'quarrelsome' 41
bh8I).<;Ianarp 'quarrel quan·elm:g
strife' 4.1 ' '
bhattarp_ 'boiled rice, food meal' n
bhadante 'sir, sire' a form'of address
generally used (by monks) in
addressing the Buddha 9
bhadde 'dear one, lady', term of address
for women 10.1
bhadra!Jl 'good, as good' 9
bhadro 'good one, (doer of good)' 9
one' 3 ' ' '
bhabba 'competent, able' 2
bhayarp 'fear, apprehension' 4
bhavarp 'individual, person· 5
bhavataphi.i 'craving for
existence/rebirth· 12.1
bhavati 'becomes, exists, is·
ger, bhutva/hutvi.i
third pers. fut. bh~vissati 6
bhavattha 'it is said (in this context)·
(< bhavati+iha) 7.1
bhavanarp_ 'abode, residence' 11
bhavissati 'will be'
(third pers. future of bhavati) 6
bh~ati ·bears, suppbrts, maintains' 12
bhagayan~. 'sh~rer, participant in'
r:o~tive_ s~lar bh3gava 4
bh!lflllll parttCipant, sharer' (feminine) 4
bh!!!anarp_ 'vessel, utensil' 6
bhajana!Jl 'dividing' 10 1
bhatar 'brother' 12 · avaricious one, stingy one' 6
bhayati 'fears' 4.1
bharati 'bears, supports, maintains' 12
bhartya'wife' ll.l
bhi.ivana 'development' 1
194
bhi.iveti ·'begets, produces, increases,
cultivates develops' ppl. bhavita 3
bhi.ivo 'nature, fact, -ness' 10.1
bhasati 'says, speaks'
pres. part. bhasamano 6
' bhasati 'shines forth, is bright';
middle voice bhlisate 4
bhikkhave 'Oh, monks' (vocative plural
of bhikkhu) I
bhikkhavo vocative plural of bhikkhu,
alternate for bhikkhave 9
bhikkhu ·(Buddhist) monk' I
bhikkhuSaqigho 'conununity of Buddhist
monks' 6
bhijjati 'breaks, gets broken' 10.1
bhiyyo 'further, more' 8.1
bhiyyobhavo ·'fucrease, growth'
bhiru 'coward' 7
bhiruko 'fearful one, coward, one who
is shy' 7J
bhuljlkaroti 'barks' n
bhuiijati 'enjoys, eats' 5
bhumma 'earthly, terrestial' 12
bhussati 'barks' n
bhilta!Jl 'living being' 11
bhilmi 'ground, earth' 10.1
.bhe<b 'breaking, splitting, disunion,
decomposition' 7.1
bhesajja(!Jl) 'medicine' 10.1
bho 'friend, sir' (polite form of address) 5
Bhoganagara!Jl 'Bhoga'(city name) 9
bhogo 'wealth, possession, enjoyment,
item for enjoyment' 2
bhogga 'bent, crooked' ll.l
bhojanarp. 'meal, nourishment' 4
bhovadin ·a brahmin' (according to the
way he is addressed) 5
makkato 'monkey' 10.1
maghavant 'lndra, king of the gods' 5
mamkubhi.ivo 'downcast-ness, discontent,
cOnfusion, moral weakness' 10
marpkubhiita 'discontented, troubled,
confused' 8.1
auspices, celebration, festival' 5
maccarin 'greedy one, sclfish and
maccurajo 'king of death' 9.1
macchara 'avarice, envy' 12
majjatp. 'intoxicating drink, .liquor' 5
195
GENERAL GLOSSARY
maijhar_Ihikasamayarp_ ·during midday· 2
majjhima 'central, middle' 2
majjho 'middle, midst' 3.1
maiifiati 'think, deem, conceive,
consider (as)' 2
mafti\ati 'think know' 9 .I
mana 'polished, burnished' 12
mal)ikarp. 'a big jar, pot' 6
maQ.Qalami.ila 'pavilion, a circular hall
with a peaked roof' 6
mata 'dead, one who is dead' 4.1
rnattiSambhava 'born of a mother' 5
matta 'about, onlY' 8.1
mattafti\u 'knowing the'right measure,
moderate' 4.1
marta 'measure, quantity,
light measure' 4.1
matthaka 'top, head, surface' 10.1
madhu 'honey' 10.1
madhu patalo 'honeycomb' 10.1
manas 'mind'; nom. sg. mano
instr. sg. manasa 3.1 -
manasikaroti 'reflect upon, consider,
bear in mind, recognize' 9
manasiki.iro 'attention, pondering,
fixed thought' 6.1
mana:pa 'agreeable, pleasing, pleasant,
charming' 8.1 ·
manujo 'man' 6.1
manussa patfia.Dho 'being born as a
human, attaining human status' 2
manussabhilta 'human (being), (one) in
human form' 4.1
manusso 'man, human being' 2
manorama 'delightful' 12
mantita!Jl '(that which is) given as
mando 'idiot, fool, stupid one' 7.1
maraQ.atp. 'death' 3.1
rruuicidhamma 'nature of a mirage' 9.1
mala 'impurity, stain' 12
malliki.i 'jasmine' 12
mahato 'great, big' (dative singular of
mahanta, 'great, big') I
mahan! 'big, great'
mahanto 'great, big (one>: 6 .
mahagghaso ·(one who)' eats much,
greedy, gluttonous' 7.1
mahant 'big, great' 10
mahallaka 'old person· 11.1
mahi.i 'big, great, large, huge';
(nom. sg. of mahant) 7.1
Mahi.ili proper name of a person 8.1
mahi.imatto 'chief minister' 5.1
I
GENERAL GLOSSARY
mahayafulo ·great sacrifice, big alms-
giving' 6
mahaliijo 'great king' .3
Mahavana name of a park 8.1
rna prohibitive particle. 'do not' 7
Magadha 'of tbe Magadha (country)' 6
.m3J)avako 'youth, young man'
(especially a young Brahmin)' 6
matango 'elephant, type of elephant' 7
matar 'motber' 12
matilgamo 'woman' ll.l
ma:n.o 'pride, conceit' 12
manasa 'of tbe mind'. 10.1
manasarp. 'intention, purpose of mind,
mental action' 6.1
mananusaya 'predisposition or bad
tendency to pride 12
manusa 'human' 4
maneti 'respect, honor' 9.1
rnayavin 'deceitfUl person' 12
mara 'U"ara, death personified, death,
god of deatb, tempter' 4.1
miiluva 'kind of creeping vine' 6.1
nticcha' 'wrong, incorrect' 4 ·
micchacaro 'wrong behavior' 6
micchBditthi 'wrong views' ?
nticchadi!!hiko 'he who has incorrect
views' l
ntitto 'friend' 4
middhl 'slotbful (one)' 7.1
ntiyati 'dies' 4.1
mukharp. 'mouth, face' 10
mukhara 'garrulous, noisy, scurrilous· 4.1
mukharata 'talkativeness, garrulousness'
10 ' yutta 'proper, befitting, to have a
mullcati 'releases, is relieved' ll
mul)\lako ·a shaven-headed one' 8.1
muta 'thought, what is !bought, tbat
which is !bought' 7
mutta 'freed' 4
· muttarp 'urine' 11.1
mutto 'one who is released, one who is
freed' 3
musa 'falsely' 3
musavado 'lying, falsehood' 6
muhutta 'moment' 12.1
millaiJl 'root, origin· 7
millaiJl 'price, capital, money' 10.1
mU}ha 'gon.e astray, confused, foolish,
ignorant (one)' 12
megho 'rain cloud' 6
methuna 'sexual' 4
methuna dhammo ·sexual intercourse' 4
medhavin 'wise, wise one' 8
196
medhavini: ·a wise woman· 11.1
meraymp 'fermented liquor' 4
modati 'rejoice, be happy' 10 ·
moho 'delusion, ignorance, confusion' 2.2
)l'aiJl 'tbat, since, for, when (relative)' 5.1
yaiJl yadeva 'whichever' 8.1
yakkbo 'demon, devil' ll
yailiio 'sacrifice, ahnsgiving' 6
yato 'since, whence, because' 9.1
yatbayidaiJl 'tbat is to say, namely,
to wit'
(< yatba 'tbus'<ida!Jl 'Ibis') 1
yatba 'just as, like' 3
yatbakatbaiJlpana 'tben how, how so
tben' 9.1
yatbabhiltam 'as things really are' 12.1
yattha 'wherever' 8
yattha kamanipatin 'tbat which
falls/clings wherever it wishes'.! 8
yada 'when' 3.1
yadidaiJl 'tbat is (to say), namely' 6
yanniina 'well, now' 'rather' 6.1
yamaloko 'world of Yama' 9.1
yavo 'barley, c.orn (in general): 6.1
yaso (yasas) 'fame, repute, glory' 6
yacita 'being requested, being begged
for' 7
yajako 'one who sacrifi~es, a priest' 5
yati 'go, proceed, go ori' 9
yava 'until, up to, as long as' 9
yavajivam 'as long as one lives' 8
yavafic'idarp. 'that is, namely, as far as,
in so far as (y3vam + ca + idarp; Cf.
yadidam) 8
right to' 10.1
)l'ilpo 'a sacrificial post' 8
yo 'who' <r:elative pronoun) 3
yogavacaro 'one.who has applied himself
to spiritual exercises (yoga) see
glossary 6.1
yogo 'application"7.l
yojanarp 'a measure of space, a distance
of about 4 to 8 miles' 5
yodhajivo ·a warrior, a soldier' 5
yonija 'born of a womb' 5
yonisomanisikarp 'proper attention,
correct reflection' 8.1
rakkhati 'guards, protects, takes care of,
watches over': ppl. ralddtita 7
rajatarp 'silver, anY non-gold coin' 4
rajjall) 'kingdom, realm' ll.l
rajja!Jlkaroti 'to reign' 10.1
ralii\o genitive sg. of riijan .ll.l
\
rattharp 'reign, kingdom, empire,
country' 5
rata 'delighting in, intent on,
devoted to' 4.1
rati 'love, attachment' 4
ratti 'night' 5 . .
ratta 'infatuated, impassioned 7.1
raso 'taste, savor' 3.1
rahado 'lake' 4 . .
rahogata 'being alone, bemg m
private' 6.1
Ii.igaggi 'fire of passion' 7.1
rago 'passion, exitement, lust,
attachment' 4
Rlijagaha place name 9J __ .
ra:jan 'king' gemuve sg. ranno t.l
rlljaputto 'prince' 5.1 . vata' surely, certainly ,12.1
rukkhadevatlf 'tutelary derty of
a tree' 10.1
rukkho 'tree' 8.1
I'Ucira ·agreeable, attractive' 5
rujati 'pains, aches' 10.1 . .
rilpaiJl ·(visual) form, obJect of vrsual
perception' Ll .
rilpavant 'beauuful ll.l
rogo 'disease, sickness ll.
rodati 'weep, lament, err
roseti 'irritates, annoys 12 .
8
lakkhanam 'feature, mark, charactenstic~
discrlrnillating mark' 3.1
X lakkhaJ)a.IIJ. 'characterized or·.marked
by X' 3.1
labhati 'gets, receives; get a chance to;
ppll addha; inf. laddhull):
fut. pass. part. laddhabba. 2 ·
laya 'brief me~sur~ of time 12,.1
lahu 'flightly, light 8
lahutlhanaiJl 'lightn~ss of body, bodily
vigor, good heal!~' 9
labho 'profit, gam 10.1
Iavako 'cutter, reaper 6.1
Licchavi a clan name 8.1
luddha 'greedy, covetous 3
. varna 'left (side)' 6J ·
Iunati 'cut, reap' 6.1 .
loko 'world, universe, people m
general' 4 . .
lobho 'avarice, gre~d, covetousness 2 .2
lolata 'nature of bemg fbnd ?for
addicted to, longm~, greed 7.1
vagga 'dissociated, dissentious _4.1
vacanarp 'utterance, word, saymg, .
speech' 9 . vild<il)l)avaca 'of loo~e talk 4.1
vaco 'speech, word'; com~~ndmg stem
vaci (also appears as vaca) 6, 6.1
GENERAL GLOSSARY
vacchagotta 'of Vaccha lineage' in
reference to a Brahmin referred to by
surname 8 .
vacchataro ·a weaned calf, a bullock 8
vacchatari ·a weaned female calf, a
heifer' 8
vai\ceti 'to cheat' 10.1 .
vatarukkho ·a banyan tree 10, .
vadphati 'grows, increases (something),
c"ultivates' 6.1
vaoo 'wound' 9
vannam bh8sati 'speaks well pf,
pf3ises· 12
vannavanta ·colorful' 5
vaOD.o 'color, .complexion, outward
appearance~ 4 . .
vattham 'clotb, clothes 9.1
vadati 'says, speaks: ppL vutta 3
vadeti ·sayS, speaks 6 . .
vadho 'killing, destrucuon 6.1
varnim 'forest' 6.1 .
vanasal)go(aiJl) 'jungle, fore~! 10
vandati 'bow down at, s~lute 10
vayappatta 'come of age 10.1 · .
varaga:mo 'hereditary village, a village
. .
given as a gift' 10
varabo 'pig' 7
valita 'wrinkled: ll.l .
vasati 'lives, abides, dwells ~1 '.
vasanattffiinaJTl 'place of re.sid~nce ll
. vasalako 'outcaste, wretch 12
vasalo 'outcaste, a person of low
birth' 12
vasundhara 'earth' 6 .
vasena 'because of,-on account of 7.1
vassasatika 'hundred years old' 11.1
.
va: 'or' 1
va-ca 'word, speec~· 5
vanijo ·a merchant 5 . .
vrujijja 'trade, merchandiSe 10.1
vato 'wind' 4
vanaro 'monkey' 6.1
.
vayamati 'sttive, endeavor, struggle 1
va-y.ima 'effort'· 12.1
vruiyamana 'being prevented,
obstructed' ll ·
varo 'time, occasion' 11
va:settho a proper n~e 5
vlljantigo ·a wild beast 10 f' Ji
vigata .gone away, ceased., bereft o
. vicarati 'move about 10
197

GENERAL GLOSSARY
vijayo 'victory, triumph' 9.1
vijayati 'give birth, bring forth' ll.l
vijata 'a woman who has given birth' 1.l
vij8nanatl). 'act of cognizing,
discriminating' 3.1
vijananta 'knowing clearly,
understanding' __,
pres. part of vijanati · 5
vijanati 'perceives, understands With
discrimination, discriminates' 3.1
vijeti 'win, conquer'; ppl. vijita 9.1
vijjati 'appears, seems' 5
vijjli 'discliminative knowledge, insight,
wisdom, higher knowledge· 3.1
vijjagato 'one who has attained wisdom
(viiia>· 3.1
vijjumalin \yearing a garland or row of
lightning' (epithet for a cloud) 6.1
viiiobhasa 'light of insight' ( <vjjja +
obhasa) 7.1 .
villi\aya 'having pereeived or known' 5.1
virui~rp. 'consciousness' 3.1
viiii\ata 'known, what is known, that
which is known, what is perceived/ ·
. recognized/ understood' 7
vififiil 'intelligent, wise(one)' 3
vififmgarahita 'despised by the wise 3
vittam 'property, wealth' ll
vidarp.seti 'shows, make appear' 7.1
viditva 'know, realize' (gerund of
vindati) 9.1
vidhameti 'destroy; ruin, do away with,
dispel' 7.1
vinayakammam 'ethical activity,
activities pertaining to m-onastic
discipline' 4.1
vinayo 'discipline, code of ethics', often
'monastic d~cipline: (referring to a
large collection of rules governing the
monastic life of the bhikkhus). See
glossary 9
vina 'without' ll.l
vinicchita 'decided, settled' 10.1
vinipato 'great ruin, a place of suffering,
. state of punishment' 7.1
vinllaka 'bluish black, discolored' ll.l
vindati 'knows, realizes' ger.
viditva/vinditva 9.1
vipanna 'lost, gone wrong' l2
vipannaditlhi' one with wrong views,
heretic' 12
vipari!)ama 'change· 5.1
vipassati 'sees clearly, insightfully, h~ve
spiritual insight' 4
198
Vipassi name of a.Buddha ·previous to
Gotama 9.1
X-vipaka 'having X as fruit or result' 2.2
vipako 'result, fruition' 2.2
vipubbaka 'full of corruption and matter
festering' ll.l · · vuttiipiyamana <pres part._ of utthapeti
vippatimutto 'one who is freed'-4
vippayogo 'separation, dissociation' 3.1
vippasidati 'is serene, tranquil, becomes
calm' 4
vippasanna 'tranquil, calm, purified,
clear, clean, bright, happy, pure,
sinless' 8
VIbbhantacitta 'with wandering or
confused mind' 4.1
vibhavataphli 'craving for extinction' 12.1
vimala 'clear, clean, bright' 6.
vimuccati 'be freed' 6.1
viya 'like, as' (particle of comparison) 6.1
viraja 'free from defilement' 12.1
virati 'complete abstention' 5
viravati 'shouts, screams' IO.l
virago 'detachment' 9.1
viriyam 'effort, exertion, energy' 1
viriyarambho 'taldng effort' 1.1
virocati 'shmes forth, is brilliant' 4
vilfina 'cut off (of hair)., scanty' ll.l
vivaro(am) 'cavity, hole, hollow' ll
vivata #ppl of vivarati 10
vivatamatta 'as soon as it was open'
(vivata + malta) 10
vivadati 'disputes,quarrels'; pres. part.
vivadamaoa 4.1 · samkamanto 'one who crosses over,
vivarati 'open, disclose'; ppl. vivata 7.1
vivadaparma 'disputing., qumTeling' 4.1
vivado 'dispute, quarrel, contention' 4.1
vivaho 'marriage, wedding, carrying or
sending away of a bride' 6
vivitta 'secluded' 12
visarp. 'po~on' 9
visamyutto 'he who is detached' 5
visattika 'clinging to, adhering to. lust,
desire' 6.1
visama. 'unequal, disharmonious' 4.1
visarado 'self-possessed, confident,
knowing how to conduct oneself,
wise' 8.1
visuddhi 'purity' 10
visesato 'specially, particularly' 4.1
vibaiillati 'suffer' 10
vibarati 'live, reside, abide, lead a life· 3.1
vihilp.sati 'injures, hurts, oppresses' 6
vihesa 'vexation' 9.1
villa 'lute' 6.1
vttamala 'stainless' 12.1
vimamsati 'tests, considers' 11
vuccati 'is called, is said'
pres. part. vuccamana 4.1
vutthahati 'rise, get up'
(aJtemate form u(lhahati, ut\hati) 9.1
'Iitts', (alternate fonn u@piyamaoa) ll.!
vutthi 'rain' (feminine.) 10
vuiia 'said, spoken' (ppl. of vadati) 7.1
ve ·verily, indeed, truly' 5
vejjekammam 'medical practice' 10.1
vejjo 'doctor, physician' 10.1
vetanam :wages, hire' 12
vedana ·'feeling, sensation' 5.1
Venagapura city name 8 . .·
Venagapurika .'of Venagapura' 8
vepullarp. 'fullness, ab~ndance · 1. . sakkli '(it is) possible' 3
veyyaKaraQ.a 'explanation, exposition 12.1
veram 'enmity, ill-will' 2
veramani 'abstinence' 6
vela 'tinie' u
Vesall place name 8.1
vehaso 'sky, air' ll
Veluvana place name .9.1
voharo 'trade, bUsiness, merchandise' 5
vylikaroti 'explains, clarifies, answers' ll
vyadhi 'sickness, malady, illness,
disease' 3.1
sa- . 'one's own' 2
sarpkappa 'intention, purpose' 12.~
samkamati 'cross esover, transrrugrates
ppl. srupkanta 3
One who transmigrates' 3
saQ1kampati 'tremble' 12.1 . . saia 'mindful' 5.1
samkharo 'essential condttton, a thing
cOnditioned, mental coefficient'
(normallY in plural saQlkhara) 5.1
samkhittena 'in short, in brief' 3.1 ,
saffigaho 'assistance, protection,
kind disposition' 5
sarp.g3tigo 'he who has ·gone beyond
(overcome) attachment' 5
sarpgho 'community, associa~on, . satta 'sunk' 7
esp ..community of Buddhist monks 1
saiPyamo 'control, restrarnt 5
saffiyojanam 'bond, fetter' (that binds
the
One .to wheel of transmigration) 5
samvattati lead to, be conducive to' t·
saffivaso·association, co-residency,
ilitimacy' 12 -.. . ,
satpvijjati 'seems to be, appears, eXIsts
6.1
G~LGWSSARY
sarp.vidahati· 'arranges, applies, prepares,
provides' 10.1
samvuta 'controlled, restrained' 1
sar{tvesiyati 'puts to bed'; pres. part.
sarp.vesiyamana 11.1
samsaro 'life cycle' 5
sarP.mta 'possessed of consisting in' 12.1
saka 'one's own' 11.1
Sakato (am) 'cart' 10.1 .
sakiflcano 'one who has something, one
who is full of worldly attachment' 5
sakuno 'bird' 8.1
sai<unto 'bird' 4
sakubbanto 'doer, one who practices' 5
sakkaccam 'properly, well, carefully,
thoroughly' 2
sakkaroti 'respect' 9.1
.. .
sakkoti 'be able, can'; fut. sakkhissati 10
saldthara -'pebble' 10
Sakya family name (lineage of the
Buddha) 6
saggo 'heaven~_ celestial world, happy
place' 4
sace 'if' 7
saccam 'truth' 3.1
sacchikaroti 'realizes for oneself,
experiences'; ppl. sacchikata fut. pass.
part. sacchikatabba 12.1
saflj8nati 'know. recogruze, be aware
, of' 9
sai'lfia ·perception, recognition, signal,
indication' 5.1
·saffiianam 'token, mark, sign' 11
satho ~fr:iudulent one' l2
.
satam 'hundred'; compounding stem satu
6 .
satakkaku 'epithet for a cloud' 6
sati kayagata 'mindfulness relating to
the body' 12 .
satlmant 'mindful one', nom. sg.sattma) 7
sato 'being, existing' (genitive sg. of
san!) U.l
.
satto 'being, living being, cre.ature 2
satthar 'teacher, the Buddha 9
sad'a 'always, foreVer' 5
sadevaka 'together with (that) of the
gods' 9.1 .
saddo 'sound, word U
saddha 'determined, faithful,
believing' 2.2
saddhli 'determination' ll
199
 GENERAL GLOSSARY
saddhilpcaro 'constant companion, one
who accompanies' 7
saddhammo 'true doctrine' 1.1
saddhim 'with' 6
sananuina 'eternal, old, ancient' 2
sanikaip 'slowly, gradually' !0.1
santulthi 'contentment' 5
sant 'good person' nom. sg. santo 6
sant(a) 'existing, being' (pres.part. of
atthi), genitive sg. sato 5.1
sant3/tranquil, calm' 9.1
santikaJit 'the vicinity, near'; loc. santike
· 'to (the vicinity), abl. santika 'from
the ·vicinity (of)· .2 7
santo 'fatigued one, he who is tired' 5
santo nom. sg of sant 'good person· .
sandasseti 'compares with, shows
(against)·; pres. part. sandassiyamana
'that which something is compared
with' 9
sandi!tltika 'visible, actual, of advantage
to this life, empirtcal 5.1
sandissati 'tally with, agree with' 9
sandoSaiJl 'defilement, pollution' 6.1
sapadlinaljl 'in order, without
interruption, without skipping (in alms-
begging ofa Buddhist monk)' 8.1
sappo 'a serpent' !0.1
saphala 'fruitful' 5
sabatthaka 'a gift comprising eight of
·everything given' !0
sabba 'all' 2
sabbena sabb3IJ1 'completely, entirely
altogether' 8
sama 'even, equal, harnionious' 4.1
samakaiJl 'equally, (at the same time)' 8.1
samagga 'being in unity' 4.1
samaiifiata 'designated, notorious' l2
satnal)ako 'ascetic, recluse' (may have a
connotation of contempt) 8.1
sama1,1o 'recluse, mendiCant' 4
samata 'equality, evenness,
normal state' 6.1
samativijjhati 'pierce through' !0
samatta 'completed, grasped, accepted,
accomplished' 3.1
sarnatho 'calming down, cessation' 9.1
samanupassati 'sees, perceives
correctly' l
samarulagata 'endowed with, possessed
of' 2
samayo 'time, period, season' 6.1
sama-sama 'equal' 10.1
sama:dapeti 'encourages, incites,
200
rouses' 3.1 1
samadinna 'accepted' 3.1
sama:diyati 'takes upon or with oneself;
ppl. samadinna 6
sama:dhi 'concentration' 12.1
samadhinintittaiJl 'object of meditation,
object of concentration' 2
samano 'being, existing' ll.I
samaruta 'collected, composed, settied,
attentive' 4.1 · sippiko 'artisan, craftsman 5
samifijati 'is moved, shaken' 4
samirati 'is moved, blown' 4
samudayo 'origin, rise' 2.2
X samudayo 'having X as origin,
arising from X 2.2
samuddo 'ocean, sea· ll
sameti 'correspond, agree' 8
sampakampati 'trembles, is shaken' !2.1
sampajlina 'thoughtful, mindful,
attentive, deliberate· 4.1
sampajjalita 'ablaze, in flames' 5.1
sampati -·now, right now, just now' 8
sampayogo 'association' 3.1
samparayika 'belonging to the next
world' 8.1 · sukh3vsha 'bringing. happmess 8
samparivatta.sayi 'one who sleeps turning
to and fro' 7.1
sampavedhati 'shake violently' !2.1
sampha 'frivolous, foolish' 11.1
sambahula 'many' !OJ
sambodha 'highest wisdom' !2.1
sambodhi 'enlightenment' !2.1
samma 'friend', a term of address
for a friend !0.1
sammajjati 'sweeps' 10
sammati 'be pacified, cease· 2
sammatta 'intoxicated (by /with),
overpowered by' 6.1
sammada 'drowsiness, intoxication' 6.1
sammappaiiiiii 'right knowledge, true
wisdom' 7.1
sammappajano. 'fully comprehending
one'4
samma 'properly, rightly' !2.1
sammadilthi 'right understanding' ll.l
sammaditthiko 'he who has right views' 1
sannnaditthin 'he who has right
understanding' U.l
sammasamhuddho 'perfectly enlightened
one, a univerSal Buddha' 6
sammukho 'face to face, in presence' 9
sammUiha 'confused, confounded,
stupid' 2
GENERAL GLOSSARY
sammodati 'exchange friend!)' greetings, (Mynah bird)' !0.1
Slijho proper name 3
rejoices( together), delights
past sammodi 6.! .
siqtghatako(-am) 'cross, cross-roads' 3.1
sil.d<hli 'study, training, discipline' 6J .
sammodam8na 'in agreem~nt, on fnendly
sild<hilpadam 'precept, rule, mstruction 6
terms, rejoicing together 4.1 . . Siglilaka proper name 9.!
sammoso- 'bewilderment, confu~to~ 1
sineho 'affection' U .
sayanasana 'bed and seat, l~gmg ·12
saf3Q3qt 'refuge, protection 1 sippaill ·craft,science, art, techmcal
saravatl 'having resonance or knowledge· s . .
. .
melodiousness' 6.1 siraql 'head accusative Slf3.Ql or SlfO 11.1
sartram 'body' !0
saro ·voice, sound' 10.1 . . sighatararp. 'faster 1 soon~r· 8.1
sllavatl 'virtuous woman 11.1
sallakkheti 'observes, constders H
sllavant 'virtuous' ll.l . .
sallapati 'talk, speak: !O . to' silasampanno 'one endowe~ wtt:J:t virti.Je,
savanam 'hearing, listenmg 2 .
one who practices morality, VIrtuous
sasufo father-in-law; ace. ~SUQl ~·.
sassamapa-briiholapll'incl~ding religious one' 6
Sivako proper name 5.1
teachers and brahmins l2 .
sahate 'conquers, overcomes 6.1 slsaljl 'head' !OJ
Siho a_·proper name 8.1
sahayo 'friend' 7
sahi!aiJl 'texts, scriptures taken as a su 'indeed, verily' !!
sukham 'happiness, comfort, ease,
whole'4 ... well:being' 2.2 . ,
sakaccha 'conversation, dtseusston 5 sukhaklima 'desirous of happ~ess ll
slikha 'branch' !OJ
slini 'curtain' !0 sugati 'happiness, bliss, happy (ate,
sadiyati 'appropriate, take on oneself,
happy state, a reahn of bliss B.!
enjoy' 4 . sugatin 'righteous one 9
.sadutara 'sweet~. more pleasant 11
suggati =sugati 10 . , .
siidhu 'good' 8 10 1 sucaritaljl 'good behaVI.or 7
sadhuka 'good or righteous (one) ..
sadhukam 'well' (adverb), thoroughly 9 sucinna ·well-practiced ll
·sucC!ianna ·well-thatched, well-
·""""'dhiro ·one. who is
sa_dhuvu=• df oft'noble covered' 10
behavior, one who IS stea as7
sunati 'hears, listens'; ppl. suta; ger.
sapateyyaiJl ·wealth' !2 ,
slimam 'of oneself, by oneself 6 suiva(na) 3J . .
suta 'heard, that which IS hear~
samaillmrp_ 'siate of an ascetic or monk,
(ppl. of sunati) 7 . .
the holy life 4 . suttaljl discursive part of Buddhist
slimi 'lord, sir, husband !OJ . scripture (Sanskrit siltra) . 9 .
s3misa 'characterized by or havmg
tvana 'having heard, havmg listened
limisam' 4.! ' '2 suto' (gerund of suuati) 4
sayarpbasamayaD), 'in the evenmg
sayati 'tastes, eats 3.1 . . sudam 'indeed' !2 . .
sududdasa 'exceedingly difficult to
sara 'essence, heart of ~ tree 12 see/.grasp' 8 . .
sarada 'autunmal, fresh 8 ' ' sudesita ·well-proclauned 9.1
slilittakasippaiJl 'art of slinging stones !0
sunakho 'dog' !! .
savako 'disciple' 6 . sunipuna ·very subtle 8 . . )'
savajja 'blameable, faulty 2.2
Suppav'asa proper_ name (femrrune ,
Slivatthi place name 8.! . vocative Suppavase 4
saveti 'announce, tell, declare 8 .
sasanarp_ 'teaching, message, (Buddhist) subha 'pleasant, good' !2
subhariya 'good Wife U.l
order'.9 · · db · subhavita 'weli- . d' 10
sasava 'with, liaving, or charactenze Y developed,cultivated,.trame
asavo 4.1 . subhasita ·well spoken 2
s;iJikapotako 'a young brrd
201
 GENERAL GLOSSARY
subhasitadubbhasitaJ!l 'things well and
badly spoken, things proper to say and
not proper to say· 2
sumana 'of a happy mind, of a pleased
mind' 5.1
sura liquor' 4
suva!)J)a 'gold' 12
suvaooaka:ra 'goldsmith' 12
suvimuttacitto 'one with a well-freed
mind' 4
susamahita 'well-restrained, well
composed' 12
susikkhita 'well-trained, well-practiced' 5
suSif8rukkho 'a tree having a hollow·
!0.1
suhajjo 'fliend, good-hearted one' 6.1
sapa 'soup, broth, curry' 8
siiro (-a) ·valiant, courageous' ll.l
sekho 'one still in training, a learner' 9.1
se!tha 'qoble, best, excellent' ll
se$ata 'excellence, foremost, pi3ce' 5
seti 'sleeps, dwells, lives' 6.1
senapati 'a general' 8.1
Seniya a clan name (literally:
'belonging to the army') 6
semana 'lying (down)' (pres. part. of
seti 'lies') ll.l
seyyatha 'just as, just like, as if' 8
seyy~thapi 'just as (if)' ( seyyatha + pi) 12
seyyo 'better' ll.l
selo 'rock' 4
Se1o proper name 6
sevati 'serve, practice. take upon
oneself' fut. pass. part. sevitabba 7.1
sevana 'association' 5
so 'he; that one (male)'
(nomiriative singular of sa) 3
soko .'sorrow, grief' 4
socati 'grieve· 10
Sopo proper name 6.1
sol)c)il 'elephant's trunk' 10
202
SOI)c)ikO 'drunkard' 7.1
sol)c)I 'a natural tank in arock' 10
sol)c,lo 'one who is addicted to drink,
a drunkard' 7.1
SOtaJ!l 'ear' 3.1 . .
sodheti 'to clear, to clean' 10
sovacassata 'gentleness, obedience' 5
sva:tanaya 'for tomorrow, for the
following day' 6
hatth8Q1 'hand, trunk of an elephant' 10
hatthi 'elephant' 10
hatthiraja 'elephant-king, thief of
elephants' 10
hatthiriipak8Q1 'elephant's image or
picture' 10
hattho 'hand' 6.1
hadayaJ!l 'mind, heart' ll
hanati 'kills, strikes' (also hanti) 3
handa ··well then, now' ll.l
harati 'take away, remove'
have 'indeed, certainly, surely'' ll
hiQ1sati 'oppresses' ll
hitaQ1 'benefit, welfare, good' 3
hitva ger. of jahilti 7
hirima: 'modest' (masculine nominative
singular of hilimant) 2.2
hili 'sense of shame, bashfulness' 6.1
hina 'low, base' 6.1
hinaya avattati literally·'turp to the
lower·. hence:'give up orders, return
to secular life' 6.1
hutvji ger. of Mti I bhavati 10.1
huriihurarp 'from existence to
existence' 6.1
het!hil 'below, beneath, underneath' 10
he!thima 'lower, below' 9 .1·
hetu 'basis, cause' 7.1
X hetu 'for the sake of X for the
purpose of X by reason of X' 7.1
hoti 'is, becomes' ger. hutva 3
hurarp 'in the other world,
in another existence' 4
GRAMMATICAL INDEX
This grammatical index has two sectioris. The first has entries . according t9
the p-ali forms, and is arranged by the Pai alphabetical order. It intludes affixes,
particles. clitics, etc, It also includes the· forms that were used to illustrate classes
of nouns and verbs, since that may assist the student in accessing those classes.
The second pati of the il;ldex is according to English entries for tenses,
cases, etc. and is thus in English alphabetical order.
GRAMMATICAL INDEX SECTION t PAU ENIRJES•
-a stem nouris (maSculine and neuter) ima- 'this, that' ll,2:14, IV,!
I, 1.21 im8Q1 'this,that' (neuter) IT,2.4, IV ,I
a- negative 1,6.2 -iya comparative XI, 7
iva 'like, as' IV,lO
aggi 'fire' (masculine -i stem)
aflfla ·(an)other' Vl,l3 -iss- future tense IX,3,
a!thlinaJ!l and !hanaJ!l V,7 · -iss- conditional XI,2.1
at tan ·self' (masculine -an stem) VI,l, -1 stem nouns (femiriine) 1.1.23
(as reflexive) Vlll,3 upasamkami (-is aorist) Vl.7.2
atthi 'is ,exists' ill,2.1, optative Vll,l ubho 'both' Xll,l
-u stem nouns (feminine) VI,6
attho 'purpose' compounds VID,8
addasa (root aolist )Vi,7.1 -e- stem verbs ill,7, Vlll,6;
-an stems(masculine) VI,I (-e- causatives) X,6.1
-ant present participle Ill,6.12, V.3 -e- oPtotive IV,6
-aniya future passive participle eka 'one· IV,7.2
Vll,2.1 etaJ!l 'this' 0,2.12
ayal!l 'this, that' (masc. and fern.) etamatthaQ1(vadami) lll,l3
ll,2.4, IV.l eti 'comes' VII,5
-ar stem noun.$ IX,l -eyy- optative Ill.4
arahant (forms) V,4 eva emphatic lll,I0.23
aVoca (past of vac~ 'say, speak') eso aharp XII, 7
--o- stem verbs m, 7
VI,B, Vl!l,4
-as stem.nouns VI,5 ka interrogative pronoun III,l
asu ·a certain' XII,2 katapuiiD.o compound type X,ll
assosi past tense (-s aorist) IX,2.1 katama interrogative. 11,3
kayira(tha) (optativ~ of karoti) IX,7
ahaJ!l T V ,11
-a stem nouns (feminine) 11,1 karal)lya (future participle of karoti)
adi,adini 'etcetera· X,9 Vll,2; X,5
-ape- causatives X, 6.3 karoti 'does' 1-o stem verb) 0!,7.2
aha, ilhu VI,ll ka feminine inteli'. prorioun III,l
-ittl}a superlative XI,7 kama 'desiring' Vlll,9
-itabba future passive participle kim neuter interr. pronoun III,l
Vll,2.1 ko. mas·culine interr. pronoun III,l
-i stem nouns (masculine) VID,l kho emphatic .Ill,l0.21
-i stem nouns (feminine) 1).23 gacch8ti past tense IX,2.2
(i)ti 1,3.3 go ·cow' IV,2
- in stem nouns VI,2 ca 'and' 1,3.2
 GRAMMATICAL INDEX
cakkhu 'eye' (neuter -u stem) 0, 13
catu 'four' IV,7.3
ct indefinite m,tOJ
ce 'if IV,ll
cetas 'thought' ( -asstem) Vl,5
jacca (case forms of jati) XD,3
!hanam and at!hanam V, 7
-!hanam compounds Vl,l5
-(i)(tlja superlative XI,7
-ta past participle V,5Jl
-tabba future passive participle
VD,2J
tam third pers. pronoun 0,2.ll
· -tama superlative XI,7
-tara comparative XI,7
ti 'three' IV,7.3
tul!l infinitive 0.4
tumhe 'you (plural)' V,L2
1e 2nd pers. sing.. enclitic V,1,3
-to ablative ending ill,l5
tvam 'you (singular)' V,L2
-tva(na) gerunds IV,3.ll; X,3
· dis- /passati 'sees' 0,4.13
dvi 'two' IV,7.4
dbamma (masculine -a stem) l,L21
--dhamma compounds VI, 15
dbatu 'element'(-u stem) Vl,6
na- negatives 1,6.1
-na past participle V, 5.12
natthi 'is not' ill,3
nadi (fentinine -i stem) 1,123
nivesaye (alternate -e verb
endings) Vill,6
-niya future passive participle
VD,2J; X.5
nu interrogative emphatic ill,10.24
no negative VIlA
oo first pers p1 enclitic V,l,3
pafica 'five' IV,7.5
para 'other' IV,S; Vl,l3
parivuta Vl,l4
passati /dis- 'sees' 0,4.13
pitar 'father'
(relationship -ar nouns) IX,112
-pe- cauS.tives X, 6.2
pe(yyalam) discourse substitute 0,8
GRAMMATICAL INDEX
brahman 'god Brahma' Vl,12
bhavati 'be, become' ill,2.3; sa/tam 'third pers. pronoun' 0,2.11 sabba 'all' IV,S
s~- reflexive prefix ll,9 sa feminine pronoun ll,2.l
future forms IX,3J (see also hoti)
bhavant- address form Vl,4; Vill,5 sakka · is possible' III,ll sata. 'hall' (feminine -a stem)
silavant (-vant adjective/noun) V,2
bhavissati with past part Xl,5.2, sace 'if VD,6
. sati (locative absolute) X,2 so masculine pronoun ll,2.1 .
with future passive part. XI,5.3
bh,iiveti 'increases, develops s8tthar 'teacher' (agent -tar nouns) ha- (root) 'decrease' VII,8
(-e stem verb) ill,7J hi emphatic ill,l0.22
IX,Lll
bhikkhu '(Buddhist) monk' hoti 'is, becomes' lll,2.2,
saddhil!l Vl,l4
sante o6cative absolute) X,2 with past particijlle Xli,S.l
(masculine -u stems) 0,12
santo 'virtuous one' V1,3 hotu 3 Sg. iniperative Vill,2
bhoto < bhavant · (vocative) VI 4
maccarin 'miSer'
(-in s.tem noun) Vl,2
mahan! 'great' VI, 3
manas (-as stem) Vl,5
-'-mant nouns and adjectives V.2 .
rna negative VD.4; prohibitive XI,3
ma:tar 'rriother'
(relationship -ar nouns) IX,Ll2
-mana present participle IV,4
with passive verbs IX,5
me first pers sing. enclitic V,l,3
-ya gerunds IV,3.12 '
-ya optatives VD,l
· ya/yam (relative pronoun) 0.2.13
yadi 'if ill,9J
yasma ill,l2
ya (fentinine relative pronoun) ll,2.13
yati 'goes' IX,6
yena .... tena VI,IO
yo (masculine relative pronoun)
ll,2.13
yohi koci 'whosoever' V,6
-yya comparative XI,7
ratti (fentinine -i stem) 1,123
rajan 'king' (forms) VI,L3
Iiipa (neuter -a stem) 1,1.22
labhati 'obtains, receives'
(-a stem verb) 1,2
labbhati 'comes about, exists' XI,6
vac- 'say' (past) VI,S; Vill,4
vatti 'speaks'(past) Vill,4
-vant nouns and adjectives V.2
va 'or' 1,3.2,
· agreement of forms with Xll,6
vo 2nd pers. pl.. enclitic V,l,3
204
205
 GRAMldATICAL INDEX

GRAMMATICAL INDEX SECTION 2, ENGLISH ENTRIES

l OPTATIVE ill,4, IV,6, Vll,l
use ill,4.2
PRONOUNS II,2
GRAMMATICAL INDEX

enclitic forms V,l.3

ABLATIVE IN -to IIl,l5 absolute X,!; Xll,4 middle endings Xl,4.3 first and second person V,l
ACCUSATIVE !,142 ·of fear IV,9 PARTICIPLES relative 1,4; ll,2
destination I,B GERUND -tvli(na), -ya IV,3 modifying nouns X,4 third 'person ll,2.l
manner ill,8 use IV,3.2; X,3 future (passive) participle Vll,2 REFLEXIVE attan VIII,3
time II,!O in -Iiiya X,5 REFLEXIVE PREFIX sa-
HUNDREDS' . VI,l2
ADDREsS FORM bhavant Vl,4; VIII,5 'IF' ill,9 past (perfective) participle V,5 II,9
ADJECTIVES IN -vant and -mant V,2 IMPERATIVE ill,5; XI,! past participial sentences with RELATIONSHIP NOUNS IX,l.l2
AGENT NOUNS IX,l.l1 instrumental subjects V1,9 RELATIVE PRONOUN ya-/yam
tinrd person VIII,2
AGREEMENT present participle ill,6; Xl,4.5 1,4; ll,2.!3
INDEFINITE d ill,!O.l
of adjectives 1,7 -mana IV,4; IX,5 see also under. 'correlative'
INFINITNE IN -tum ll,4
with va 'or' phrases XII,6 ·use of ll,4.2 feminine in -'i AND -a IV,5 REPEATED FORMS <REDUPUCATION)
CASES 1,14 PARTICLES ill,lO X,B
INTERROGAllVES
use of cases VIII,7 kalama 'which' ll,3 PASSNE VERBS IX,4 SANDHI 1,5; ll,l2; ill,l7; VIII,!O;
(see also under specific cases) PAST (PERFECTIVE) PARTICIPLE Vl,l7; X,IO
ka(kofkim/ka) ill,!
CAUSATNE VERBS X,6 see under 'participles· SERIES (conjoining in) !,9
'LIKE, AS' -iVa IV,lO
cLmcs 1,3 'LNE BY' V,!O .. PAST TENSE ('AOR5T') VI,7 SUPERLATIVE Xl,7
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE addasa type STEM FORM (nouns) l,l.l
LOCATIVE CASE Vll,7
XI,7 ('a- and root aorists' VI,7J 'THIS, NOT TIIAT' V,9
absolute VIII,3
COMPOUNDS 1,10 ;ll,l2 ;ill,l4 among' or 'in' VI,t6 assosi type (' -s aorist') IX,2 VERBS 1,2
with- gata II,ll.2 upasaiJlkami type ('-is aorist') root and present stem 1,2.1
reference and contact XI,5
co-ordinate ll,ll.l of vac- 'SAY' VI,B; VIII,3.l -a verbs. 1,2
MASCULINE NOUNS
katapuili\o type X,U PERFECTIVE FORMS (COMPOUND) -e VERBS VIII,6
-a stems 1,1.21
CONDffiONAL XI,2 Xll,5 -o verbs VIII,6
-an stems VI,l
CONJOINING IN SERIES I, 9 PARTICLES (CLffiCS) 1,3 'be' and 'become' lll,2
-i stems VIII,l
CORRELATIVE CONSTRUCTION ll,6 PREFIX sa- "Wffil' V,8 causative verbs X,6
-u stems ll,l.2
D5COURSESUBSTITUTE .. POSTPOSffiONS ll,7; X,7 passive verbs IX,4·
MIDDLE (VOICE) Xl,4
pe(yyiilaml II,B · PREPOSffiONS ll,7; X,7 root bli- Vll,8
imperative XI,4.1
EMPHATICS hi, kho, eva, nu ill',10.2 past tense XI,4.2 ' PRESENT TENSE 1,2.2 root vac- VI,8; VIII,4
ENCLmC PRONOUN FORMS V,l.3. stem 1,2.1 root dis- ll,4.!3
present and·future tense XI,4.1
EQUATIONAL SENTENCES ll,5 middle forms Xl,4.l .(see also under specific forms:
NEGATIVES 1,6
FEMININE NOUNS no and mli. Vll,4 PRESENT PARTICIPLE participles, tenses, etc.)
·-a stems ll,U see under 'participles' VOCATIVE 1,143
NEUTER -a STEMS 1,1.22
-i AND -'i stems 1,1.23 PROHIBmvE PARTICLE rna- Xl,3
NOMINATIVE 1,141
-u stems VI,6 NOUNS 1.1
FIRST AND SECOND PERSON forms ll,l
PRONOUNS V,l (see also under ·cases')
FUTURE PARTICIPLES numbers 1,13
see under 'participles' types 1,1.2
FUTURE TENSE ill,6; IX,3 agent nouns IX,Lll
iI
GEMINATE CONSONANT -vant and -mant nouns V,2 J
CASE FORMS: jaccli Xll,3 (see also under 'masculine'·,
GENDER 1,12 feminine', and 'neuter')
GENmvE NUMERALS 1.!3, IV,7

206 207